Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
. ;
a':'i
iffy
'-kuh:,
*FM 100-2-3
Field Manual
No. 100-2-3 Headquarters
Department of the Army
Washington, DC, 6 June 1991
Preface
This field manual is part of FM series 100-2, The Soviet Army. The other
volumes in this series are FM 100-2-1, The Soviet Army: Operations and Tactics,
and FM 100-2-2, The Soviet Army: Specialized Warfare and Rear Area Support.
The three volumes complement each other. Used together, they provide a
thorough reference on the Soviet Army.
These manuals are the US Army's definitive source of unclassified informa-
tion on Soviet ground forces and on their interaction with other services in
combined arms warfare. The Threats Directorate, Combined Arms Command,
Fort Leavenworth, Kansas, updates these manuals periodically to provide the
most current unclassified information available.
The proponent of this publication is HQ TRADOC. Users are encouraged to
recommend changes improving this manual to Commander, US Army Combined
Arms Command, ATTN: ATZL-SWW-L, Fort Leavenworth, KS 66027-6900, using
DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms).
Unless otherwise stated, whenever the masculine gender is used, both men
and women are included.
This publication contains photographs from copyrighted sources. The
citations for these materials accompany the individual photographs.
Contents
Chapter 2. Personnel
Manpower Procurement .. 2-0
Conditions of Service .... 2-3
Ranks ...................
Reserve System ......... _ I 1111
1111 2-6
2-8
Chapter 3. Training
Premilitary Programs .......... 3-1
Military Educational Institutions ................. 3-4
Individuals and Units .......... 3-6
Chapter 4. Organization
Motorized Rifle Regiment Structure (BTR) ......... 4-3
Chapter 5. Equipment
Small Arms .......................... ......... 5-2
CONTENTS
The Soviet armed forces include five separate components, the Soviet ground forces. Highly
components: the strategic rocket forces, the ground modernized organization and equipment combine
forces, the air forces, the air defense forces, and to make the present Soviet ground forces the most
the naval forces. The generic term "Soviet Army" powerful land army in the world, with unprece-
normally includes all but the naval forces. This dented flexibility, mobility, and firepower.
manual concentrates on the largest of these
ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROL
The Commander in Chief (CINC) of the Ground Defense (MOD) General Staff on ground forces
Forces is a Deputy Minister of Defense. He is matters. It also acts as a consolidation point for
equal in status to the CINCs of the other com- the work of the ground forces directorates. Among
ponents. His duties include supervision of technical the principal directorates of the Ground Forces
affairs and research and development, direct Headquarters are the Political Directorate, the
control of nonoperational training, and supervision Combat Training Directorate, and the Military
of ground forces administrative organs. He does Educational Institutions Directorate, all of which
not have direct operational control over the troops. have counterparts at MOD level.
This lack of operational control is not imme- Large technical directorates exist for those troop
diately apparent from the composition of the branches peculiar to the ground forces. Each troop
Ground Forces Headquarters. Its composition branch directorate acts as a branch or service
includes the Main Staff and several technical headquarters which prescribes the organization,
directorates. The Main Staff, however, apparently equipment, tactics, and training for its branch and
fills a traditional role of coordinating, planning, operates the career management program for its
and maintaining liaison with the Ministry of leading personnel.
FM 100-2-3
TROOP CATEGORIES
For administrative purposes, the Soviet ground become important to other components, the MOD
forces comprise three categories: combat arms generally oversees missile equipment development.
branches (troops), special troops, and services. However, a Chief of Missile Troops and Artillery
These are administrative categories pertaining to is present in Ground Forces Headquarters. His
personnel, not organization categories pertaining supporting administrative agency is large and
to units. Thus, troops of one combat arms branch, contains a coordinating staff. Also, chiefs of
such as artillery, may organizationally be in missile troops and artillery appear in the special
support units subordinate to a unit made up of staffs of combined arms units down to, and
troops of another combat arms branch (for including, regiments. At regimental level, this
example, motorized rifle or tank). These support official is simply called the chief of artillery.
units may also include special troops and services.
Air Defense Troops (Voyska PVO)
COMBAT ARMS BRANCHES This branch recently became a separate com-
The firing elements of the ground forces com- ponent combining air defense elements formerly
prise combat arms branches (troops). They differ under the National Air Defense Troops (PVO
from one another in organization, armament, Strany) and the Air Defense Troops of the Ground
tactics, and role in combat. Directorates of Ground Forces (PVO Sukhoputnykh Voysk). Although
Forces Headquarters administer the troop branches MOD headquarters now administers them, the
peculiar to the ground forces. troops may serve under combined arms command
in the field during wartime. They coordinate
Motorized Rifle
closely with aviation and radiotechnical elements
Motorized rifle troops generally parallel the in operational matters. Air defense schools pre-
infantry and mechanized infantry of other armies. viously under the ground forces now belong to the
These troops constitute the basic arm of the Air Defense Troops.
ground forces; therefore, various agencies under
the Ground Forces CINC, rather than one special Airborne
organization, administer their affairs. These Airborne troops form a reserve force of the
agencies prescribe motorized rifle and combined Supreme High Command (VGK) or the wartime
arms tactics and organization. They prepare Stavka VGK, although operational control of them
training schedules for motorized rifle and combined specifically belongs to the Chief of the General
arms units. They also administer motorized rifle Staff. The VGK may-
schools and manage motorized rifle officer person-
* Control their combat employment directly.
nel. Other arms and services provide them with
logistic support. * Place them under the command of a theater
headquarters.
Tank
* Place them under operational control of a front
The Chief of Tank Troops in Ground Forces
or army to support operational missions.
Headquarters heads this branch. A Main Direc-
torate of Tank Troops supports him. The Main The troops are not subordinate to a ground forces
Directorate is an intricate organization which acts field command until the VGK commits them. This
as an administrative headquarters. Tank troop definite separation suggests that they have the
officers command tank units at all levels. Com- status of a sixth distinct component of the armed
bined arms formations feature a special staff forces, even though they are nominally subordinate
officer as chief of tank troops. He commands sub- to the CINC, Ground Forces, because of this
ordinate tank elements and reports to the com- special status.
bined arms commander.
SPECIAL TROOPS
Missile Troops and Artillery The special troops provide combat support to
This is one of the most prestigious branches the combined arms field forces of the ground
of the ground forces or the MOD. Artillery troops forces. They also support the other components of
have long held an honorable position in Russian the armed forces. For this reason, they are admin-
military annals. In recent decades, technological istered centrally from directorates in the MOD.
advances in missile weaponry have enhanced that Ground Forces Headquarters, however, contains
position. Since missile armaments have also specialized directorates or departments in each of
FM 100-2-3
FORCE STRUCTURE
The Soviets have organized and equipped their continental TV can include land, air space, and
ground forces to support their defensive doctrine. assorted internal and coastal waterways. The
Moreover, they are constantly strengthening and Western TV, for example, includes the European
modernizing their organization and equipment to land mass and associated islands, the associated
improve their capabilities to fight either nuclear air space, the Baltic and Mediterranean Seas, and
or nonnuclear war. A nuclear exchange in Europe portions of the Arctic and Atlantic Oceans. The
could easily cause tremendous damage to the Soviet TVs have political and economic significance in
Union. Therefore, the Soviets clearly want to be shaping Soviet military goals. They contain one
able to fight and win a war in Europe quickly, or more TVDs.
before either side employs nuclear weapons.
TVD
The Soviets have determined that the only way
to win such a war is by offensive operations. The The TVD geographical concept is the focus of
Soviet concept of the offensive emphasizes surprise planning and control for employment of Soviet
and high rates of advance combined with over- armed forces in major theater strategic actions.
whelming firepower. The concept of combined The Soviet planners divide the world into 14
arms is at the heart of Soviet combat doctrine. TVDs: 10 continental TVDs and 4 oceanic TVDs.
The continental TVDs include not only the land
MAJOR GEOGRAPHICAL AND masses, but also the air space, inland waterways,
FORCE GROUPINGS and a segment of the surrounding oceans and
seas. The Western TVD of the Western TV, for
The Soviets organize ground forces by geo-
example, includes NATO's Central Region plus
graphical boundaries into theaters of war (TVs),
Denmark and the Danish Straits.
theaters of military operation (TVDs), and military
districts and groups of forces. They can organize In wartime, the Soviets would employ inter-
forces into large field formations called fronts mediate High Commands of Forces (HCF) that
and armies. would be responsible to the VGK. In keeping with
the Soviet concept of centralized control and com-
TV bined arms operations, the TVD HCF not only
The Soviets envision that hostilities might occur controls the assets available in the ground forces,
in any of three TVs: the Western, the Southern, but also the naval and air assets. Some, if not
and the Far Eastern. A TV is a broad, geo- all, of the non-Soviet Warsaw Pact forces might
graphically oriented designation within which also be subordinate to a TVD HCF. The TVD's
Soviet armed forces would function in wartime. A most important function in wartime would be to
FM 100-2-3
orchestrate and control TVD-wide strategic Soviets gain flexibility in either offensive or defen-
operations as directed by the HCF in support of sive roles. An army can operate in different geo-
VGK campaign plans. graphical areas and under various operational
Forces within a TVD can consist of as few as constraints. Besides its complement of two to five
one front or as many as five or six. Other forces maneuver divisions, a typical army of either
type will normally have artillery, missile, air
allocated to a TVD can include fleets, airborne
defense, aviation, engineer, chemical, signal,
divisions, tactical aviation, strategic aviation,
military transport aviation, air defense forces, and reconnaissance, and rear support units.
strategic rocket forces. MANEUVER DIVISIONS
Soviet maneuver divisions are well-balanced,
Military Districts and Groups of Forces
powerful, and mobile fighting units. They have a
There are 14 military districts in the USSR and combined arms structure as well as a comprehensive
4 groups of forces in Eastern Europe. The Eastern array of combat support (CS) and combat service
European groups of forces include- support (CSS) elements. In early 1987, there were
* The Western Group of Forces (WGF) in Germany. 211 active Soviet maneuver divisions: 150 MRDs,
52 TDs, 7 airborne divisions, and 2 static defense
* The Northern Group of Forces (NGF) in Poland. divisions. The totals did not include 2 new army
* The Central Group of Forces (CGF) in corps (NAC) and 5 mobilization divisions.
Czechoslovakia. The basic structures of the three types of
* The Southern Group of Forces (SGF) in Hungary. divisions (motorized rifle, tank, and airborne)
appear in Figure 1-1. While this manual presents
In peacetime, each of these districts and groups "type" Soviet divisions, different configurations
of forces is an administrative headquarters directly and different categories of readiness exist among
subordinate to the MOD. In wartime, the Soviets actual divisions.
will organize them into fronts for combat
operations. The military districts will continue to Divisions receive new items of equipment
function as territorial commands, serving as according to the priorities established by the MOD.
mobilization and training bases and providing High-priority formations, such as the Soviet forces
logistical and other support services. in the Western TVD, are usually the first to receive
modern equipment. When they replace older
Front material, the Soviets send that older equipment to
The front is the largest field formation in war- lower-priority units in the interior of the USSR or
time. It is an operational and administrative unit to reserve stocks. Late-model T-64/72/80 tanks
whose size and composition are subject to wide constitute about one-third of the USSR's tanks.
variation depending on its mission and situation. While older T-55 and T-62 tanks constitute most
Roughly equivalent to a US/NATO army group, of the remainder, over 1,500 T-80s are currently
a front can include three to five armies. Other deployed opposite NATO and nearly 75 percent of
forces organic or attached to a front can include the 19,000 Soviet tanks in the Western Theater are
artillery, missile, air defense, engineer, chemical, T-64/72/80 models.
signal, reconnaissance, and rear service units.
They can also include aviation, airborne, air REORGANIZATION AND MODERNIZATION
assault, airmobile, and special purpose forces. Since the mid-1960s, the Soviets have been
building a force capable of fighting decisively at
Army all levels of conflict. Recent improvements in force
The Army is the highest peacetime combined capability include-
arms formation. The Soviet ground forces desig- * Modernization of nuclear and conventional
nate two types of armies: the combined arms army weapons.
(CAA) and the tank army (TA). While both types
are actually combined arms organizations, a Soviet * Marked increases in the quantity and quality of
CAA will normally have a greater number of conventional fire support (air and artillery)
motorized rifle divisions (MRDs), while a TA will available to ground maneuver formations.
have a greater number of tank divisions (TDs). * Changes in organizational structure that generally
By altering the mix of MRDs, TDs, and artillery make fire support systems (air and artillery) more
and missile support in the army organizations, the directly responsive to the supported commander.
FM 100-2-3
Basic organizational comparison of the motorized rifle, tank, and airborne divisions
NOTES. 1. In 1989, the Soviets began replacing one tank regiment with an additional BMP-
equipped MRR in both the MRD and TD.
2. Armies in WGF are consolidating division-level SSM battalions into army-level
SSM brigades.
3. Not all MRDs and TDs have a helicopter squadron.
* Refinement and exercise of types of operations includes the main features of the most current
that take greater advantage of the increased organizational changes. The addition of new sub-
firepower, mobility, and weapons sophistication units and the upgrade of existing elements have
of the general purpose forces. expanded both MRDs and TDs. The greatest
changes are in the TDs.
In the 1980s, the Soviets began to form new
corps-type structures. These corps are divisions The BTR- and BMP-equipped motorized rifle
expanded to almost twice the size of a TD. They battalions (MRBs) have expanded the mortar
are ideally suited to act as an operational maneuver battery from six to eight tubes. They have added
group (OMG) for the front, conducting high-speed a machine gun/antitank platoon to each company
operations deep in an enemy's rear area. These in the BTR-equipped MRB. The BMP-equipped MRB
NAC formations contain around 400 tanks, 750 has added machine gun platoons, with no extra
infantry fighting vehicles (IFVs) and armored antitank weapons. Also, the Soviets have now
personnel carriers (APCs), and 300 artillery pieces consolidated the automatic grenade launcher and
and multiple rocket launchers (MRLs). Additional antiaircraft (AA) squads in platoons at the bat-
units of this type may appear once testing and talion level of both BTR- and BMP-equipped MRBs.
operational evaluation end.
In order to support the fast-moving maneuver
Soviet maneuver divisions are continuously units envisioned for future battlefields, the Soviets
undergoing a reorganization that significantly have formed materiel support units within combined
upgrades their combat capability. This manual arms units from tactical to front levels. Within.
FM 100-2-3
divisions and regiments, respectively, materiel sup- Hence, the capability of the TR and TD to conduct
port battalions and companies combine formerly largely self-supported combined arms combat has
fragmented motor transport, supply, and service increased greatly.
functions. The new rear area units will provide a
30-percent increase in motor transport assets and Large-caliber SP guns and mortars and long-
a streamlined command structure. A similar re- range MRLs have increased the artillery available
organization at army and front levels has created to army and front commanders. Additionally, some
materiel support brigades with centralized control army-level regiments have grown to brigade size
for ammunition, fuel, and other supplies. with the addition of a fourth artillery battalion.
These battalions are currently expanding from 18
The airborne division is now a fully mechanized
to 24 tubes, primarily in units opposite NATO. All
combined arms organization. Airborne divisions
now consist of three regiments equipped with the of the Soviet's SP and towed guns/howitzers
(152-millimeter and larger) are nuclear-capable.
air-droppable BMD, affording these units greater
The Soviets are also adding newer nuclear-capable
firepower and mobility. The Soviets have also
pieces such as the 203-millimeter SP gun 2S7 and
produced a new 120-millimeter 2S9 airborne self-
the 240-millimeter SP mortar 2S4. They are
propelled (SP) howitzer with a mortar capability
deploying the BM-22 220-millimeter MRL, which
for airborne and air assault units.
can fire deep into the enemy's rear. These improve-
Concurrent with these organizational changes, ments greatly enhance area coverage and counter-
the Soviets have pursued a comprehensive equip- battery support to subordinate divisions. The new
ment modernization program that affects many T-64/72/80-series tanks feature improved firepower,
divisional subunits. The main thrusts of the with a 125-millimeter main gun and an improved
equipment upgrade are in the following areas: fire control system. Both the T-80 and a variant
" Medium tanks. of the T-64 can fire an ATGM through the main
tube. The T-80 can mount reactive armor which
" Armored IFVs. further protects against the West's antitank
" Armored command and reconnaissance vehicles. capabilities. At the same time, the establishment
of army aviation has given ground forces a vertical
" Antitank guided missiles (ATGMs). dimension. The helicopter now provides CAAs and
" Surface-to-surface missiles (SSMs). TAs with a highly maneuverable and versatile
platform for reconnaissance, command and control
" Surface-to-air missiles (SAMs). (C2), and fire support. General-purpose and attack
Since the late 1970s, the Soviets have developed helicopter units can move with armies and divisions
the tank regiment (TR) into a combined arms at the high rates of advance they will need to
team (tank, motorized rifle, and artillery) that conduct combined arms operations in depth.
promises to be as flexible in its employment as
the motorized rifle regiment (MRR). (The MRR While changes in the organization and equip-
already had a tank battalion (TB) and an artillery ment of the ground forces are significant in them-
battalion.) The addition of an MRB to the TR of a selves and have serious implications for Western
TD eliminates the necessity for the TD commander defense planning, they do not take place in
to reinforce each of his TRs with MRR assets. isolation. Instead, these shifts appear to be part
This leaves the TD with four maneuver regiments. of a larger change in the concept for employment
The addition of an artillery battalion to the TR and organization of the armed forces. This change
places a great deal more firepower under direct should greatly enhance the flexibility with which
control of the regimental commander. The division Soviet military planners can apply force to achieve
commander then has greater flexibility in the use military objectives. (For more information on
of his artillery resources to influence the battle. Soviet operations and tactics, see FM 100-2-1.)
CHAPTER 2
Personnel
CONTENTS
Over 60 million males between the ages of 15 the total population. Soviet youths are physically
and 49 live in the Soviet Union. About 80 percent hardy as a result of participation in active sports
of these men are fit for military service. Each year, programs. They are also better educated, more
some 2 to 21/2 million young men reach the military sophisticated, and substantially better trained than
registration age of 17. The government will induct their World War II predecessors. Although the
at least one-half of them when they become 18 conscript receives stern discipline and intensive
years old. These conscripts constitute approximately political indoctrination, works hard, and has few
75 percent of Soviet ground force personnel. The comforts or luxuries and little time to himself, his
remainder, who are deferred for various reasons, morale is relatively high. He has a genuine love
serve at a later time on active duty unless they of his native land. His hatred is easily aroused
are declared physically unfit for military service. against an invading enemy, of which there have
If deferred beyond their twenty-seventh birthday, been many in Russia's and the Soviet Union's
they remain in the reserves, subject to periodic history. Moreover, Soviet soldiers and sailors have
refresher training. All qualified male citizens the capacity to withstand deprivations. The Soviet
remain in the armed forces reserve until their officer is a well-regarded professional who occupies
fiftieth birthday. a high social and economic position in society. The
officer corps, with its prestige and privileges,
stands apart from the troops. In summary, the
The quality of military manpower, particularly Soviet armed forces, loyal to the regime, constitute
of the Great Russian element, is generally good. a serious adversary; they are on a par with their
The Great Russians comprise about 53 percent of counterparts in the West.
MANPOWER PROCUREMENT
The 1967 Law on Universal Military Service (ROTC)-type programs in institutions of higher
provides for the mandatory semiannual conscription education. Enlisted men, noncommissioned officers
of 18-year old males. This law also governs the (NCOs), and warrant officers are eligible to compete
system of drafting young men into the armed for entry into the officer corps by passing an
forces. Those who are not drafted enter immediately examination for promotion to officer rank.
into the reserves. On completion of conscript duty,
men remain in the reserves until age 50. Women CONSCRIPTION
who have medical or other specialized training are The Council of Ministers and the MOD deter-
also subject to call. Officers enter the armed forces mine the personnel requirements for each semi-
from several sources. Most receive commissions annual call-up period. They assign quotas based
upon graduation from officer schools. Others par- on the number of draft-age males residing in each
ticipate in Reserve Officers' Training Corps of the 16 military districts. A system of draft
2-0
FM 100-2-3
boards, called military commissariats, is subor- Twice each year-at the end of the spring
dinate to the military district. Military commis- planting season and at the end of the fall harvest--
sariats in Soviet civil jurisdictions roughly the military commissariats call males who have
correspond to US civil jurisdictions as follows: reached their eighteenth birthday to active duty.
Older men up to age 27 whose periods of deferment
* Republic, which is a geographic region similar
have expired also face call-up. In peacetime, women
to the US South, West, or New England; there
19 to 40 years of age who have medical or other
is no exact US counterpart.
specialized training may face military service. The
* Kray and oblast, which are provinces similar to 1967 Law on Universal Military Service reduced
US states. the required length of active service from three to
* Gorod, which is a city. two years for all except naval personnel.
Within the framework of quotas fixed by the
* Rayon, which is similar to a US county or city
Council of Ministers and the MOD, the commis-
ward.
sariats assign inductees to the various branches,
Military commissariats at the district level arms, and services of the component forces based
function as overall administrators of the system. on their abilities, occupational expertise, or special-
They provide supervision to all subordinate officers. ties learned in training courses conducted by the
Those at republic, kray, oblast, and rayon levels Voluntary Society for Cooperation with the Army,
perform administrative functions, though not all Aviation, and Navy (DOSAAF). The DOSAAF is
republics have military commissariats. Each of subordinate to the MOD. It conducts premilitary
these levels also serves as a collection point for training in secondary schools. Its programs ac-
inductees. The center of the registration and draft quaint students with military life. The programs
process is the rayon military commissariat. It can include tracked- and wheeled-vehicle driver
registers draft-age males, issues draft notices, and training, parachuting, radio operation and mainte-
processes conscripts. It also transports conscripts nance, along with drill and rifle training. This
to the next higher military commissariat for move- training is one of the prime considerations for
ment to their assigned units. The rayon offices also future soldiers' selection to a particular program,
have mobilization and reserve management respon- such as a military academy.
sibilities. There are about 4,700 military commis- Draftees report to their military commissariat
sariat offices, of which at least 3,600 are at the on the date set. Inductees go directly to their as-
rayon level. signed units for a period of orientation, drill, and
During February and March of the year in some refresher training. This lasts approximately
which they reach their seventeenth birthday, young a month, after which the conscripts become young
men report to the military commissariat to register. soldiers and young sailors by reciting the military
They receive a physical examination and an inter- oath in a public ceremony. (See figure on next
view to determine their educational background, page.)
family situation, personal interests, attitude toward The Soviets probably only rarely grant per-
the military, and special knowledge or skills (if manent exemption from active or reserve duty
any) that would benefit the military. Each young except for clearly medical reasons. They usually
man receives a booklet as proof of registration. give deferments for stated periods of time and then
He must report changes in residence, family situa- review them at the expiration of the period. The
tion, educational status, or the acquisition of 1967 Law on Universal Military Service reduced
additional skills to the military commissariat so the number of educational deferments and extended
officials can enter the new data in the registration hardship or compassionate deferments.
booklet.
There are three general categories of criteria for
Each individual receives a final interview and deferment: physical reasons, family circumstances,
a physical examination shortly before he is sched- and continuation of education. The authorities may
uled for conscription. Then the draft commission grant three-year deferments for physical problems
recommends that the young man be drafted, be or one-year deferments for illnesses. After this
deferred for one year because of temporary unfit- time, depending on the deferred citizen's state of
ness for active military service due to illness, be health, the government will call him up for active
exempted from military service altogether if unfit, duty, enroll him in the reserves, or acknowledge
or be granted a deferment for family reasons or him to be altogether unfit and thus exempt from
for continuation of education. military service.
FM 100-2-3
CONDITIONS OF SERVICE
Service in the Soviet armed forces offers poten- vigorous training, strict discipline, thorough politi-
tial rewards such as promotion, pay, in-service cal indoctrination, and adherence to Communist
benefits, and a pension. Conversely, it requires Party policies.
2-3
FM 100-2-3
GRADE TIME
Promotions up to and including the rank of fulfilled national goals, or has been assigned to a
colonel follow procedures determined by the USSR higher position.
Council of Ministers. They probably result from An officer's immediate superior, in consultation
the recommendations of an officer's immediate with his political deputy, prepares the officer's
superior and branch chief. The Council of Ministers efficiency report. He evaluates the officer's work
grants promotions to generals and admirals, while and rates his political and job qualities. Officers
the Presidium of the USSR Supreme Soviet must receive reports once every two or three years, upon
approve promotions to the ranks of army general, either transfer or recommendation for promotion.
marshals of arms of the service, fleet admirals, Officers remain on active duty until reaching
chief marshals of arms of the service, Fleet Ad- the statutory age for retirement, which varies accord-
mirals of the Soviet Union, Marshals of the Soviet ing to grade. (See "Statutory age for retirement,"
Union, and Generalissimo of the Soviet Union. The below.) Officers who reach these respective age
USSR Minister of Defense can order the awarding limits without being promoted must leave active
of the next higher rank before the end of the duty and transfer to the reserves. If granted an
prescribed period of service in the previous rank. exception, however, an officer may serve an
He may do this when an officer has demonstrated additional ten years in his grade before being
excellence in combat training, has successfully discharged.
RANK AGE
levels. Below division, MPA affairs are the respon- of unit newspapers, and other cultural events with
sibility of the deputy commander for political propaganda potential. Political indoctrination is a
affairs, the zampolit. A zampolit is present in each scheduled part of the training curriculum.
regiment, battalion, and company. His authority The Communist Party and Komsomol organiza-
exists independently of that of the military com- tions for military personnel who are members are
mander. The next higher agency appoints the best the most visible and prevalent instruments of
trained and most experienced political workers to political control in the military. They involve the
these political organs. largest number of personnel and exist at almost
Besides handling MPA affairs, the zampolit every level in the chain of command, even down
organizes and conducts both nonmilitary and mili- to platoon and squad. The basic element of Party
tary political work in his unit. His responsibilities membership is the primary Party organization
include- (PPO). The Party may establish a PPO wherever
three Party members are present. A PPO with fewer
* Supervising the activities of the Communist than 15 members elects a secretary; one with 15
Party and Komsomol organizations. or more elects a bureau and a secretary to direct
* Improving combat readiness and political loyalty its activities. The Party and Komsomol organiza-
of the troops. tions politicize the military by recruiting as many
personnel as possible for membership and by
* Explaining Soviet domestic and foreign policies.
involving them in political activities. While the
* Strengthening discipline. Party encourages all military personnel to join,
* Instilling patriotism. membership for officers is virtually required.
There are presently some 16 million Party
* Participating in the development of combat members and 30 million Komsomol members in the
training programs and in the selection, place-
Soviet Union. This represents a little over 20 per-
ment, and rating of officers.
cent of the total population. In contrast, over 80
At the MOD, military district, army, and fleet percent of all military personnel and 90 percent
levels, the Party organizations are responsible for of the officer corps are Party or Komsomol mem-
improving the efficiency of the command apparatus bers. The USSR subjects the majority of its citizens
by ensuring that the headquarters and other to indoctrination for their entire lives; military
command bodies strengthen military discipline. personnel, because they are a captive audience,
They are also responsible for promoting progress receive constant exposure to it. Occasionally irri-
and innovation in training and equipment. Under tating, mostly taken for granted, but nonetheless
the direction of the political officer, all military effective, propaganda and indoctrination, both in
elements and units participate in activities such and out of the military, are established fixtures
as compulsory lectures and meetings, publication of the Soviet society.
RANKS
The highest military rank in the Soviet Union commanders normally hold the rank of Marshal
is that of Generalissimo. Only Stalin ever held that of the Soviet Union. Only combined arms officers
rank. All other military ranks fall into five can achieve this rank. The equivalent Navy rank
categories: is Admiral of the Fleet of the Soviet Union.
* Marshals, generals, and admirals. The armed forces further classify officers as
* Officers. senior or junior. The warrant officer group includes
the ranks of praporshchikfor nonnaval personnel
* Warrant officers. and michman for naval warrant officers. Sergeants
* Sergeants and petty officers. and petty officers comprise the NCO ranks, and
the term soldiers and sailors refers to the two
* Soldiers and sailors. ranks of private and seaman.
(The figure on page 2-7 represents the basic rank
The ground/aviation ranks apply to all ground-
structure of the Soviet armed forces, translated into
based servicemen, including nonseagoing naval per-
US terms.)
sonnel and all aviation personnel in the air force,
The Minister of Defense, other top personnel naval aviation, and fighter aviation of air defense.
of the MOD, and high-level combined arms field The naval ranks are for shipboard personnel.
FM 100-2-3
GROUND/AVIATION NAVY
Officer personnel in the ranks of major general Likewise, generals and officers of special services
through chief marshal in aviation, artillery, (intendance (quartermaster), administrative, medical,
engineer troops, and signal troops and major veterinary, and justice) use the special service
general through colonel general in tank troops designation. These special services have no mar-
carry the designation of the branch as part of their shals or chief marshals. So, one refers to a colonel
rank; for example, chief marshal of aviation, mar- general of intendance service, a colonel of medical
shal of armored troops, colonel general of tank service, a major of veterinary service, and a junior
troops (who, upon promotion, would become a lieutenant of justice. There are, however, no general
marshal of armored troops), lieutenant general of officers in the administrative service and no colonel
signal troops, and major general of engineer troops. general of veterinary service.
The same criteria apply to technical troops
(chemical, railroad, road, motor transport, and units Special rank designations also apply to engineer
of military topographic service). There is, however, officer ranks of all branches of the armed forces.
no chief marshal or marshal rank for these troops; Officers who complete studies at a higher engineer
for example, colonel general of technical troops. officer school or a military engineering academy
FM 100-2-3
earn the title of engineer, which is combined with cation use the title technical service combined with
the rank; for example, lieutenant-engineer, colonel- the rank; for example, junior lieutenant of tech-
engineer, or colonel general-engineer. In the navy, nical service, captain of technical service, and
the equivalent ranks would be lieutenant-engineer, colonel of technical service. There are no general
captain 2nd rank-engineer, and admiral-engineer. officers of the technical service.
Officers with a secondary military technical edu-
RESERVE SYSTEM
The Soviet reserve system ensures that all citi- basis of age: 18 to 35 years of age, 36 to 45 years
zens fit for military service have a definite reserve of age, and 46 to 50 years of age.
commitment when not on active duty or deferred
Air reservists in Category I, Group I, must
for a specific reason. The military commissariats,
participate in up to five 40-day refresher flying
in conjunction with other administrative organs,
training sessions, as well as in the required re-
manage the system at the lower levels to make
fresher training. All reservists may have to attend
evasion of this responsibility practically impossible.
examination periods lasting up to ten days. This
The military service booklets issued to all reservists
is in addition to the required refresher training.
are necessary for residence permits when changing
locale and for work permits when changing jobs. In the past, few reservists have been called for
training at the maximum level provided for by law.
All former service personnel released from active
However, because of the shortened active duty
duty for reasons other than retirement or disability
tours enacted in 1967, the Soviets have accelerated
transfer to the reserves. These personnel, together
their reserve training programs. (See "Training
with individuals who for various reasons serve in
periods," below.)
the reserves exclusively, form the Soviet reserve
force. There are no reserve units as such. The OFFICER OBLIGATIONS
closest equivalents to US reserve units are the
The officer reserve comprises the graduates of
transport, repair, and construction groups that
university reserve officer training programs; the
function as normal parts of the economy in peace-
body of soldiers, sailors, sergeants, and petty
time and move as a whole when mobilized. Re-
officers who have qualified for, and passed, com-
servists called to active duty receive assignments
missioning examinations upon completion of active
based on their occupational specialties.
duty; and a small number of officers who have
In any five-year period, an estimated 3,500,000
Soviets complete military training. Under a system Training periods
where reserve obligations for NCOs run to age 50
and for officers as high as age 65, the reserve
capability reaches into the tens of millions. The CATEGORY I
reserve manpower pool currently comprises more
than 55 million men subject to call-up, of which 9
Group I Up to four periods of up to three
million have been discharged within the past five
months each
years. Noncommissioned servicewomen remain in
the reserves to age 40. Group II Up to two periods of up to two
months each
ENLISTED OBLIGATIONS Group III One period of one month
Enlisted and NCO reserve personnel fall into
two categories according to experience and three
groups according to age. Category I includes those CATEGORY II
with at least one year of active duty, twelve months
of accumulated reserve refresher training, or combat Group I Up to six periods of up to three
experience of any duration. Category II consists months each
of all personnel with less than one year of active Group II Up to two periods of up to two
military duty, men subject to military service who months each
for various reasons have not been drafted into Group III One period of one month
active military service, and all women reservists.
Each category divides into three groups on the
2-8
FM 100-2-3
left active service before the expiration of their full orders all call-ups for mobilization based on resolu-
obligation. Rank and age are the determinants of tions of the USSR Council of Ministers. At the
an officer's reserve class. (See the figure below for time of mobilization, all personnel of the armed
maximum ages.) Women officers accepted for mili- forces stay active until further notice. Reservists
tary service with an acquired specialty enter in subject to military service receive notification of
Reserve Group III, regardless of the military ranks the places and times to report in their mobilization
they hold. The age limit for their reserve status instructions, in call-up notices, or in orders of the
is 50. rayon military commissariats. Mobilization may be
Reserve officers train more frequently than con- partial or universal, open or secret; it may involve
scripts. Those in Group I may be called up every all the armed forces or only part of them. In
year for a period of up to three months; those in peacetime, only a few members of the reserves may
Group II, up to two sessions lasting up to three mobilize for training purposes; but in wartime,
months each; and those in Group III, up to one mobilization affects the whole economy. Only about
two-month session. The Minister of Defense has 2.1 million reservists, or about 5 percent of the
the authority to detain reserve officers at training total reserve manpower pool, are needed to bring
sessions for up to two months longer than the the Soviet armed forces to full wartime strength.
periods established by law. He can increase the Thus, a substantial base would remain available
number of training sessions without exceeding the to create new units and provide replacements. Mili-
total amount of time required for all three classes. tary law in the Soviet Union also subjects women
The maximum time spent at the various reserve to conscription during wartime, thereby ensuring
sessions cannot exceed thirty months. Besides a large reservoir for expanding the force and
active duty refresher training, reserve officers must releasing men for active duty.
attend 30 to 60 hours of refresher training in
evenings and on weekends at military facilities
near their place of work. Officers in Group I receive The General Staff of the army and navy, through
its Organization and Mobilization Directorate,
this training between annual active duty refresher
tours. All others must attend sessions every three controls military mobilization. The Directorate plans
and directs the mobilization of the armed forces
years.
and supervises the mobilization planning activities
MOBILIZATION of the military districts and subordinate military
In the Soviet Union, the Presidium of the USSR commissariats. It also may be responsible for
Supreme Soviet orders mobilization. The MOD mobilization supply stockpiles in the armed forces.
*Soviet law does not prescribe an age limit for these groups.
FM 100-2-3
The personnel mobilization plan contains two of its personnel as cadre for new units, and expand
phases. The first involves the call-up of fully trained to wartime strength. Finally, new units may form
reservists (Category I) to bring active units up to directly from the reserves.
authorized strength and to man additional line
The Soviet mobilization system also provides
divisions as well as new nondivisional service and
for the mobilization directly from the civilian
support units. The second phase deals generally
economy of cargo trucks and other specialized
with the induction, assembly, and training of par-
equipment interchangeable for military and civilian
tially trained reservists (Category II) for further
use. In August 1968, for example, the Soviet Union
expansion of the forces, replacement, and related
freely announced in the press that it would call
activities.
up reservists and mobilize equipment from the
civilian economy for participation in a large-scale
The Soviets use a number of methods to mobilize rear services exercise called NEMAN. As it turned
and expand units. First, a peacetime unit may out, the exercise, though carried out as announced,
expand and convert to the next higher level. So was a method of mobilizing reservists and civilian
an MRB may become a regiment. Second, a peace- equipment to support the Soviet troops that moved
time unit may retain its organization, release part into Czechoslovakia in late August of that year.
2-10
CHAPTER 3
Training
CONTENTS
Military training in the Soviet Union includes military personnel to a peak of combat effective-
civilian premilitary training, in-service training, ness, the training programs are usually identical
and reserve training. The 1967 Law on Universal from year to year. Their major elements are tactics,
Military Service established a compulsory system firing, physical education, and political indoctrina-
of premilitary training for all young men and tion. Field training is frequent and rigorous.
women aged 16 through 18. The government
conducts this training in the final two grades of A system of military high schools and colleges,
the ten-year public high schools; in specialized command and staff schools, and a general staff
secondary schools; in professional trade schools; academy provides career military personnel with
and, for those who have left school, in the factories, professional and formal academic training.
offices, or farms where they work. These young Qualified conscripts receive a less formalized
people gain a fundamental knowledge of the mili- education for NCO positions.
tary and basic military-technical skills which make Reservists prepare for military service while
their transition from civilian to military life easier. attending civilian schools and universities or while
The training helps them master modern military working in the national economy. Refresher training
equipment more quickly after they are drafted. through drills, classes, and active duty call-ups
In-service training of a conscript begins when continues until individuals pass out of the reserve
he arrives at a tactical unit. It normally continues at age 50. (Chapter 2 of this manual discusses
throughout his tour of service. Designed to bring all maximum ages for the officer reserve classes.)
PREMILITARY PROGRAMS
The MOD, together with the DOSAAF, manages, and number of programs on the quotas of the
implements, and conducts premilitary training. Organization and Mobilization Directorate, for
Formed in mid-1968, the MOD's Directorate for which they keep records. The military districts and
Premilitary Training has assumed responsibility for commissariats plan the overall program. They
planning and organizing the Ministry's input into select the training cadres; they organize individual
the premilitary and specialist training programs. training groups according to the nature of the local
It is the logical organ to transmit the future needs population; and they establish evening training
of the armed forces to the premilitary and specialist sessions, military libraries, weapons rooms, and
training system in the form of quotas. Its tasks military-technical training courses for local training
embrace the implementation of the MOD mandate centers. The directors of the schools and enter-
to supervise and support the DOSAAF premilitary prises control the physical operation of the centers,
training mission. while DOSAAF conducts the actual training.
Under the technical guidance of the Directorate The Directorate for Premilitary Training is
for Premilitary Training, the military districts and subordinate to the Central Committee of DOSAAF.
the military commissariats within the districts It has overall responsibility for premilitary
assume responsibility for basic military training training. Also, the DOSAAF Central Committee
in the schools and enterprises. They base the types contains, among others, separate directorates for
FM 100-2-3
military-technical training and sports, naval In their basic premilitary studies, trainees attend
training and sports, and aviation training and field exercises varying in duration from five to
sports. The DOSAAF operates its program through fifteen days. These camps provide facilities for
a hierarchy of committees at all levels from the practical training in weapons familiarization and
republics down to the rural counties and urban other areas. They operate with the maximum
wards (rayon), which supervise most of the day- possible cooperation of local military forces.
to-day work.
There has been a trend to offer courses to local
Likewise, both the Ministry of Education and preinduction trainees using the facilities of the
the State Committee for Vocational and Technical more than 130 Soviet military colleges scattered
Education of the USSR Council of Ministers have throughout the country. Professional military
departments for premilitary training. They coop- college instructors present the standard 140-hour
erate with the MOD and DOSAAF in implementing program, encouraging those selected for the training
the premilitary training courses in their respective to enroll in commissioning schools.
civilian educational institutions. They develop the
courses that make up the premilitary as well as Besides requiring basic premilitary training, the
civil defense training programs. They provide 1967 Law on Universal Military Service also
DOSAAF with logistical support such as training directed that educational institutions of the tech-
sites, equipment, visual and other aids, and nical-vocational system and DOSAAF organizations
resource funds. They also participate in the annually train specialists for the armed forces. The
training of instructors. Apparently, all Soviet USSR Council of Ministers, in conjunction with
ministries must provide support for premilitary the MOD, determines the number and types of
training programs conducted for their 16- to 18- specialists to be trained. Youths in their second
year-old employees by territorial DOSAAF com- year of premilitary training (generally 17 years
mittees and training centers at factories, farms, old) are eligible.
institutes, and other locations.
The 1972 DOSAAF regulations state that
The premilitary training program presented to DOSAAF will provide leadership for the develop-
high school students and working youth at training ment of military-technical skills. Among these
points and centers provides them with the equiva- skills are the following: aircraft and glider use and
lent of the basic training formerly given to recruits maintenance, parachuting, automobile and motor-
after they were drafted. Phased into operation in cycle use and maintenance, radio communications,
1968, its results have been uneven. The Soviets underwater diving, motorboating, marksmanship,
have continuously expressed concern over the and modeling. Thus, DOSAAF has the basic
quality of this program. They complain about the responsibility for creating, guiding, and assisting
large differences in skills and knowledge acquired in the operation of the extensive network of clubs,
by youths throughout the country. The differences schools, and other training organizations. These
make it necessary for many new draftees to be organizations prepare specialists in military knowl-
retrained after they enter active military service. edge and skills for service in the armed forces.
This significantly reduces the training time for At the same time, they train individuals in the
concepts and usage of complex, modern equipment. technical professions for eventual employment in
The standard program of premilitary basic the national economy.
training provides 140 hours of familiarization with Entry into DOSAAF specialist training pro-
military organization and regulations, small arms grams, conducted at specialized DOSAAF schools,
use, and civil defense techniques. School students is either voluntary or as directed by local com-
typically spend two hours weekly during two 35- missariats. Military commissariats receive their
week school years studying these topics. Workers, annual quotas for the training of various groups
on the other hand, attend three week-long, full- of specialists according to the MOD's projected
time sessions at training centers. These sessions personnel requirements. They then screen the
are spaced over a year; this minimizes the time individuals who have registered for the draft for
workers spend away from their jobs. Both young special aptitudes and assign those selected for
men and women participate in the standard specialist training to the DOSAAF programs.
program. The curriculum for females, however,
requires more hours spent in civil defense and first The recently revised curriculum for training
aid training and, in compensation, fewer hours in youths to drive freight trucks with a cargo capacity
practical military training. exceeding 3.5 tons is one example of a specialist
3-2
FM 100-2-3
program. The DOSAAF conducts this program, special time to general military training, the
which reduces the total number of hours from the instructors still have the responsibility to teach
previous program, over a ten-month period. (See students primary military skills.
figure below.) Instructors give a program in three
nonconsecutive sessions to youths engaged in For each training session, there are eight groups
productive work. There are two nonconsecutive of 30 to 34 students. Each automotive school has
sessions for youths still in school. The course 15 to 17 training trucks. In many instances, the
attempts to give the students as much experience program changes to compensate for the school's
as possible in driving, maintaining, and repairing lack of equipment or space (or both). This creates
trucks. Although the program does not devote any wide variation in the quality of training.
Political Training
Equipment and Use of Vehicle
Theoretical Classes
Practical Shopwork-Equipment
Practical Shopwork-Maintenance
Traffic Rules
Traffic Safety
Driving
Examinations
TOTALS
An extensive program of physical toughening Technical Complex Ready for Labor and Defense
and training in endurance, dexterity, and courage of the USSR (GTO).
for draft- and predraft-age youths accompanies the
premilitary and specialist training conducted in Within the framework of the GTO complex,
schools and training centers. The physical edu- there are five stages of national physical training
cation classes are held in schools, enterprises, and standards. The entire complex encompasses not
DOSAAF clubs. They conform to a general system only draft-age youth, but also the rest of the
of physical training known as the All-Union Sports- population.
AGE GROUP
STAGE PROGRAM NAME (MALE AND FEMALE)
3-3
FM 100-2-3
The appropriate Committees for Physical Cul- badges and certificates for passing. The DOSAAF
ture and Sports, under the Council of Ministers, clubs and training centers administer the exam-
provide overall guidance of the third-level GTO ination, while DOSAAF committees supervise
program for draft-age youth. The third level particular aspects, such as grenade throwing,
consists of ten types of exercises. Participants small arms marksmanship, and 500- and 1,000-
receive points for meeting minimum standards and meter cross-country running.
NUMBER
SPECIALTY
OF SCHOOLS
The senior academy of the Soviet army and days off each month for study, and time away
navy, which represents the ultimate in military from some unit training activity. They may also
education in the Soviet Union, is the Voroshilov receive up to four months' free time to research a
Military Academy of the General Staff of the USSR diploma thesis. Upon successful completion of all
Armed Forces. It trains carefully selected officers, requirements, the enrollee graduates with a
usually colonels and major generals (captains first diploma of the same status as that granted to
rank and rear admirals for the Navy), for the resident students.
highest command and staff assignments. The
course length is two years. WARRANT OFFICER
Military educational institutions offer extension Coincidental with the introduction of the
and correspondence courses in over 100 specialties warrant officer grades in 1972, the military
to interested personnel throughout the armed districts and groups of forces organized six- to
forces who pass a qualification examination or nine-month courses to train extended service
meet prerequisites. Students supplement these personnel to become warrant officers. Subjects
courses through resident retraining of up to one covered in these schools include political education,
month per year at the parent school. Consultation tactics, training regulations, and physical training.
teams of instructors visit all major garrisons to At the same time, the armed forces made pro-
give advice and assistance. Personnel enrolled in visions for warrant officers and warrant officer
extension and correspondence courses receive three candidates to attend departmental courses at
evenings each week free of unit duties, three duty officers' schools. The 1985 guidelines on the service
FM 100-2-3
of warrant officers emphasized the importance of services operate specialized technical schools
their political and professional training. The instructing NCOs in various military-technical
guidelines also stressed mastering the techniques skills. The courses range from a few weeks to a
of small unit military instruction. year in duration. On-the-job NCO training is
almost continuous in regimental-sized units, which
NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER provide refresher courses and equipment familiari-
The Soviets select their NCOs from conscript zation exercises. Due to the cyclical nature of the
classes based on the initial screening at military Soviet conscription process, most NCO training
commissariats or based on the commander's lasts for six months to allow for overlapping
recommendations. The components and arms and resources required by the semiannual draft.
3-6
FM 100-2-3
Soviet training also has negative aspects. These organization look good. In other words, Soviet
include the uneven quality of academic training training shortcomings are the same as those found
caused by incompetent teachers (the inevitable in any army throughout the world. There is no
result of a military educational program the size doubt, however, that the Soviet armed forces are
of the Soviet one) and the stifling of young leaders' among the world's most professional and best-
initiative by overbearing superiors. Since over 100 trained military organizations.
languages are spoken among the many various
ethnic groups in the Soviet Union, the Soviet Army THE YEARLY CYCLE
has some difficulty in training the large numbers
The yearly training program includes a winter
of non-Russian-speaking conscripts. This problem
and a summer period. Each period, in turn, divides
will grow in the future as the Soviet Army must
into several stages. Every stage stresses a specific
rely more on nonethnic Russian manpower. An theme or objective. The cycle stays basically
additional training problem results from the unchanged for several consecutive years. To ensure
government's power to divert the conscripts to that they cover all material in sufficient detail,
complete economic tasks such as construction instructors may conduct different levels of training
projects and harvesting crops. This lost training simultaneously. Young soldiers in their first year
time can hinder the efforts of the cadre to achieve of service may receive more elementary instruction,
the required training objectives; but it is not yet while senior servicemen get advanced training in
a significant weakness in providing a well-trained their occupational skills. Instructors also conduct
soldier for the Soviet Army. unit training on various levels at the same time.
Other negative features include performance Both winter and summer periods contain all levels
parameters which encourage faculties to inflate of training activity as well as division maneuvers,
grades and pad exercise results to make the where possible.
September-October Summer training period in progress. Newly commissioned junior officers arrive from military
schools and civilian universities.
November Summer training period ends. Newly trained NCOs arrive from the training division. New con-
scripts arrive and receive four weeks of basic training. Soldiers who complete their two-year
active duty obligation are released and transferred to the reserves. Preparations begin for the
coming winter training period. Training year ends.
May Winter training period ends. Newly trained NCOs arrive from the training division. New con-
scripts arrive and receive four weeks of basic training. Soldiers who complete their two-year
active duty obligation are released and transferred to the reserves. Preparations begin for the
coming summer training period.
September-October Summer training period continues. Newly commissioned junior officers arrive in the divisions
from military schools and civilian universities.
November Summer training period ends. Newly trained NCOs arrive from the training division. New con-
scripts arrive and receive four weeks of basic training. Soldiers who complete their two-year
active duty obligation are released and transferred to the reserves. Preparations begin for the
coming winter training period. Training year ends.
The number of hours of daily training is the receive special instructions and prepare for the
same in winter and summer. Intense instruction coming term.
throughout the year leaves the soldier little free
time. The Soviets devote at least six hours of each The winter period lasts five to six months,
training day exclusively to scheduled instruction. depending upon the type of unit, its location, and
Most of the remaining time goes to political indoc- the length of the winter season. It usually ends
trination, maintenance of clothing and equipment, by the beginning of May. Units in warm climates
and personal needs. The training schedule for may start moving to summer camps earlier than
Saturdays is two to four hours shorter to allow units in the central USSR. Winter training takes
time for cleaning and inspection of unit equipment. place mainly in garrison, with local training
Finally, required participation in organized sports areas providing firing ranges, classrooms, work-
and cultural activities on weekends keeps free time shops, and other facilities. Most garrisons are on
to a minimum. (See figure below.) the outskirts of towns, using the adjoining country-
side for command post exercises, field training,
Following the annual celebration of the and marches.
Bolshevik Revolution on 7 November, the Soviets
make preparations for the new training year. Summer training usually begins on the day
During this time, incoming recruits begin their after May Day, a Soviet national holiday. It is
initial training; instructors and students hold similar to the winter training in content. The
critiques of the previous year's program; and major difference is that soldiers spend a greater
soldiers inspect and overhaul training facilities, amount of time out of garrison during the summer
equipment, and vehicles. The appropriate period. The summer training activity usually
directorates formulate all necessary training plans culminates in autumn divisional maneuvers, which
for the winter period while command personnel may be part of a combined Warsaw Pact exercise.
3-8
CHAPTER 4
Organization
CONTENTS
Although one expects to find many organizational variations in a force the size of the Soviet ground
forces, descriptions in this chapter present a single model for each type of organization. The structures
portrayed here mirror forward-deployed Soviet forces such as those found in the Western TVD as of the
end of 1988. They include all known structural elements, full assessed war-authorized strengths, and the
most modern equipment. The text and tables note several structural variations.
PRESENTATION OF INFORMATION
The organization charts in this chapter focus Stacked blocks in the charts indicate multiple,
on maneuver units, starting at the lowest level identical elements subordinate to a particular or-
(motorized rifle squad and tank squad) and building ganization. Dashed blocks indicate elements which
up to the highest level (army and front). At each may or may not be present in the type of organi-
level, the chapter breaks down subordinate CS and zation shown.
CSS units and subunits whenever possible for
greater detail.
Figures inside the organization blocks reflect the
The chapter begins with the structure of the assessed total war-authorized personnel strength of
MRRs, the most common type in the Soviet ground the organization. At lower levels, the chapter often
forces. Among these regiments, the BTR-equipped divides personnel figures between officers (at the
units are the most numerous. The chapter discusses left) and enlisted personnel (at the right). At bat-
them first. Then it addresses the BMP-equipped talion level and above, the chapter gives a single
units. Discussion of the MRD and its support units figure for the officers and enlisted personnel
follows. Next the chapter repeats the process for combined.
the TR and the TD. Organizations above division
(army and front) complete the description of purely
ground force organizations. The next set of charts Personnel totals, as well as equipment lists, are
deals with the airborne regiment and the airborne cumulative, although recapitulation tables for larger
division. These are not technically part of the units may show the breakdown among subordinate
ground forces but may fall under the control of a units and subunits. Otherwise, the user may deter-
ground forces front. The final set of charts ad- mine the distribution of personnel and equipment
dresses the amphibious forces: the naval infantry by consulting cross-referenced charts for lower-level
regiment/brigade and the naval infantry division. organizations.
FM 100-2-3
Ground Forces I
With approximately one-sixth of the earth's land There is no fixed organizational structure above
surface within its boundaries, the Soviet Union division level.
has traditionally maintained large, well-equipped
The army is the largest peacetime combined
ground forces as a primary instrument of military
arms formation. It normally consists of two to
power. Today, the Soviet ground forces are the
five divisions and numerous nondivisional CS and
largest of the five components of their armed
CSS elements. Armies are capable of independent
forces. Ground forces organizations may be either
operations, but normally fight as part of a front,
tactical (division level and below) or operational
in which case their CS elements will be supple-
(army and front).
mented with front assets.
Tactical-Level Organizations There are two types of armies. While both types
The basic tactical units in the Soviet ground are actually combined arms organizations, a Soviet
forces are the MRRs and TRs. There are two dis- combined arms army (CAA) will normally have a
tinct types of MRR: those equipped with BTRs greater number of MRDs, and a tank army (TA)
(APCs) and those equipped with BMPs (infantry will normally have a greater number of TDs. Of
combat vehicles). The MRR and TR normally the armies identified, no two are exactly alike. The
operate as part of a MRD or TD. number of divisions, as well as the numbers and
types of nondivisional elements, can vary greatly
Operational-Level Organizations depending on the mission, the situation, and the
area of operations.
Soviet ground forces organizations at levels of
command between division (tactical) and TVD The front is the largest operational-level or-
(strategic) constitute the operational level. These ganization. When formed in wartime, a typical
large formations include armies and fronts. front may have three to five armies.
'L
FM 100-2-3
NOTES. 1. The dismounted squad element consists of seven personnel. The BTR driver/
mechanic and BTR machine gunner remain with the BTR to provide fire support.
The dismounted squad does not have a portable radio.
2. One squad in each platoon has an SVD sniper rifle.
NOTES. 1. With a standard nine-man squad, each BTR has one empty seat (three per platoon),
which can accommodate the platoon leader and the assistant platoon leader.
2. One squad in each platoon has an SVD sniper rifle.
3. Firepower calculations should include the 14.5-mm and 7.62-mm coaxial machine
guns mounted on each BTR.
FM 100-2-3
NOTE. The company commanders RTO comes from the battalion signal platoon and is not
part of the BTR company personnel total.
4-4
FM 100-2-3
MOTOIZED
RIFLE COMPANY
MORTARl
BATTERY
75J
4-5
FM 100-2-3
BATTALION
HEADQUARTERS
4 I
NOTE. The signal platoon leader is also the battalion communications officer. The praporshchik
in charge of the supply platoon and the fel'dscher in charge of the medical aid
station are also part of the battalion staff. However, these three positions are not
part of the personnel figures for the battalion headquarters.
BATTERY HEADQUARTERS s
HEADQUARTERS HEADQUARTERS
2 21 1 PLATOON 20
TRANSPORT
SECTION
0 10
4-6
FM 100-2-3
NOTE. High-readiness BTR-equipped MRBs may have six AT-4 SPIGOTs and three SPG-9s.
REPAIR
Equipment Total
WORKSHOP
Truck, Van, ZIL (Maintenance)................. 1
0 7 Trailer, Generator, 1-Axle ..................... 1
Equipment Total
MEDICAL AID
Truck, Ambulance, UAZ-450A/452............. 1
STATION
Trailer, Cargo, 1-Axle........................ 1
0 4 Radio:
VHF, Manpack, Low-Power, R-107............1
4-8
FM 100-2-3
The MRR is the basic combined arms organi- types of MRRs has been that BMP-equipped regi-
zation and most common maneuver element of the ments had an organic battalion of 122-mm SP
Soviet ground forces. Motorized rifle, tank, artillery, howitzers (2Sls), while BTR-equipped regiments
antiaircraft, antitank, engineer, signal, and CSS had a battalion of 122-mm towed howitzers (D-30s).
assets are organic to the MRR. The regiment is However, some BTR regiments, especially those in
the smallest organization which has all of these the forward area, now have the 2S1. Also, BTR
elements. regiments have antitank platoons within the MRBs,
a feature not found in the BMP regiments.
Regimental organization includes three MRBs
and one TB. A 122-mm howitzer battalion and The TBs of both BMP- and BTR-equipped MRRs
three 120-mm mortar batteries or 82-mm automatic have 31 medium tanks. This chapter lists all tanks
mortar batteries provide fire support. While battalion- within the MRR as T-64/72/80, but older types are.
sized elements support the division, corresponding often present outside the Western TVD.
company-sized units support MRRs.
Although the regiment normally operates as
The MRRs have either the BMP amphibious part of the division, it is capable of short-term
infantry combat vehicle (AICV) or one of the BTR independent operations. It has the assets to react
series of APCs as the primary troop-carrying independently to changes in the combat situation.
vehicle. Another key difference between the two Much of its equipment is amphibious.
4-9
FM 100-2-3
FOOTNOTES. *This vehicle includes the TALL MIKE radar, which appears separately in (continued)
this list.
" The SA-9 system has a transporter-erector-launcher (TEL), while the SA-13
system has a transporter-erector-launcher and radar (TELAR).
***This vehicle includes the SMALL FRED radar, which appears separately in
this list.
4-10
FM 100-2-3
f~~bi ~~ 2 7
/ e-7
MOTORIZED RIFLE v2~~v
AICV, BMP-1/BMP-2 3 3
ACRV M1979 (1/2/3) 8 8
GENERAL PURPOSE TRUCKS
Truck, UAZ-69/469 3 9 1 1 5 2 1 22
Truck, GAZ-66 45 12 2 3 4 1 67
Truck, ZIL-130/131/151/157 7 4 1 2 14
Truck, KrAZ/ZIL/Ural 12 34 3 8 57
VAN TRUCKS
Truck, Van, GAZ 2 3 1 6
Truck, Van, ZIL/Ural Command 3 3
(continued)
4-11
FM 100-2-3
MOTORIZED RIFLE
REGIMENT (BTR), MRD
ENGINEER EQUIPMENT
Dozer, BAT/BAT-M/PKT
Dozer Blade, BTU
Trailer. Water
Trailer, Field Kitchen
ARTILLERY-ASSOCIATED
EQUIPMENT
Rangefinder
RADARS
Battlefield Surveillance. TALL MIKE
Battlefield Surveillance,
SMALL FRED
RADIOS
HF or VHF, Manpack, Low-Power,
R-104M or R-107
HF, Manpack, Low-Power, R-104M
HF, Vehicle-Mount, Medium-Power.
R-130
continued)
4-12
FM 100-2-3
4-13
FM 100-2-3
Regimental Headquarters,
Motorized Rifle and Tank Regiment, MRD and TD
[ TICIONCOMMANDER
DIVISONALREGIMENTAL
-. U
CHIEF OF
ARTILLERY A
CHEFO IFOF1CHIEF1O
IRESERCNAISSANCEJ CUNCAION
[HIEF1O[ HIEF OF
HEIALSRVCEEGIER VICE
CIE O7CIE1O
ME[ICA SERVICEFINANCE SERVICE
4-14 Foldout
FM 100-2-3
Company Commander .. PM
Driver/Mechanic ...... PM
Gunner.............PM
Equipment Total
PLATOON
Medium Tank, T-64/72/80..................13 AT TANK SQUAD
9-mm Pistol, PM ........................... 30 0 x
T A
Medium Tank}
(1 xMedium Tank)
5.45-mm Assault Rifle, AKS-74 ................ 9 1 2 0 3
Radios:
Radios:VPlatoon Leader!
HF, Vehicle Mount, Medium-Power, W130 .... 1 Tank Commander ... PM Tank Commander .. AKS-74
VHF, Vehicle Mount, Medium-Power, Driver/Mechanic ...... PM Driver/Mechanic ...... PM
R-123 .................................. 13 Gunner.............PM Gunner.............PM
NOTES. 1. The personnel total of 39 will be rounded off to 40 in the organization chart for
the TB, MRR. Tank companies with T-54/55/62 tanks have 10 or 13 additional
enlisted personnel.
2. In the late 1980s, forces in Eastern Europe began to standardize tank companies
at 10 tanks. (See p. 4-107.)
4-15
FM 100-2-3
NOTE. This howitzer battalion may also be found in the artillery regiment of a MRD, TD, or
airborne division
FOOTNOTE. *This vehicle includes the SMALL FRED radar, which appears separately in this
list
4-16
FM 100-2-3
PLATOON
HEADQUARTERS
GU4Nl
SECTION
4-17
FM 100-2-3
NOTE. Instead of this battery, some MRRs and TRs now have an air defense battalion
consisting of a battery of six 2S6 30-mm SP antiaircraft systems and a battery of six
BMP-2 ICVs (with each BMP-2 carrying three SA-16 SAM launchers).
4-18
FM 100-2-3
Reconnaissance Company,
Motorized Rifle and Tank Regiment, MRD and TD
HDUAR T ERS
1xBRM-1 3 x BMP-1/BMP-2 4 x BRDM-2 3xMotorcycle
FOOTNOTE. *This vehicle includes the TALL MIKE radar, which appears separately in this list.
4-19
FM 100-2-3
1 xBRDM-2
1 xR-107 1 x ATGM Launcher
1 xR-123 Vehicle, AT-3/5
1 xR-123 I xATGL, RPG-7V
I R-123
NOTE. In the late 1980s, MRRs began to add 100-mm AT guns (MT-12) to expand the battery.
4-20
FM 100-2-3
Engineer Company,
Motorized Rifle and Tank Regiment, MRD and TD
FOOTNOTES. *Personnel and equipment levels for the engineer company, MRR, BTR- or
BMP-equipped.
"Personnel and equipment levels for the engineer company, TR.
4-21
FM 100-2-3
Signal Company,
Motorized Rifle and Tank Regiment, MRD and TD
Equipment Total
ACV, BTR ................... .............. 3
Radios:
HF, Manpack, Low-Power, R-104M ........... 2
HF, Vehicle Mount, Medium-Power, R-130 .... 2
HF, Van Mount, High-Power, R-118 .......... 1
HF/VHF, Vehicle Mount, Medium-Power ...... 2
HF/VHF, Vehicle Mount, High-Power ......... 2
VHF, Manpack, Low-Power, R-107 ........... 7
VHF, Vehicle Mount, Medium-Power, R-123 ... 2
W arning Receiver, R-311 ................... 3
Radio Relay, VHF/UHF, R-401/405 ........... 2
4-22
FM 100-2-3
MATERIEL
SUPPORT
COMPANY
90
Truck, Van, ZIL (Maintenance) .... Trailer, Generator, 1-Axle ................ ... 1
4-23
FM 100-2-3
Maintenance Company,
Motorized Rifle and Tank Regiment, MRD and TD
NOTES. 1. The special repair platoon consists of an arc and gas welding section, battery
repair and recharging section, and electrical repair section.
2. The mobile repair workshop platoon consists of three sections, each equipped
with an MTP armored maintenance vehicle, During field operations, one MTP will
support each MRB (BMP).
FOOTNOTES. "Personnel and equipment levels for the maintenance company, MRR, BTR-
equipped.
""Personnel and equipment levels for the maintenance company. MRR, BMP-
equipped.
""Personnel and equipment levels for the maintenance company, TR.
4-24
FM 100-2-3
NOTES. 1. The UAZ-450A/452 is a standard ambulance. Other general purpose trucks may
serve as ambulances. The regimental medical point may also employ the
LuAZ-967M light evacuation vehicle.
2. There may be two collection sections.
4-25
FM 100-2-3
MOTORIZED
RIFLE SQUAD
(BMP)
0 9
NOTES. 1. With a standard nine-man squad, each BMP has two empty seats (six per pla-
toon), which can accommodate the platoon leader and the assistant platoon leader.
The BMP-2 has one empty seat (three per platoon).
2. One squad in each platoon has an SVD sniper rifle.
3, Firepower calculations should include the 73-mm smoothbore gun or 30-mm
cannon, ATGM, and the 7.62-mm machine gun mounted on each BMP.
4-26
FM 100-2-3
NOTES. 1. The company commander's RTO comes from the battalion signal platoon and is
not part of the BMP company personnel total.
2. The same BMP company organization is also organic to the MRB (BMP), TR, TD.
4-27
FM 100-2-3
MOTORIZED RIFLE
BATTALION (BMP)
497
page 4.8
NOTE. The same BMP battalion organization is also found in the TR, TD.
4-28
FM 100-2-3
BATTALION
HEADQUARTERS
4 8
AUTOMATIC GRENADE
LAUNCHER PLATOON
1 21
-- 1
4-29
FM 100-2-3
The MRR is the basic combined arms organiza- within MRBs. In most other respects, the two
tion and the most common maneuver element of regiments are similar. Exceptions are as follows:
the Soviet ground forces. Motorized rifle, tank, BMP-equipped regiments each have an organic
artillery, antiaircraft, antitank, engineer, signal, battalion of 122-mm SP howitzers (2S1), while BTR
and CSS assets are organic to the MRR. The regi- regiments may have 122-mm towed howitzers
ment is the smallest organization which has all (D-30). Also, BTR regiments have antitank platoons
of these elements. within the MRBs, a feature not found in the BMP
regiments.
Regimental organization includes three MRBs
and one TB. A 122-mm howitzer battalion and The TBs of both BMP- and BTR-equipped MRRs
three 120-mm mortar batteries or 82-mm automatic have 40 medium tanks. This chapter lists all tanks
mortar batteries provide fire support. While within the MRR as T-64/72/80, but older types are
battalion-sized elements support the division, often present outside the Western TVD.
corresponding company-sized units support MRRs.
Although the regiment normally operates as
The MRRs have either the BMP AICV or one part of the division, it is capable of short-term
of the BTR series of APCs as the primary troop- independent operations. It has the assets to react
carrying vehicle. Both BMP and BTR regiments independently to changes in the combat situation.
now have the AGS-17 automatic grenade launcher Much of the equipment is amphibious.
page 4 25
NOTES. 1. If the T8 of this regiment has T-54,55,62 tanks, regimental strength will increase
by 31 or 40 enlisted personnel.
2. In the late 1980s. forces in Eastern Europe began to standardize tank battalions
at 31 tanks. (See p. 4-108.)
4-30
(continued)
FOOTNOTES. 'This vehicle includes the TALL MIKE radar, which appears separately in this list.
wThis vehicle includes the SMALL FRED radar, which appears separately in this list
-o -
00-
m
C0
C
-6'
(continued)
(continued)
(continued)
m
C1
MOTORIZED RIFLE
REGIMENT (BM P). 5 o
MRD AND TD N- ym yQ J °"
00
2T
.A N
W l1
FM 100-2-3
BATTALION
HEADQUARTERS
....
1
HEADQUARTERS
PLATOON
--
SUPPLY AND
MAINTENANCE PLATOON
SP HOWITZER
BATTERY
10 20 25 55
Il, " ,
NOTE. This SP howitzer battalion may also be present in the BTR-equipped MRR in lieu of a
battalion of 122-mm towed howitzers (D-30).
FOOTNOTE. 'This vehicle includes the SMALL FRED radar, which appears separately in this
list.
4-36
FM 100-2-3
The MRD is organized around a six-regiment medical battalions provide limited but highly
structure: three MRRs, one TR, one artillery regi- mobile CSS.
ment, and one SAM regiment. An SSM battalion, As a result of the reorganization which began
an antitank battalion, and a helicopter squadron in the late 1970s, the TR of the MRD has an SP
provide additional CS. Other support elements howitzer battalion, the MRL battalion is part of
include engineer and signal battalions, a chemical the artillery regiment, the reconnaissance bat-
protection company, and an artillery command talion has medium tanks, and the helicopter
battery. Materiel support, maintenance, and squadron provides additional fire support. The
4-37
FM 100-2-3
current trend in the MRD is to replace BTR- generally keep pace with increases in the fire-
equipped MRRs with additional BMP-equipped power and mobility of combat organizations.
MRRs. The modernization of equipment includes
the deployment of increasing numbers of T-64,
T-72, and T-80 tanks. It also includes the intro- With the exception of the MRRs already
duction of SS-21 tactical ballistic missiles to described, the remaining elements of the MRD
replace free rockets over ground (FROGs). appear on the following pages. The organization
charts show the latest upgrades in organization
All subunits benefit from continuous upgrade. and equipment, even though these changes may
The capabilities of the organic support elements not have yet occurred in all divisions.
MOTORIZED
RIFLE
DIVISION
13,294+
-- ---- I
I HELICOPTER I
I SQUADRON I
I I
L- - 200
page 4 100
NOTES. 1. The MRD may have an independent tank battalion (ITB) (p 4-105) which is not
included in the MRD personnel total.
2. Normally, one MRR in the MRD is BMP-equipped. Some MRDs have two BMP-
equipped MRRs with only one BTR-equipped MRR.
3. The MRD may have a SAM regiment equipped with the SA-8 SAM (p. 4-101) or
an AAA regiment equipped with the S-60 AA Gun (p. 4-104) instead of the SA-6
SAM regiment
4. Armies in WGF are consolidating division-level SSM battalions into army-level
SSM brigades.
5 Starting in 1989, the Soviets are converting the TR of the MRD into a fourth MRR.
6. Not all divisions have a helicopter squadron.
4-38
FM 100-2-3
MOTORIZED RIFLE Q Q
4 w
DIVISION
FROG/M orL
SS-21/SCARAB 44
152-mm SP Howitzer. 2S3544
122-mmSPHowitzer._2S1 18__ 18_36
(continued)
4-39
FM 100-2-3
MOTORIZED RIFLE
DIVISION Q ' v v v - -. , :V"0 0 . ~ ,'
y, °i°.. C°O
da~~
4 ~ h ~ ~
'f ~ 'Y Pl Q
Mi-8T/HIIP DIG 2 2
Mi-24/HIND D/E/F 6 6
ACV/ACRV/AICV/APC/ASC
ACV, BMP/BROM/BTR 42 22 12 6 6 5 3 2 8 2 108
ACV, BRM-1 * 2 1 1 3 7
AICV, 8MP-1/BMP-2 6 129 3 12 150
APC, BTR-50/60/70/80 3 292 4 4 0-6 3 306-312
APC, BTR-6OPA (FAC) 2 1 1 4
MRP, PRP-3 (8MP M1975)*** 2 1 1 4 8
APC, MT-LB M1975** 1 1
APC, MT-LB. Prime Mover 14 14
ASC, BRDM-2 8 4 4 6-12 22-28
ACRV. 1V12 Series 8 8 24 40
ACRV M1979 (1/2/3) 16 16
GENERAL PURPOSE TRUCKS
Truck, UAZ-69/469 12 44 22 13 22 7 4 3 5 8 12 7 5 2 4 2 172
Truck, GAZ-66 9 134 62 17 38 19 6 4 2 7 33 4 3 1 5 344
Truck, ZIL-130/131/151/157 28 14 73 8 3 11 5 22 38 14 5 21 2 244
Truck, Ural-375 94 67 22 90 1 4 16 120 6 1 421
Truck, KrAZ-214/255 1 1
Truck, KrAZ/ZIL/Ural 4 114 23 9 51 38 8 9 1 257
VAN TRUCKS
Truck, Van, GAZ 12 4 4 9 6 2 17 2 21 1 3 1 1 83
Truck, Van, ZIL/Ural 12 6 3 3 15 18 5 6 2 1 1 2 74
Truck, Van,ZIL (Signal) 4 2 2 2 4 12 26
Truck, Van, ZIL. (Maintenance) 1 40 21 19 3 11 2 2 4 4 9 40 - 2 158
Truck, Van,UJAZ-452 2 1 1 4 1 1 10
Truck, Van,Kitchen PAC-170/200 8 4 3 2 17
(continued)
*This vehicle includes the TALL MIKE radar, which appears separately in this list.
*This vehicle includes the SMALL FRED radar, which appears separately in this list.
**This vehicle includes the BIG FRED radar, which appears separately in this list.
4-40
FM 100-2-3
6 I 3 2
2 y 1 1 1r 1 1Q 1Q 0 Q ry.,o 73
6 14 2
2 2
11 1
25 1 6 2 318
4112 3
2 2
1 611
1 10
3 31
15 1
15 15
15 15
(continued)
4-41
FM 100-2-3
(continued)
4-42
FM 100-2-3
MOTORIZED RIFLE
DIVISION AZ k QA
AZ el A ~ L s r~ Ij~~
(continued)
4-43
FM 100-2-3
MOTORIZED RIFLE
DIVISION
SIGINT EQUIPMENT
Intercept Receiver, VHF/UHF
Radio DF/HF/VHF/UHF
Radar DF
RADIOS
Radio Telegraph
4-44
FM 100-2-3
DIVISION
PRINCIPAL ITEMS OF EQUIPMENT HEADQUARTERS
245
Equipment Total Equipment TTotal
SAM, SA-7/GRAIL or ........... ......... 6 Truck, POL.............................. . 1
SA-14/GREMLIN or SA-16 Truck, Ambulance, UAZ-450A/452 . 1
ATGL, RPG-7V................. ......... 3 Sedan, GAZ-24........................... .2 Non-Subordinate
DIVISION
5.45-mm LMG, RPK-74......... .......... 3 Trailer, Cargo, 2-Axle...................... 4 COMMANDER
APC. BTR-50/60/70 ............ .......... 3 Trailer, Generator, 2-Axle................... .2
Truck, UAZ-69/469 ......... 12 Trailer, Generator, 1-Axle................... .1
KEY
Truck, GAZ-66 . . 9 Trailer, POL . 1
- -Dashed lines between
Truck, KrAZ/ZIL/UraI........... .......... 4 Trailer, Water............................ . 1
blocks indicate relationships
Truck, Van, ZIL/Ural (Command) ......... 12 Trailer, Kitchen........................... I. with elements which are not
Truck, Van, ZIL (Maintenance) .... . . 1 Radio: actually part of the division.
Truck, Van, UAZ-452............ .2 VHF, Vehicle Mount, Medium-Power, R-123 .. 3 FIRST DEPUTY
COMMANDER
REAR STAFF
NOTE. The signal battalion provides C2 vehicles for the division commander and key members
of his staff. The division headquarters company (approximately 105 personnel) uses DEPUTY COMMANDER
POLITICAL STAFF DEPUTY COMMANDER DEPUTY COMMANDER
the equipment listed on this page to provide administrative/logistic support to head-
quarters elements. r rm-m m m
FORTHEREAR FORARMAMENTS
FOR
TECHNICAL MATTERS
DEPUTY COMMANDER Coordinates
FORPOLITICAL AFFAIRS I
CHIEF IF STAFF mmmmmmmin
AND POLITICAL STAFF
* * * *
DIVISION STAFF
-- T-
1 1I 1m
CHIEF OF HEADQUARTERS
CHIEF OF CHIEF OF CHIEF OF CHIEF OF CHIEF OF CHIEF OF
CRYPTOGRAPHIC HEADQUARTERS COMMANDANT/
1st SECTION 2d SECTION 3d SECTION 4th SECTION TOPOGRAPHIC
SECTION SECTION ADMINISTRATION HEADQUARTERS
OPERATIONS INTELLIGENCE SIGNAL ORGANIZATION
AND FINANCE SECTION COMPANY
FOOTNOTES, "These three sections assist the division commander, but they are not subordi- "'The chief of the intelligence section is also the chief of reconnaissance
nate to him. Corresponding offices at Army supervise them. The KGB Counter- troops.
intelligence Detachment (Special Staff) normally consists of about 16 personnel. ""The chief of the signal section is also the chief of signal troops.
The personnel totals for the division do not include these personnel. "'"The division headquarters company includes personnel who peform traffic
The First Deputy Commander is a peacetime position only. control duties.
4-45
FM 100-2-3
The TR of the MRD provides the division with This TR (of the MRD) lacks organic motorized
a highly integrated armor threat in addition to rifle assets. It does have reconnaissance, air de-
the TBs that are organic to the MRRs. The TR fense, signal, engineer, and chemical protection
has three TBs of 31 medium tanks each. It also assets as well as a limited CSS capability similar
has a battalion of 18 2S1 122-mm SP howitzers. to that found in the MRR.
TANK
REGIMENT
1143
NOTES. 1. If this TR has T-54/55/62 tanks, personnel strength will increase by 94 enlisted
personnel.
2. Approximately 150 personnel in the regiment are officers
3. Starting in 1989, the Soviets are converting the TR, MRD to a BMP-equipped
MRR.
FOOTNOTE. iln some TRs, the howitzer battalion may still have the 122-mm towed howitzer
D-30. (See p. 4-16 for the organization and equipment of a D-30 howitzer
battalion.)
4-46
FM 100-2-3
ASC, BRDM-2 44
ACRV, 1V12 Series 88
GENERAL PURPOSE TRUCKS
Truck, UAZ-69/469 3 1 1 5 2 11
Truck, GAZ-66 7 2 3 41 1
Truck, ZIL-130/131/151/157 21 4 45 1 2 7
Truck, Ural-375 1 20 12
Truck. KrAZ/ZIL/Ural 99
VAN TRUCKS
Truck, Van, GAZ 31 4
Truck, Van, ZIL (Command) 3
Truck. Van, ZIL (Signal) 2
i u d 2 2cn
*This vehicle includes the TALL MIKE radar, whic~h appears separately in this list.
"This vehicle includes the SMALL FRED radar, which appears separately in this list.
4-47
FM 100-2-3
(T-64/72/80), MRD
'7Ao AZ'
'b
AA k ° o $ -~ .% I
P01 TRUCKS
Truck. POL,ZIL/Ural/KrAZ 9 2 - - - - - 15 _ __ __ 26
DECONTAMINATION TRUCKS
Truck, Decontamination 4 1 5
CHEMICAL RECONNAISSANCE
VEHICLES
Chemical Reconnaissance Vehicle
BRDM-2rkh/RKhM _____3 - - - 3
MISC SPECIAL PURPOSE
VEHICLES- -
Sedan, GAZ-24 1 - - - - - -- - -1
Motorcycle 3 _ __ 3 _____6
Dozer, BAT/BATM/PKT - - -- 1 - - - - -1
TRAILERS
Trailer. P0L 2 15 17
(continued)
4-48
FM 100-2-3
cA,
TANK REGIMENT4y . Qu z
(T-64/72/80), MRD ~VQ ioz O Q
P , Qa
A, q. 1,0$,C j ,
RADARS
Battlefield Surveillance, TALL MIKE 1 1
Battlefield Surveillance, SMALL FRED 1 1
RADIOS
HF or VHF, Manpack, Low-Power,
R-104M or R-107 4 4
HF, Manpack, Low-Power, R-104M 6 1 2 1 10
HF, Vehicle-Mount, Medium-Power,
R-130 1 15 1 2 19
HF, Van-Mount, High-Power, R-118 1 1
HF/VHF, Vehicle-Mount, Medium-
Power 2 2
HF/VHF, Vehicle-Mount, High-Power 2 2
VHF, Manpack, Low-Power, R-107 2 3 10 2 3 7 1 1 1 30
VHF, Vehicle-Mount. Medium-Power,
R-123 2 99 28 11 7 7 2 4 5 165
Warning Receiver, R-311 3 2 3 1 3 12
Radio Relay, VHF/UHF, R-401/405 2 2
4-49
FM 100-2-3
The artillery regiment of an MRD normally ever, some divisions may not yet conform to this
consists of three battalions of 152-mm SP howitzers standard; such divisions may still have one or
(2S3) and one battalion of 122-mm rocket launchers more battalions with older weapon systems such
(BM-21). In a TD, it normally has only two bat- as the 122-mm towed howitzer D-30.
talions of 2S3s and one battalion of BM-21s. How-
page 4-53
page 4-54**
4-50
FM 100-2-3
J
A% A%
ARTILLERY REGIMENT, m oQ o s o oQ' oZ
VAN TRUCKS
Truck, Van, GAZ 2 4 2 1 9
Truck, Van,ZIL/Ural 1 4 / 6 2 6 _____13/15
(continued)
FOOTNOTES. *Some artillery regiments may have one battalion of eighteen 122-mm towed
howitzers D-30 instead of one of the 2S3 battalions. Some 2S3 battalions
may have 24 tubes rather than the 18 shown here.
"This vehicle includes the BIG FRED radar, which appears separately in this
list.
*This vehicle includes the SMALL FRED radar, which appears separately in
this list.
4-51
FM 100-2-3
ARTILLERY REGIMENT,
MRD AND TD
POL TRUCKS
Truck, POL, ZIL/Ural
SPECIAL PURPOSE VEHICLES
Armored Recovery Vehicle
Truck, Decontamination
TRAILERS
Trailer, POL
Trailer, Cargo, 2-Axle
Trailer. Generator, 1-Axle
Trailer, Generator. 2-Axle
Trailer, Water
Trailer, Field Kitchen
ARTILLERY-ASSOCIATED
EQUIPMENT
Rangefinder, Laser, SAGE GLOSS
Sound Ranging Set
Finder
Radar Direction
RADARS
Radar, Meteorological., END TRAY
Radar, .Battlefield Surveillance.
BIG FRED
Radar, Battlefield Surveillance.
SMALL FRED
Radar. Countermortar/
Counterbattery
RADIOS
HF. Manpack, Low-Power, R-104M 1
(continued)
4-52
FM 100-2-3
ARTILLERY REGIMENT, A. A_
Quo 0 0 01
MRD AND TD
,~ 9"qI $~ig ~ A Q2 VP . ~
COMMAND
AND CONTROL
BATTERY
75
HEADQUARTERS
REGIMENTAL
HEADQUARTERS BATTERY
55
20
4-53
FM 100-2-3
SP HOWITZER
BATTALION
(152-mm)
230
Page 4-55
FOOTNOTES. *Some 2S3 battalions may have 24 tubes rather than the 18 shown here.
"This vehicle includes the SMALL FRED radar, which appears separately in
this list.
4-54
FM 100-2-3
PLATON GUNh
I HEADQUARTERS SECTION'
FOOTNOTE. 'Some 2S3 battalions may have expanded from 6-tube to 8-tube batteries, adding
a fourth gun section to each firing platoon.
4-55
FM 100-2-3
4-56
FM 100-2-3
HEADQUARTERS
& HEADQUARTERS
PLATOON
25
4-57
FM 100-2-3
4-58
FM 100-2-3
ARTILLERY
RECONNAISSANCE
BATTERY
100
FOOTNOTES. *This vehicle includes the BIG FRED radar, which appears separately in this
list.
**This vehicle includes the SMALL FRED radar, which appears separately in
this list.
4-59
FM 100-2-3
Maintenance Company,
Artillery Regiment, MRD and TD
MAINTENANCE
COMPANY
40
_____ m
I
4-60
FM 100-2-3
I
COMP+N
HEADQUARTERS
W]Y
I
TRANSPORT
PLATOON IIPLATOON
P& 7 SERVICE AND
MAINTENANCE
,j SECTION
4-61
FM 100-2-3
The SAM regiment makes up an important part regiments equipped with the 57-mm towed antiair-
of an extensive air defense envelope over the bat- craft gun S-60 still exist in some divisions in rear
tlefield. This chapter depicts the SA-6 SAM regi- areas. Although the SA-6 SAM regiment appears
ment as standard at division level. However, many here, this chapter also provides organization charts
divisional SAM regiments have the SA-8 as an al- and equipment tables for the SA-8 SAM regiment
ternative to the SA-6. Antiaircraft artillery (AAA) (p. 4-101) and the S-60 AAA regiment (p. 4-104).
80 50 24
NOTE. Since 1979, a very limited number of SAM regiments have deployed the new SA-6b
SAM alongside the SA-6a.
4-62
FM 100-2-3
20
SAM REGIMENT (SA-6), % / A Clj
MRD AND TD 0Z oA yv
ACV, BTR-GOPA - - - __
Truck, GAZ-66 3 1 6 5 1 3 19
Truck. ZI-5/1 7 3
VAN TRUCKS
Truck. Van. Ural/ZIL 2... 6 -b... 4~i.
POL TRUCKS
Truck, P01, ZIL/Ural 15 15
SPECIAL PURPOSE TRUCKS
Truck, Tractor. Canister Transport ____ -
(continued)
4-63
FM 100-2-3
V.
TRAILERS
Semitrailer, Canister Transporter 15 15
Trailer. POL. 2-Axle 7 7
Trailer. Van, 2-Axle 4 1 1 5 2 13
Trailer. Cargo, 2-Axle 1 1 5 5 3 15
Trailer, Generator, 1-Axle 2 1 3 7 -
Trailer. Water 3 1 4
Trailer, Kitchen 1 1 2 5 1 1 11
RADARS
Radar, Aerial Surv/Target Acq.,
LONG TRACK 2 2
Radar, Height-Finding, THIN SKIN 1
Radar. Fire Control. STRAIGHT FLUSH 5
RADIOS
HF, Manpack, Low-Power, R-104M 2 1 3
HF/VHF, Vehicle Mount, Medium-
Power 4 4
HF/VHF, Vehicle Mount, High-
Power 2
VHF. Portable, Low-Power, R-148 3
VHF. Manpack, Low-Power, R-107 1 2 1 5 i 1 1
VHF. Vehicle Mount. Medium-Power
R-123 1 3 30 3
Warning Receiver. R-311 2 5 7
Radio Relay, VHF/UHF. R-401/405 1 1
4-64
FM 100-2-3
Regimental Headquarters,
SAM Regiment (SA-6), MRD and TD
4-65
FM 100-2-3
ARTILLERY
RECONNAISSANCE
(TARGET
ACQUISITION/
EARLY WARNING)
BATTERY
55
4-66
FM 100-2-3
!I
ATTERY
MISSILE
PREPARATION MISSILE TESTING MISSILE TRANSPORT/
HEADQUARTERS PLATOON PLATOON RESUPPLY PLATOON
4-67
FM 100-2-3
MISSILE FIRING
BATTERY
30
SERVICE SECTION
Truck, Van, Ural/ZIL ....................... 1 VHF, Vehicle Mount, Medium-Power, R-123 ... 6
Truck, Missile Transloader, ZIL-131 .......... 2 Warning Receiver, R-311 ......... .......... 1
4-68
FM 100-2-3
MOTOR
TRANSPORT
COMPANY
80
T
I
SUPPORT SECTION
Truck, GAZ-66 .......... .,. 1 Trailer, Generator, 1-Axle ........... ... ....... 3
Maintenance Company,
SAM Regiment (SA-6), MRD and TD
4-69
FM 100-2-3
The SSM battalion consists of two firing bat- the FROG. Armies in WGF are consolidating
teries of two launchers each. The SS-21 has division-level SS-21 battalions into army-level SSM
replaced the FROG in divisions opposite NATO. brigades.
The SS-21 has greater range and accuracy than
page 4-71
4-70
FM 100-2-3
4-71
FM 100-2-3
The division antitank battalion exists only in BRDM-2 chassis. The prime mover for the T-12/
the MRD. The standard structure is now two 6-gun MT-12 antitank gun is normally the MT-LB.
batteries of 100-mm antitank guns (T-12/MT-12) Some MRDs may not yet have vehicle-mounted
and one 9-vehicle battery of mounted ATGM sys- ATGMs in the antitank battalion. In such cases,
tems. The latter may consist of the AT-3/SAGGER the battalion consists of three 6-gun batteries of
or the newer AT-5/SPANDREL mounted on the T-12/MT-12.
4-72
FM 100-2-3
FOOTNOTES. *Also called the long-range reconnaissance company or the airborne recon-
naissance company.
"This vehicle includes the TALL MIKE radar, which appears separately in this
list.
4-73
FM 100-2-3
FOOTNOTE. *This vehicle includes the TALL MIKE radar, which appears separately in this
list.
4-74
FM 100-2-3
1 x BRM-1 3 x T-64/72/80
each: 3 x BMP-1/2
FOOTNOTE. *This vehicle includes the TALL MIKE radar, which appears separately in this
list.
4-75
FM 100-2-3
NOTE. Personnel in the reconnaissance assault company (also called the long-range recon-
naissance company) have parachute training. Small teams of five to six men can enter
the enemy rear area by parachute, helicopter, and vehicle, or on foot. They can also
land by transport helicopter (Mi-6A/HQOK or Mi-26/HALO A) along with their combat
vehicles.
4-76
FM 100-2-3
RADIO/RADAR
RECONNAISSANCE
COMPANY
80
MAINTENANCE
PLATOON
Truck, Van, ZIL .............................. 6 VHF, Manpack, Low-Power, R-107 ....... ...
7
Intercept Receiver, VHF/UHF .................. 8 W arning Receiver, R-311 ............... ... 1
Radio Direction Finder, HF/VHF/UHF ........... 3
4-77
FM 100-2-3
ENGINEER
COMMUNICATIONS MAINTENANCE
RECONNAISSANCE
PLATOON PLATOON SERVICE PLATOON
PLATOON
page 4-84 page 4-84 page 4-84 page 4-84
4-78
FM 100-2-3
ENGINEER BATTALION, o
MRD AND T c*, " ro 5 yyP z P)
PERSONNEL 15 65 55 55 65 65 75 395
WEAPONS
ATGL. RPG-7V 2 6 8
ACV/APC
ACV. BRDM-2 1 .
ACV, BTR-50/60 1 1
APC. BTR-50/60 3 3
GENERAL PURPOSE TRUCKS
Truck, UAZ-69/469 2 1 1 1 2 1 8
Truck, ZIL-130/131/151/157 1 3 2 3 2 I 1 1 8 22
Truck, Ural-375 2 10 4 16
Truck, KrAZ-214/255 1 1
VAN TRUCKS
Truck, Van, GAZ (Signal) 1 1 2
Truck, Van. ZIL (Maintenance) 4 4
POL TRUCKS
Truck, P01 3 3
SPECIAL PURPOSE TRUCKS
Truck, Crane, K-61 1 1
Truck, Crane, Ural-375 2 2
Truck. Crane. Shovel, E-305V 1 1 2
Truck, Dump, MMZ-555 1 2 3
Truck, Saw Mill. Ural-375 (LRVSaw) 1 1
Truck, Ambulance. UAZ-450A/452 1 1
Truck, Water Purification 1 1
Truck, UAZ-69 DIM Mine Detector 2 1 3
ENGINEER EQUIPMENT
Armored Engineer Tractor, IMR 2 2
Bridge. TMM on KrAZ-214/255 8 8
Tracked Ferry, GSP 6 6
PMP Center on KrAZ-214 16 16
(continued)
4-79
FM 100-2-3
ENGINEER BATTALION,
MRD AND TD
Mineclearer, MTK/MTK-2
Grader. 0-144
Concrete Mixer
TRAILERS
Trailer, Amphibious. PKP
Trailer, Lowboy
Trailer, POL
Trailer. Water
Trailer. Kitchen
Trailer. Compressor
Trailer. Saw. 2-Axle
RADIOS
HF, Manpack. Low-Power. R-104M
HF/VHF. Vehicle-Mount, Medium-
Power
HF/VHF. Vehicle-Mount. High-Power
4-80
FM 100-2-3
BATTALION
HEADQUARTERS
15
4-81
FM 100-2-3
NOTE. Two GSP heavy amphibious ferry vehicles make up one ferry; the twelve right-and-
left half-ferries in MRD and TD engineer battalions form six ferries.
! I 1
COMPANY BUNKE ERCONSTRUCTION HEAVYEQUIPMENT SPECIAL TASKS
HEADQUARTERS PLATOON PLATOON PLATOON
FIELD WATER
SUPPLY SECTION
4-82
FM 100-2-3
NOTE. The eight TMM spans make up two TMM bridge sets.
PONTON BRIDGE
COMPANY
65
I
NOTE. A full bridge set consists of 32 center and 4 ramp sections. The half-set held by the
engineer battalion can make up a bridge or several rafts.
4-83
FM 100-2-3
ENGINEER
RECONNAISSANCE COMMUNICATIONS
PLATOON PLATOON
MAINTENANCE
SERVICE PLATOON
PLATOON
4-84
FM 100-2-3
4-85
FM 100-2-3
BATTALION
HEADQUARTERS
17
Radios:
HF, Manpack, Low-Power, R-104M ........... 1
4-86
FM 100-2-3
RADIO
TELEPHONE AND
TELEGRAPH COMPANY
115
I I I i
COMPANY
HEADQUARTERS WIRE PLATOON RADIO R OPERATIONS PLATOON
PLATO( NN
COURIER PLATOON
SUPPLY AND
MAINTENANCE
PLATOON
30
Truck, GAZ-63/66 ............. ............. 3 Trailer, POL, 2-Axle ................ ... ..... .. 1
4-87
FM 100-2-3
MATERIEL
SUPPORT
BATTALION
510+
4-88
FM 100-2-3
20 Radios:
HF, Manpack, Low-Power, R-104M ...... .... 1
4-89
FM 100-2-3
MEDICAL
AND SERVICE
SECTION
PLATOON
4-90
FM 100-2-3
FOOTNOTES. *Personnel and equipment levels for the maintenance battalion, MRD.
"Personnel and equipment levels for the maintenance battalion, TD.
4-91
FM 100-2-3
BATTALION
HEADQUARTERS
15
NOTE. This company comprises two platoons when organic to an MRD, but three platoons
when organic to a TD.
FOOTNOTES. *Personnel and equipment levels for the tank/tracked vehicle maintenance com-
pany. maintenance battalion, MRD.
"**Personnel and equipment levels for the tank/tracked vehicle maintenance com-
pany, maintenance battalion, TD.
4-92
FM 100-2-3
4-93
FM 100-2-3
Equipment Total
ATGL, RPG-7V................... ...........................................
1
Truck, GAZ-66................... ...........................................
4
SUPPLY AND Truck, ZIL Series.................. ...........................................
4
SERVICE Truck, Ural-375................... ...........................................
6
PLATOON Truck, ZIL-555.................... ...........................................
1
25~ Truck, POL...................... ...........................................
4
Truck, Water Tank................ ...........................................
1
Truck, Ambulance, UAZ-450A/452 ... ...........................................
1
Trailer, Cargo, 2-Axle............. ...........................................
4
Trailer, POL. 2-Axle ................ .......................................
4
Trailer, Water.................... ...........................................
1
Trailer, Field Kitchen............... ...........................................
3
Radio:
VHF, Manpack, Low-Power, R-107............ 1
Equipment Total
Truck, Tractor, KrAZ-214/255.................2
RECOVERY Truck, Recovery, ZIL-157 ..................... 2
PLATOON Tracked Amphibian, K-61 /PTS ................. 1
Tractor, Artillery, AT-S.......................1
Armored Recovery Vehicle....................5
Trailer, Lowboy ............................. 2
Radios:
HF, Vehicle Mount, Medium-Power, R-130 .... 1
VHF, Vehicle Mount, Medium-Power, R-123 ... 4
4-94
FM 100-2-3
4-95
FM 100-2-3
MEDICAL
BATTALION
175
Equipment Total
BATTALION Truck, UAZ-69/469 .......................... 1
HEADQUARTERS Truck, Van, GAZ ........................... 1
10 Radios:
HF, Manpack, Low-Power, R-104M ........... 1
HF/VHF, Vehicle Mount, Medium-Power ...... 1
W arning Receiver, R-311 ................... 1
4-96
FM 100-2-3
COMPAN
4-97
FM 100-2-3
Equipment Total
Truck, UAZ-69/469................. 1
................................................
TRANSPORT
Truck, ZIL Series................... ................................................
8
SECTION Truck, Van, ZIL (Maintenance)........ ................................................
2
4-98
FM 100-2-3
ARTILLERY
COMMAND
BATTERY
702
U
BATTERY]
HEDUAR T ERS
I RECONNAISSANCE
PLATOON
COMNICTIOS
PLAON
METOROOG
PLOON
ESEVC TION
4-99
FM 100-2-3
Some MRDs and TDs have an organic helicopter have a helicopter detachment that performs mostly
squadron, which is also known as a fire support administrative/liaison roles. The detachment has
squadron. The squadron has 18 helicopters which 6 HOPLITEs, 2 HIP airborne command post
may be armed with various combinations of variants, and approximately 100 personnel. The
weapons, including antitank guided missiles and detachment does not have significant fire support
air-to-surface rocket pods. or troop-carrying capabilities.
Even in the forward area, not all divisions
have a helicopter squadron. Instead, they may
SQUADRON
HEADQUARTERS HOPLITE FLIGHT HIP FLIGHT HIND FLIGHT
,, ,
NOTES. 1. Squadron structure and the totals of 18 aircraft (3 per flight) and 200 personnel
are estimates only.
2. In some squadrons, the number of HIND attack helicopters has increased.
4-100
FM 100-2-3
4-101
FM 100-2-3
Truck. UAZ-69/469 1 3 1 1 1 7
Truck. GAZ-66 3 1 6 5 1 3 19
Truck, ZIL-131/157 3 3
Truck. KrAZ/ZIL/Ural 5 24 29
Truck. Ural-375 9 9
VAN TRUCKS
Truck, Van. Ural 2 1 6 4 13
Truck. Van(Signal) 4 4
Truck, Van(Maintenance) 3 7 10
Truck. Van. UAZ-452 (Computer) 1 1
POL TRUCKS
Truck. POI. ZIL/Ural 15 15
SPECIAL PURPOSE TRUCKS
Missile Transloader
(TELAR Chassis) 10 10
Radar Calibration Vehicle
(TELAR Chassis) 2 2
Truck, Crane, Ural-375 2 2
Truck. Ambulance. UAZ-450A/452 2 2
Truck. Decontamination 4 4
CHEMICAL RECONNAISSANCE
VEHICLES
Chemical Reconnaissance Vehicle,
BRDM-2rkh/RKhM 3 3
(continued)
FOOTNOTE. 'The TELAR includes the LAND ROLL fire control/target acquisition radar, which
appears separately in this list.
4-102
FM 100-2-3
- --
4
v, 4i
~to
1\
° kA_9
4'
2 A
/
j
)
I%
A~Z .0 O~+~ o~~J
TRAILERS
Trailer, POL, 2-Axle - 7
4-103
FM 100-2-3
ANTIAIRCR
ARTILLER
REGIMEN
(S-60)
420
!
REGIMENTAL COMMAND AND FIRING BATTERY SERVICE BATTERY
HEADQUARTERS CONTROL BATTERY
20 60 65 80
FIRE CONTROL
GUN SECTION
SECTION
4-104
FM 100-2-3
Some MRDs have an independent tank battalion MRDs, this chapter includes an organization chart part of the typical MRD. For that reason, its
(ITB) in addition to the tank assets previously and an equipment table of the ITB as an alter- personnel and equipment do not appear in the
discussed. The ITB normally has 51 tanks. Since native structure. However, the ITB is not always MRD totals.
the ITB is frequently present in forward-deployed
INDEPENDENT
TANK
BATTALION
227
BATTALION TANK COMPANY ENGINEER SECTION COMMUNICATIONS MAINTENANCE SUPPORT PLATOON MEDICAL SECTION
HEADQUARTERS (10x Medium Tank)+ SECTION SECTION
(1 'Medium Tank) 32 10 10 15 15 5
12
1 x Medium Tank, page 4-106 1 x Bridge, Tank- 1 x ASC,BRDM-2 1x Truck, Van, ZIL 1 x Truck, GAZ-66 1x Tuck, Ambulance,
T-64/72/80 Launched, MTU/MT-55 1x Truck, UAZ-69/469 (Maintenance) 4 x Truck, ZIL-131/157 GAZ-450A/452
1 x ACV,BTR-50/60 IxDitching Machine 1x Truck, Van, GAZ 1 x Truck, Crane, K-61 4 x Truck, Ural-375
1 Truck, UAZ-69/469 BTM/MDK-2 (Signal) 2 x Armored Recovery 2 x Truck, POL
3 x ATGL, RPG-7V 1xDozer, BAT! I HF, Manpack, Low- Vehicle 1 x Truck, Kitchen,
1 HF, Manpack, Low- BAT-M Power, R-104M 1 x Trailer, Generator, PAC-170/200
Power, R-104M 1 x HF, Vehicle Mount, 1-Axle 2 x Trailer, Cargo,
1x VHF, Manpack, Medium-Power, R-130 2-Axle
Low-Power, R-107 1 x VHF, Vehicle Mount, 2 x Trailer, POL,
2x HF,Vehicle Mount, Medium-Power, R-123 2-Axle
Medium-Power, R-130 1 Trailer, Water
2 VHF, Vehicle Mount,
Medium-Power, R-123
2 x Radio Relay,
VHF/UHF, R-401/405 NOTES. 1. The ITB exists only in some MRDs.
1x Warning Receiver, 2. If the ITB has T-54/55/62 tanks, its strength will increase by 31 or 51 enlisted
R-311 personnel.
3. In the late 1980s, ITBs began to adopt a 31-tank structure similar to other
tank battalions. (See p. 4-108.)
4-105
FM 100-2-3
Company Commander .. PM
Driver/Mechanic ...... PM
Gunner............ PM
Senior Technician ..... PM
Truck Driver ...... AKS-74
NOTE. If the ITB has T-54/55/62 tanks, company strength will increase by ten enlisted
personnel.
4-106
FM 100-2-3
Company Commander .. PM
Driver/Mechanic ...... PM
Gunner ............. PM
NOTE. Tank companies equipped with T-54/55/62 tanks have 10 additional enlisted personnel.
4-107
FM 100-2-3
Tank Battalion,
Tank Regiment, MRD and TD
NOTE. TBs equipped with T-54/55/62 tanks will have 31 additional enlisted personnel.
4-108
FM 100-2-3
The TR of the TD consists of five combat and MRD and the TD. The TR retains all other CS
CS battalions: three TBs, each of which has 31 and CSS subunits common to all MRRs and TRs.
tanks; one MRB; and, one battalion of 18 2S1 The one major exception is that this TR, like
122-mm SP howitzers. The MRB is identical to that of the MRD, does not have an antitank
those found in BMP-equipped MRRs of both the missile battery.
TANK REGIMENT
1,640
w m MM
-
NOTES. 1. If the TR. TD, has T-54/55/62 tanks, personnel strength will increase by 94
enlisted personnel.
2. Approximately 180 personnel are officers.
FOOTNOTE. *In some TRs. the howitzer battalion may still have the 122-mm towed howitzer
D-30. (See p. 4-16 for the organization and equipment of a 0-30 howitzer
battalion.)
4-109
Or y~
TANK REGIMENT
(T-64/72/80), TD Cr
At'
4 2 I#ZV " / m
F
o
PERSONNEL 65 405 497 220 60 55 70 50 24 90 70 34 1,640
"4
TANKS -N
Medium Tank, T-64/72/80 1 93 9
WEAPONS___-
18 0
122-mm SP Howitzer 2S1 18
120-mm Mortar, M1943/M-120 or
82-mm Automatic Mortar, 2B9 8 8
SAM, SA-9/GASKIN TEL or
SA-13/GOPHER TELAR 4 4
SPAA Gun, ZSU-23-4 or 2S6 4 4
SAM, SA-7/GRAIL or SA-14/GREMLIN
or SA-16 3 9 12
ATGL, RPG-7V 6 35 18 4 4 4 71
ACV/AICV/APC/ASC/ACRV
ACV,BRDM/BTR/BMP 6 3 3 3 15
ACV. BRM1 * 1 1
AICV, BMP-1/BMP-2 4 334
APC, BTR-50/60/70/80 1 3 4
ASC, BRDM-2 44
Truck, GAZ-66 15 7 2 3 1 4 1 33
Truck, ZIL-130/131/151/157 21 4 45 1 2 73
Truck, Ural-375 1 20 1 22
Truck, KrAZ/ZIL/Ural 4 9 13
VAN TRUCKS
Truck, Van, GAZ 3 1 4
Truck, Van, ZIL (Command) 3 3
Truck, Van,ZIL (Signal) 2 2
DECONTAMINATION TRUCKS
Truck, Decontamination 4 1 5
CHEMICAL RECONNAISSANCE
VEHICLES
Chemical Reconnaissance Vehicle
BRDM-2rkh/RKhM 3 3
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIAL
PURPOSE VEHICLES
Truck. Water Tank 44
(continued)
FOOTNOTES. This vehicle includes the TALL MIKE radar, which appears separately in this
list,
~This vehicle includes the SMALL FRED radar, which appears separately in
this list.
r' f ' i! r
0 v 1 2 Ari
TANK REGIMENT
(T-64/72/80), TD
~0- v02' Cr v yyV ;I yJ aVQv / 7
rm ' V v YQQ V y ?vim
y
i
Truck, Dump, MMZ-555 2 2
Sedan, GAZ-24 1 1
Motorcycle 3 3 6
Trailer, POL 1 2 15 18
TANK DIVISION
In the reorganization that began in the late the MRD. Likewise, the SAM regiment, SSM bat-
1970s, the Soviet TD gained more combat equip- talions, and helicopter squadron have similar
ment and personnel than the MRD. It is now a structures, whether they are organic to an MRD
more balanced combined arms formation. The TD, or to a TD. The same variations in equipment are
like the MRD, comprises six regiments: three TRs, possible. Some differences also exist in the con-
one MRR, one artillery regiment, and one SAM figuration of the artillery regiment, the engineer
regiment. battalion, and the maintenance battalion. The user
All other elements of the TD are virtually iden- of this document should consult the organization
tical to those of the MRD, except that there is no charts and the personnel and equipment tables
antitank battalion in the TD. The MRR is BMP- presented under the MRD for a more complete
equipped and is identical to the BMP regiment of explanation of such differences.
page 4-100
NOTES. 1. The TD may have a SAM regiment equipped with the SA-8 SAM (p. 4-101) or
an AAA regiment equipped with the S-60 AA Gun (p. 4-104) instead of the SA-6
SAM regiment.
2. Armies in WGF are consolidating division-level SSM battalions into army-level
SSM brigades.
3. Starting in 1989, the Soviets are converting one of the TRs of the TD into a
second MRR.
4. Not all divisions have a helicopter squadron.
4-112
r
-I 'D
m
TANK DIVISION q2 O 4
(T-64/72/80) 0 0
li 0.
PERSONNEL 245 4,920 2424 1062 504 170 340 395 272 510+ 250 83 175 70 200 11620+
TANKS 3
Medium Tank, T-64/72/80 282 401 6 328 /.
WEAPONS m
0
FROG/SSM TEL FROG-7/78 or v
SS-21/SCARAB 4 4 .
HELICOPTERS
Mi-2/HOPLITE 6 6
Mi-8T/HI1P C or Mi-17/HIP H____ 4 4
Mi-8T/HIP D/G 2 2
Mi-24/HIND D/E/F 6 6
ACV/ACRV/AICV/APC/ASC
ACV, BMP/BROM/BTR __ 45 21 6 6 3 2 8 __ 2 93
ACV, Recon, BRM-1 " 3 1 3 7
AICV, BMP-1/BMP-2 135 129 12 276
APC, BTR-50/6/70/80 3 12 4 0-6 3 22-28
APC, BTR-60PA (FAC) 3 1 4
MRP, PRP-3 (BMP M1975) 3 1 3 ____7
CHEMICAL RECONNAISSANCE d
VEHICLES V3
(Continued)
_ __
/ t ' 2 '
TANK DIVISION Q y P~
2 oy! ! J o l
(T-64/72/80)
414 / !
i0. .
(I
O tv
!l Gp
v- "4 V .-.
lvr .<! ~p!
yyv0 r ! ! r~c <V! ! y4
V V ^ ! ' y V y - - % <
i
Radio Telegraph 6
Communications Center, Signal Distri
bution Van 2 2
A typical CAA consists primarily of two to three balanced 2:2. However, other combinations may be
MRDs and up to two TDs. Based on army struc- possible. Therefore, the organizational charts below
tures identified in WGF in recent years, the ratio depict a variable number of divisions and all the
of MRDs to TDs in a CAA can vary from a pure different nondivisional CS and CSS elements which
3:0 to a perhaps more typical 3:1 or a more could be part of any given CAA.
(continued)
FOOTNOTES. In 1989. the Soviets began converting independent tank regiments (TRs) to
independent motorized rifle regiments (IMRRs), presumably organized like
other MRRs. (See p. 4-30.)
"Also known as a mobile computation and analysis station.
* 4*Also known as a radio intercept and direction-finding battalion.
***Also known as a radio and radar intercept and direction-finding battalion.
4-116
FM 100-2-3
I I
CHEMICAL I RADIOLOGICAL FLAMETHROWER
PROTECTION AND CHEMICAL
TTION RECONNAISSANCE BATTALION
BATTALION BATTALION
page 4-123
I I
MOBILE ANALYTICAL
SMOKE PLOTTING STATION** MEDICAL
BATTALION (RAST) BRIGADE
(RAST)
I I I
'MEDICAL RAILROAD TRAFFIC SPECIAL
TRANSPORT CONSTRUCTION CONTROL PROPAGANDA
BATTALION BRIGADE BATTALION DETACHMENT
I I
INDEPENDENT AIR EARLY
SIGNAL RADIO RELAY SIGNALS WARNING
REGIMENT IBATTALION COMPANY BATTALION
page 4-126
I I
RADIO RADIOTECHNICAL AIRFIELD
REAR TECHNICAL
RECONNAISSANCE RECONNAISSANCE COMPANY/
SERVICES
BATTALION*** BATTALION **'** BATTALION
page 4-126
4-117
FM 100-2-3
TANK ARMY
Tank Army
A typical TA consists primarily of three to four However, other combinations may be possible.
TDs and perhaps one MRD. Based on army struc- Therefore, the organizational charts below depict
tures identified in WGF in recent years, the ratio a variable number of divisions and all the different
of TDs to MRDs in a TA can vary from a pure nondivisional CS and CSS elements which could
4:0 to more balanced 4:1, 3:1, or 2:1 structures. be part of any given TA.
ARTILLERY
ARTILLERY COMMAND
COMMAND
ROCKET LAUNCHER
REGIMENT AND CONTROL
BATTALION
page 4-120
INDEPENDENT SPETSNAZ
AIR ASSAULT COMPANY/
BATTALION BATTALION
page 4-128 page 4-129
I I
PONTON
ENGINEER BRIDGE
BRIGADE REGIMENT
(continued)
NOTE: Armies in WGF are consolidating division-level SS-21 battalions into army-level SSM
brigades.
4-118
FM 100-2-3
I I
CHEMICAL RADIOLOGICAL FLAMETHROWER
POETOAND CHEMICAL
PROTECTION j RECONNAISSANCE BATTALION
BATTALION BATTALION
page 4-123
I I
MOBILE ANALYTICAL NUCLEAR BURST
SMOKE MEDICAL
PLOTTING STATION DIRECTION FINDING
BATTALION BRIGADE
(RAST) (NBDF) BATTALION
I I
MEDICAL RAILROAD TRAFFIC SPECIAL
TRANSPORT CONSTRUCTION CONTROL PROPAGANDA
BATTALION BRIGADE BATTALION DETACHMENT
I I
SIGNAL INDEPENDENT AIR EARLY
REGIMENT RADIO RELAY SIGNALS WARNING
BATTALION COMPANY BATTALION
page 4.126
4-119
FM 100-2-3
Equipment Total
5 x 18-Tube Battalion 4 x 24-Tube Battalion
152-mm Field Gun 2A36 or
152-mm SP Gun 2S5 or
130-mm Field Gun M-46.................... 36.......................48
152-mm Gun-Howitzer D-20 or
ML-20 or M1987 ........................... 54 ....................... 48
NOTES 1. While some armies, particularly those in the forward area, have an artillery brigade
with four 24-tube battalions, most armies have an artillery brigade consisting of
two gun battalions and three gun-howitzer battalions, with only 18 tubes per
battalion.
2. Some battalions still have the older 130-mm field gun M-46 or 152-mm gun-
howitzer ML-20.
Equipment Total
122-mm Rocket Launcher (40-Round) BM-21 .. 54
4-120
FM 100-2-3
Equipment Total
100-mm Antitank Gun T-12/MT-12.............36
ATGM Launcher Vehicle (BRDM-2), AT-3/5 . ... 27
4-121
FM 100-2-3
NOTE. The 1987 INF Treaty calls for elimination of the SS-23 from the Soviet inventory.
FOOTNOTE. An SSM battalion may consist of either two or three firing batteries; therefore,
a battalion may have 4 or 6 TELs, and a brigade may have 12 or 18 TELs.
There is at least one reload missile per TEL.
4-122
FM 100-2-3
NOTES: 1. This chart depicts the key subunits of an SA-4 brigade; thus, not all of the
brigade's subunits are shown.
2. The SA-11 is replacing the SA-4 in army-level SAM brigades, but under a dif-
ferent organization. The SA-12a/GLADIATOR and the SA-12b/GIANT are replac-
ing the SA-4 in nondivisional SAM units, but under an organization different
from that of the SA-4 or the SA-11.
4-123
FM 100-2-3
- U-
OBSTACLE PONTON
CLEARING BRIDGE
BATTALION BATTALION
4-124
FM 100-2-3
4-125
FM 100-2-3
RADIOTECHNICA1
RECONNAISSANCE
BATTALION
NOTE: This battalion is also known as a radio and radar intercept and direction-finding
battalion.
4-126
FM 100-2-3
FOOTNOTE *A tank transport/heavy lift battalion, equipped with MAZ-537 heavy tank trans-
porters, may be attached to the brigade when the mission dictates.
4-127
FM 100-2-3
INDEPENDENT
AIR ASSAULT
BATTALION
500
page 4-141
page 4-142
p
AUTOMATIC
AIR DEFENSE RECONNAISSANCE SIGNAL
PLATOON GRENADE LAUNCHER
PLATOON PLATOON
PLATOON
MEDICAL
PLATOON
NOTES. 1. This represents a provisional assessment of the strength, organization, and equip-
ment of the independent air assault battalion, based on fragmentary information
from several sources.
2. An army may have more than one of these battalions.
3. The battalion has no organic lift capability.
4-128
FM 100-2-3
SPETSNAZ
COMPANY/
BATTALION
97-232
_, _ " / ,
3-5 Teams
(see below)
NOTES. 1. The structure of army-level SPETSNAZ units is not fixed. Some armies may have
a SPETSNAZ battalion, while others may have only a company. The chart above
represents a provisional assessment of army-level SPETSNAZ strength and organi-
zation, based on fragmentary information from several sources.
2. The total number of teams which an army-level SPETSNAZ organization can deploy
varies from 10 to 15.
Personnel Equipment
Team Leader (Officer) .............................. AKS-74 or AKSU-74, PM
Assistant Team Leader
SPETSNAZ (Warrant Officer or Sergeant) ..................... AKS-74 or AKSU-74,
TEAM 1-2 x Radio Operator ...................... R-350M, AKS-74 or AKSU-74,
1 4-11 1-2 x W eapons Specialist ........................ ............ RPG-16D,
1-2 x Demolition Specialist ......................... AKS-74 or AKSU-74,
0-4 x Reconnaissance Specialist ..................... AKS-74 or AKSU-74,
NOTES. 1. Team composition is not fixed. The organization above shows the variations which
may exist within what may be a typical SPETSNAZ team.
2. in keeping with its behind-the-lines missions, the SPETSNAZ team is lightly
equipped. Each soldier normally has an assault rifle, a silenced pistol, a knife,
and up to eight hand grenades of various types. In addition, the team's equipment
normally includes an R-350M burst-transmission radio, an SVD sniper rifle, an
RPG-16D antitank grenade launcher, directional mines, and explosives. The team
can also receive SA-7/14/16 shoulder-fired SAMs or man-portable ATGMs.
4-129
FM 100-2-3
FRONT
Front
The front is the highest Soviet operational com- of a front in wartime, currently has three TAs and
mand in wartime. It is both an administrative and only two CAAs.
an operational entity, incorporating the air and In addition to these ground armies, a typical
ground forces required for operations in a given front may have air forces of the front, one or two
area. No fronts exist in peacetime, although the artillery divisions, SSM brigades, a SAM brigade,
basic elements of a wartime front (that is, the an air assault brigade, and a SPETSNAZ brigade.
combat and CS units and the rudimentary frame- If required, the front may receive support from
work of the CSS units) are present in the peacetime airborne and amphibious forces. The TVD may
structures of the military districts in the USSR receive additional assets from the Reserve of the
and Soviet groups of forces in Eastern Europe. In Supreme High Command (RVGK), which it, in
wartime, Soviet force developers will activate fronts. turn, may allocate to the front. The front may also
They will organize each front for a specific stra- receive support from assets of the Strategic Rocket
tegic operation within a TVD, based on their Forces (SRF), strategic aviation, naval forces, rail-
analysis of the objectives, enemy, and terrain. Thus, road troops, and Ministry of Internal Affairs (MVD)
there is no fixed front organization. Historically, and KGB units.
fronts have varied greatly in size, consisting of
Due to the wide variety in types and numbers
as few as two and as many as nine armies. Today,
of units which may make up a given front, con-
however, a typical front may have three to five
struction of a sample front structure is impossible.
Soviet/non-Soviet CAAs or TAs.
Instead, the following charts depict all of the dif-
ferent units that could be allocated to any given
Most fronts which could be formed throughout front, depending on its mission within the context
the Soviet Army would have three to four CAAs of the overall strategic operation. Not all fronts
and perhaps one TA. This may not be the case would have all these units present. Many of the
in the Western TVD, where there is a greater units may be modified to suit the particular needs
percentage of TDs versus MRDs and, consequently, of the front. More than one of some types of units
a greater percentage of TAs versus CAAs. For will probably be present; for example, SSM brigades
example, the WGF, which could form the nucleus or ponton bridge regiments.
4-130
FM 100-2-3
Front
FRONT
iaFRO T I COMBIl II
AIR FORCES
OF THE FRONT
i!
page 4-133
p-
I I
ARMORED VEHICLE MATERIEL I HEAVY LIFT I
MAINTENANCE
T REPAIR SUPPORT I REGIMENT* I
REGIMEN
BATTALION BRIGADE I I
I I
L.---------J
page 4-127
p
AIR DEFENSE
MISSILE MISSILE MOBILE ROCKET
ROCKET
TRANSPORT FUEL TECHNICAL BASE
TECHNICAL BASE
BATTALION BATTALION (PRTB)
(ZRTB)
(continued)
4-131
FM 100-2-3
Front (continued)
page 4 137
_______________________________m
MOBILE ANALYTICAL NUCLEAR BURST MEDICAL
SMOKE
PLOTTING STATION** DIRECTION FINDING DETACHMENT
BATTALION
(RAST) (NBDF) BATTALION (OMO)
-- U
INDEPENDENT AIR
SIGNAL RVGKSIGNAL
BRIGADE RADIO RELAY SIGNALS
BRIGADE*
BATTALION COMPANY
page 4 137
F~TECHNICAF1 U
page 4-138
U
IU
PIPELINE REAR
BRIGADE SERVICES
4-132
FM 100-2-3
page 4-134
NOTES. 1. The Air Forces of the Front have no fixed organization and may tailor their struc-
ture to meet specific needs. A typical Air Forces of the Front would include two
or three divisions of fighters and fighter-bombers and one or more independent
regiments of reconnasissance aircraft, in addition to helicopter units of the types
shown above.
2. The Air Forces of the WGF, which comprise the largest concentration of air forces
in peacetime, include more than 700 combat aircraft, over 350 attack helicopters,
and about 300 other aircraft and helicopters. These assets are organized into
five air divisions (one fighter division, two fighter/fighter-bomber divisions, and
two fighter-bomber divisions) and at least ten independent regiments (three air
reconnaissance regiments, two transport helicopter regiments, and five attack
helicopter regiments). While the five attack helicopter regiments belong organi-
zationally to the Air Forces of the WGF, they are under the operational control
of the five CAAs and TAs of the WGF.
FOOTNOTES. *Fighter and fighter-bomber divisions have the same basic structure, as
shown on p. 4-134.
"A fighter/fighter-bomber division has a mix of the aircraft types shown for
the fighter division and the fighter-bomber division.
*'"Thegeneral-purpose helicopter squadron normally has 20 to 30 helicopters.
4-133
FM 100-2-3
NOTE. Each fighter or fighter-bomber regiment has 45 aircraft (in three squadrons of 15
aircraft each). This total includes up to 5 trainer aircraft per regiment that can serve
as combat aircraft.
I HEAVY-LIFT
SQUADRON II MEDIUM-LIFT
SQUADRON MAINTENANCE 1 FLIGHT SERVICES
4-134
FM 100-2-3
NOTE: In some artillery divisions, howitzer, gun-howitzer, and gun brigades consist of four
18-tube battalions, while in other artillery divisions, these brigades consist of three
24-tube battalions.
FOOTNOTES. *Some gun brigades (for example, one in WGF) may have the 203-mm SP
gun 2S7. In some artillery divisions, gun brigades may still have the older
130-mm field gun M-46.
"*Most artillery divisions have a mixture of 122-mm howitzer and 152-mm
gun-howitzer brigades; others (for example, in WGF) employ only 152-mm
howitzers or gun-howitzers.
*The rocket launcher brigade normally consists of four battalions, each with
18 BM-22 rocket launchers. Some brigades may still have the 122-mm
rocket launcher (40-round) BM-21, which the BM-22 is replacing in the
forward area.
""Equipment totals given are for an antitank brigade with four antitank bat-
talions of the type shown on p. 4-72, although some artillery divisions, such
as those in WGF, may have no antitank unit.
4-135
FM 100-2-3
NOTE. A high-powered artillery brigade from the Reserve of the Supreme High Command
(RVGK) will probably be allocated to a front. This nuclear-capable brigade is not part
of the front's artillery division.
4-136
FM 100-2-3
SIGNAL
BRIGADE
MESSENGER UNIT
4-137
FM 100-2-3
RADIOTECHNICAL
RECONNAISSANCE
REGIMENT
NOTE. This regiment is also known as a radio and radar intercept and direction-finding regi-
ment.
MATERIEL
SUPPORT
BRIGADE
4-138
FM 100-2-3
BRIGADE ASSAULT
PARACHUTE RECONNAISSANCE
HEADQUARTERS BATTALION
BATTALION COMPANY
(BMD)
page 4-143
U
SUPPLY
COMPANY
NOTES. 1.This represents a provisional assessment of the strength, organization, and equip-
ment of the air assault brigade, based on fragmentary information from several
sources.
2. Air transport support units required for deployment may be allocated to the brigade
from Military Transport Aviation (VTA) assets. Either transport aircraft or heavy-lift
helicopters could air-land the BMD-equipped battalions or insert the parachute bat-
talions by parachute. Helicopters could also air-land the parachute battalions.
FOOTNOTE. *Some air assault brigades may have a different mix, consisting of one BMD-
equipped assault battalion and three parachute battalions.
4-139
FM 100-2-3
page 4-142
I TRANSPORT I
SUPPLY AND I HELICOPTER I
MAINTENANCE I REGIMENT I
COMPANY I I
I (AF OFTHEFRONT) I
L ...I,,,~
NOTES. 1. This represents a provisional assessment of the strength, organization, and equip-
ment of the airmobile assault brigade, based on fragmentary information from
several sources.
2. The helicopter is the primary mode of transportation for the airmobile assault
brigade. Helicopters organic to the Air Forces of the Front may come under the
operational control of the brigade headquarters. However, Military Transport
Aviation (VTA) assets may also lift the brigade.
FOOTNOTE. *The parachute battalions in the airmobile assault brigade are sometimes called
airmobile assault battalions.
4-140
FM 100-2-3
ASSAUL
BATTALIK
(BMD)
BATTALION
ASSAULT MORTAR AIR DEFENSE
HEADQUARTERS COMPANY BATTERY PLATOON
(BMD)
AUTOMATIC
GRENADE LAUNCHER
PLATOON
6 x30-mm Automatic
Grenade Launcher,
AGS-17
3 x APC,BMD M1979/ 1
4-141
FM 100-2-3
PARACHUTE
AUTOMATIC
FANANK GRENADE LAUNCHER
PLATOON
PLATOON
NOTE. In the airmobile assault brigade, the parachute battalion may be called an airmobile
assault battalion.
4-142
FM 100-2-3
page 4-129
NOTES. 1. Brigade structure is not fixed. This chart represents a provisional assessment of
what may be a typical SPETSNAZ brigade's strength and organization, based on
fragmentary information from several sources.
2. A brigade may deploy about 80 to 100 SPETSNAZ teams.
4-143
FM 100-2-3
Airborne Forces
Soviet airborne forces are directly subordinate would be allocated to TVDs and possibly, in turn,
to the VGK or the wartime Stavka VGK, with to fronts or armies for specific missions. Other
operational control exercised by the Chief of the airborne units would remain under VGK control.
General Staff. In wartime, some airborne units
Company Commander .. PM
Deputy Commander/
Political Officer ..... PM
Senior Technician ..... PM
First Sergeant ..... AKS-74
BMD Gunner .........
BMD Driver/
PM
1 1 0
Mechanic .......... PM Platoon Leader ....... PM
Assistant Platoon (See above)
Leader ......... AKS-74
NOTE. The company commander's RTO comes from the battalion signal platoon and is not
part of the BMD company personnel total.
4-144
FM 100-2-3
AIRBORNE
BATTALION
(BMD)
316
BATLION AIRBONE~
COMPANY
~HEADQUARTERSj
L 14i BMD)II 1-2-
PLATOON
6 x30-mm Automatic
Grenade Launcher,
AGS-17
3 xAPC, BMD 1979/1 STATION
4-145
FM 100-2-3
The airborne regiment has a nucleus of three grenade launcher platoons within battalions use
airborne battalions and three fire support subunits. the BMD M1979/1. The BMD-1 KSh serves as a
These fire support subunits include one mortar command vehicle at battalion and regimental
battery, one ATGM battery, and one AA battery. headquarters.
There are other elements that support the combat
elements. By adding the BMD to such an extent, the
Soviets have upgraded troop protection, mobility,
Each regiment now has over 100 BMDs in three and firepower while retaining air-droppability.
different configurations. The basic BMD-1 is the Only a few items within airborne regiments are
standard squad vehicle. Air defense and automatic not air-droppable (for example, several trucks).
page 4-145
I I I I i
ANTIAIRCRAFT BATTERY ENGINEER COMPANY SIGNAL COMPANY PARACHUTE RIGGING
AND RESUPPLY
45 60 50 COMPANY
85
I I * I I
TRANSPORT AND CHEMICALMEDICAL PLATOON SUPPLY AND
MAINTENANCE COMPANY PROTECTION MEDICAL PLATOON
PLATOON 15 25
65 15 15 25
4-146
(continued)
HF, Vehicle-Mount, Medium-Power, R-130
HF/VHF, Vehicle-Mount, Medium-Power
HF/VHF, Vehicle-Mount, High-Power
AIRBORNE DIVISION
Airborne Division
The Soviet airborne division is now almost fully (ASU-85) battalion, and an antiaircraft battalion
equipped with motorized equipment. This signifi- provide essential CS. The introduction of the 2S9
cantly increases its combat power and mobility SP howitzer as a replacement for towed artillery
while retaining an airdrop capability for most of will increase mobility. Also, the airborne division
its equipment. The airborne division now has the has other CS and CSS units that provide limited
BMD AAICV in all three of its airborne (infantry) backup for combat operations.
regiments. An artillery regiment, an assault gun
4-149
!.
AIRBORNE DIVISION p
Pv
VA
4 '04
p AP,
y~y
4A y v /
PERSONNEL 160 4,419 620 180 155 220 180 220 165 95 75 65 6,554
WEAPONS
122-mm Howitzer, D-30 30 30
122-mm Rocket Launcher, BM-21V 66
120-mm Mortar, M1943/M-120 18 -18..
(continued)
(continued)
AIRBORNE DIVISION
2'! r't 4 °Dv0 0 rJyOd ° V Z< V
4/ V V v V yt t < GJ
Ww 1 b~Q
!IC t <'cgj4 y I
Dozer, BAT/BAT-M 2 2
Grader 2 2
TRAILERS
Trailer. Cargo, 1-Axle 4 51 23 3 3 84
Trailer, Generator, 1-Axle 2 3 2 7
Trailer, Water 1 27 4 1 1 2 1 37
Trailer, Field Kitchen 2 57 10 3 3 1 2 78
RADARS
Counter-Battery/Counter-Mortar 2 2
Battlefield Surveillance, Man-Portable 2 2
SIGINT EQUIPMENT
Radio DF, HF/VHF/UHF 3 3
Intercept Receiver, VHF/UHF 6 3 9
RADIOS
HF, Vehicle-Mount, Medium-Power,
R-130 10 30 1 4 1 46
HF, Vehicle-Mount, High-Power 1 1
HF/VHF. Vehicle-Mount,
Medium-Power 12 5 1 1 19
HF/VHF, Vehicle-Mount, High-Power 3 1 1 5
VHF, Portable, Low-Power, R-148 108 5 113
VHF, Manpack, Low-Power, R-107 3 132 45 2 10 8 1 2 2 2 2 209
VHF, Vehicle-Mount, Medium-Power,
R-123 366 31 9 406
Ground-to-Air Radio Set 2 27 4 33
Warning Receiver, R-311 1 15 3 1 1 1 1 1 24
Radio Relay, VHF/UHF,
R-401/405/409 1 1 2
FM 100-2-3
The airborne division's artillery regiment with twelve D-30s and six 122-mm rocket launchers
consists primarily of two firing battalions. The (BM-21V). The artillery regiment also has limited
first is a 122-mm towed howitzer (D-30) battalion organic support elements.
with 18 tubes. The other is a composite battalion
4-153
FM 100-2-3
The assault gun battalion has 31 85-mm SP companies with 10 ASU-85s each; there is 1 ASU-85
assault guns (ASU-85s). The battalion has three at battalion headquarters.
Amphibious Forces
The Soviet Naval Infantry (SNI) is a branch similar to that of an MRB in the ground forces.
of the Soviet Navy. The SNI units are opera- These SNI battalions, along with a TB and other
tionally subordinate to fleet commanders. They units, form either regiments or brigades. While
may conduct landings in support of a front or brigades operate separately, regiments are part of
TVD as part of the combined arms operations. a naval infantry division.
The organization of a naval infantry battalion is
4-154
FM 100-2-3
1 xBTR-60/80
Equipment Total
APC, BTR-60/80.......................... 10
SAM, SA-7/GRAIL .......................... 3
ATGL, RPG-7.............................. 9
7.62-mm Sniper Rifle, SVD...................3
5.45-mm LMG, RPK-74 ...................... 9
5.45-mm Assault Rifle, AK-74 ................ 68
1 x BTR-60/80 3 xBTR-60/80
3 x SA-7/GRAIL 3 xRPG-7V
5 x AK-74 1 xSVD
3 xRPK-74
21 xAK-74
4-155
FM 100-2-3
4 xZSU-23.4 3 x BRDM-2rkh
4 xSA-9/GASKIN 3 x ARS-12U
or SA-13/GOPHER
4-156
FM 100-2-3
4-157
FM 100-2-3
NAVAL
INFANTRY
DIVISION
8,000+
NAVAL
DIVISION INFANTRY TANK SP HOWITZER
HEADQUARTERS REGIMENT REGIMENT REGIMENT
2,000+
page 4-156
20 x SA-8
4-158
CHAPTER 5
Equipment
CONTENTS
This chapter provides descriptions and perfor- general categories. Most categories contain sub-
mance characteristics of the principal items of sections dealing with specific types of equipment.
equipment listed in the organization charts of Subsections begin with tables of characteristics,
Chapter 4. The chapter divides current Soviet followed in most cases by descriptions and illustra-
weapons, vehicles, and other equipment into tions of individual items of equipment.
FM 100-2-3
SMALL ARMS
Pistols, Rifles, and Submachine Guns
Pistol, rifle, and submachine gun characteristics
AMMUNITION (type) 9 x 18-mm 7.62 x 39-mm 5.45 x 39-mm 5.45 x 39.5-mm 7.62 x 54-mm
M1943 rimless rimmed
PERFORMANCE
Muzzle velocity (m/sec) 315 710 900 850 830
Range
Maximum (m) INA 2,500 3,150 1,500 3,800 (est)
Effective (m) 50 200/300*** 500 250-300 800/1.300**
9-mm Pistol PM
PM
RED DOT
HAMMER
SAFETY
SLIDE STOP
MAGAZINE CATCH
J
DESCRIPTION: LIMITA TIONS:
The PM is a semiautomatic, blowback-operated, The use of a low-powered round limits the range
magazine-fed weapon fitted with a double-action of the PM, as it does with other pistols. There is
trigger mechanism. It fires a 9 x 18-mm cartridge no option for automatic fire.
and uses an 8-round magazine. The Soviets issue
REMARKS:
it with a leather holster, an extra magazine, and
a cleaning rod. Following World War II, the Soviets introduced
two new blowback-operated 9-mm weapons to
CAPABILITIES: replace the 7.62-mm Tokarev pistol (TT-33). The
larger weapon, the 9-mm machine pistol Stechkin
The effective range of the PM is 50 meters. Its (APS), appeared only in small numbers. The 9-mm
muzzle velocity is 315 meters per second. Its pistol Makarov (PM), however, has become the
practical rate of fire is 30 rounds per minute. Soviet's most widely issued pistol.
FM 100-2-3
AKM
'l'he original AK was also known as AK-47. It full cyclic rate, they can fire about 600 rounds per
was a gas-operated, selective-fire weapon. Like all minute (up to 64() rounds per minute for the AKM),
7.(i2-mm Kalashnikov assault rifles, it fired the with a practical rate of 100 rounds per minute
Soviet 7.62 X 39-mm M1943 round and used a fully automatic or -0 rounds per minute semi-
standard 30-round curved b)ox magazine. The AK automatic. Both the AK and AKM can mount a
came in two versions: one with a fixed wooden grenade launcher. Both can have passive image
stock, and another, the AKS, with a folding metal intensifier night sights. Both can function normally
stock issued primarily to parachutists and armor after total immersion in mud and water. The fully
troops. Except for the differences in the stock and chromed barrel ensures effective operation even at
the lack of a tool kit with the AKS, the two very low temperatures. The muzzle of either
versions were identical. The early AKs had no weapon fits into the swiveling firing ports of the
bayonet, but the version with the fixed wooden BMP. Thus, the infantryman can fire the weapon
stock later mounted a detachable knife bayonet. while the vehicle is moving.
AK-74
M1
DESCRIPTION:
The AK-74 is basically an AKM rechambered The muzzle brake on the AK-74 uses a fluidic
and rebored to fire a 5.45-mm cartridge. Externally, device to minimnize recoil and muzzle climb.
it has the same general appearance as the AKM, Although the AK-74 is somewhat heavier than the
with two notable differences. It has a distinctive, AKM when empty, its loaded weight is slightly
two-port muzzle brake, giving it a slightly greater less than that of the AKM; this is due primarily
overall length than the AKM. It also has a smooth to the plastic magazine and its smaller-caliber
plastic magazine which is slightly shorter and is ammunition. like the AK and AKM, the AK-74
curved to a lesser extent than the grooved metal can mount a grenade launcher and a
passive
AKM magazine. It uses the same type of bayonet image intensifier night sight.
as the AK-series weapons.
LIMI'IA TIONS:
There is also a folding-stock version, designated
AKS-74, which has a Y-shaped, tubular stock. The The gas cylinder, like the cylinders on the AK
stock has an extremely narrow buttplate, as and AKM, is in a vulnerable position; if dented.
opposed to the T-shaped, stamped-metal b~uttstock it max' cause weapon malfunction. The reddish-
of the AKMS. brown or orange color of the plastic magazine does
CAPABILITIES: not lend itself to camouflage
AA _y
hP x
DEKSC RIPTION:
The A KSU-7 4 is a modified version of the to bleed off gases which would otherwise cause a
A K-74 assault rifle with a much shorter barrel violent recoil. With a loaded weight of 3.106 kilo-
(207 millimeters versus 413 millimeters) and a grams, the submachine gun is considerably lighter
conical flash suppressor instead of a muzzle brake. than the assault rifle AK-74 and has a somewhat
Like the AKS-74, it has a trding metal stock. The higher rate of fire.
overall length of the submachine gun is only 492
millimeters with stock folded or 72 millimeters
LLMIITATIONS:
with extended stock. The rear sight is a flip-type The AKS-74 has a greatly reduced range due
U-notch. The front sight is a cylindrical post. to its shortened barrel. However, it still has more
power and longer range than conventional sub-
CAPABILITIES: machine guns that fire pistol cartridges.
The Soviets designed the AKSU-74 as a weapon REM ARK S:
short enough to be handled easily when the crew
enters and exits vehicles. The device at the end The AKSU-74 was first seen with Soviet air-
of the barrel functions as an expansion chamber borne troops in early 19:4.
FM 100-2-3
SVD
r -*--*--%---
qwf
DESCRIPTION:
The Sniper Rifle Dragunov (SVI)) is a gas- an illuminated rangefinder reticle. Thus, the SVI)
operated, semiautomatic weapon. It fires the Soviet is effective in daylight against point targets or at
7.62 x 54R cartridge and uses a detachable 10-round night against active infrared emitters, such as
box magazine. Its overall length is 1,225 milli- night driving aids and weapon sights. It can fire
meters, and its empty weight is 4.3 kilograms. (Its light ball, heavy ball, steel core, tracer, and anti-
loaded weight with bayonet is 4.78 kilograms.) Its tank incendiary ammunition.
bolt mechanism and gas recovery system are
similar to those of the AK and AKM; but, because LIMITA TIONS:
of the difference in cartridges used, parts are not
interchangeable with the assault rifles. The most The SVI) can fire only light and heavy ball-type
distinguishing features of the SVD are the open ammunition with accuracy. Even though it is
buttstock, which has a cheek pad for ease in equipped with a bayonet, the SVI) is not an ideal
sighting, and the telescopic sight mounted over weapon for close combat because it can fire only
the receiver. It has a combination flash suppressor/ in the semiautomatic mode. Its weight and length
compensator. It may mount the standard AKM also limit its maneuverability. The 7.62 x 54-mm
bayonet. The Soviets issue it with four magazines, rimmed cartridge of the SVI) is not interchangeable
a cleaning kit, and an extra battery and lamp for with the 7.62 x 39-mm rimless round of the AKM.
the telescopic sight.
REMARKS:
CAPABILITIES:
The Soviets developed the SVI) in 1965. It
The SVD fires approximately 30 rounds per entered service in 1967 and is the standard Soviet
minute in the semiautomatic mode. It has a sniper weapon. One squad in each motorized rifle
maximum effective range of 1,300 meters with the platoon has an SVI); selected riflemen receive
4-power telescope or 800 meters without it. The regular, centralized sniper training on it. Largely
PSO-I optical sight has a 6-degree field of view. due to its open buttstock, the SVD is lighter than
It contains an integral, infrared detection aid and older sniper rifles.
FM 100-2-3
Grenade Launchers
CALIBER (mm) 30 40
PERFORMANCE
Muzzle velocity approximately approximately
(m/sec) 190 71
Range
Maximum (m) 1,730 400
Effective (m) 700/1,200* INA
CREW 3 NA
5-8
FM 100-2-3
A GS-1 7
DESCRIPTION:
The AGS-17 crew consists of a gunner and two wooded areas. The gunner can engage targets by
riflemen-assistant gunners. For training, there may high-angle indirect fire at ranges from 1,000 to
be only one assistant. When they dismount, the 1,730 meters; he can also use direct fire or high-
gunner carries the sight and launcher, the first angle direct fire at ranges from 50 to 1,730 meters.
assistant carries the tripod and a magazine, and The sight reticle can serve as a direct-fire sight
the second assistant carries two additional-maga- for point targets at ranges of up to 700 meters.
zines. Dismounted AGS-17s can provide effective The range table allows the gunner to adjust his
fire support for Soviet infantry operating in areas fire rapidly for various ranges without computing
where BTRs, BMPs, and tanks cannot go or where elevations for the sight.
minimum safety distances preclude artillery or air
support. LIMITATIONS:
The Soviets designed the AGS-17 to provide To effectively employ the AGS-17, the gunner
their infantry with an area-type suppressive-fire must make accurate determinations of distances
capability. They intend to use it primarily against to all targets. Low muzzle velocity makes grenades
personnel targets. It probably has some capability susceptible to crosswinds, especially when the
to engage soft-skinned and lightly armored weapon fires at high angles. The grenade fuze is
vehicles. It is very accurate in the semiautomatic armed shortly after leaving the bore. Fuze sensi-
mode; it is also quite effective in area coverage tivity probably preempts firing under conditions
in the automatic mode. The 50-m increments in of heavy rainfall, high ground cover (grass or
the range table atop the receiver give some indi- brush) within 50 meters of the muzzle, or low-
cation of the accuracy against point targets. The hanging tree limbs.
gunner can select a "maximum" cyclic rate of fire
of 400 rounds per minute or a "minimum" cyclic REMARKS:
rate of 100 rounds per minute.
Introduction of AGS-17 into Soviet units began
One of the most important characteristics of the in 1974. The acronym, AGS, stands for avtoma-
AGS-17 is its ability to provide indirect fire from ticheskiy granatomet stankovyy (automatic grenade
protected positions against enemy troops in launcher on mount). The Soviet nickname for the
trenches, on reverse slopes of hills, or behind weapon is Plamya (flame).
5-10
FM 100-2-3
BG -15
I - ::;-i--u*~
f
ji
"
,11
q
4 g
_ac-
5-11
FM 100-2-3
Machine Guns
Machine gun characteristics
SQUAD MACHINE GUNS VEHICLE-MOUNTED MACHINE GUNS
CHARACTERISTICS RPK/RPKS RPK-74 PK SERIES*** DShK KPVT NSV
LENGTH, overall (m) 1.035/0.82 1.07 1.16/1.08*** 1.56 (gun 2.00 1.58
only)
WEIGHT, loaded (kg) 5.67* 5.00 varies with 157.5 varies with INA
magazine (with mount) mount
FEED (1) 40-rd detachable (1) 40-rd detachable joinable nondisin- varies (10-rd belts
box magazine box magazine 25-rd non- tegrating metallic belt in 60-rd
(2) 75-rd spring- (2) 30-rd disinte- metallic sections in boxes
loaded drum magazine AK-74 magazine grating belt (50-rd 50-rd boxes
(3) 30-rd AKM when necessary belts: 100/ sections in can be used)
magazine 200/250 box magazine)
5-12
FM 100-2-3
RPK
,s~-
DESCRIPTION:
The RPK is a variant of the AKM assault rifle. machine gunner normally attaches the 75-round
It has a longer, heavier barrel (591 millimeters drum magazine beneath the weapon at the begin-
versus 414 millimeters); a stamped metal bipod; ning of an attack. He subsequently replaces it with
and a heavier type of fixed, wooden buttstock. The a 4()- or 30-round magazine during the assault or
modified receiver of the RPK can accommodate its in the early stages of defense. Almost all of the
larger-diameter barrel. The Rt'K normally feeds moving parts of the RPK are interchangeable with
ammunition from either a 40-round curved box those of the AK or AKM assault rifles.
magazine or a 75-round spring-loaded drum maga-
zine. However, it can also use the 30-round curved LIMI TA TIONS:
box magazine of the AKM, if necessary. It has a Because the RPK fires from a closed bolt, it
chrome-plated barrel, chamber, and gas piston. It
tends to "cook off" its cartridges after prolonged
also lias a cyclic rate reducer built into the trigger firing. Since the barrel cannot be changed, the
mechanism. The Soviets usually install luminous
sustained rate of fire must not exceed about 80
night sights on the front and rear sights. Some
rounds per minute. The lack of a gas regulator
RPKs can mount an infrared night-sighting device.
causes rough action and vigorous ejection to the
The Soviets issue a folding-stock version, the right rear when the gun is clean. It also causes
RPKS, to airborne troops. With stock folded, it is the rate of fire to slow down gradually as residue
only 820 millimeters long (versus the RPK, which and dirt accumulate in the gas port.
is 1,035 millimeters long).
REMA RKS:
CAPABILITIES:
The Soviets first produced the RtPK in 1961. It
The RPK has a naximum effective range of entered service around 1964. It was first displayed
800 meters in either automatic or semiautomatic in the 1966 May l)ay parade in Red Square. It
mode. It also has a practical rate of fire of 150 has become the standard squad automatic weapon
rounds per minute automatic or 50 rounds per in most Warsaw Pact armies. However, the 5.45-mm
minute semiautomatic. In offensive operations, the RPK-74 is now replacing it in Soviet units.
5-13
FM 100-2-3
RPK-74
I
I)ELx( U IJPTIX:
Joust as the h I~k is the sq uad machine gun riound of' the RIPK. [Howvever. 1both weapoinsl proba-
version of the AKINI, the R 1K-7.I is at machine gun bly have the same maximum ra<nge (2,500)( meters)
version of the AK-7.1, firing the Same ammunition. andc effect ive range 800 nieters). U nlike the RP~K,
1he RlPf\S-7 is ai fiding-stock version of the the RP1 K-74 is compatible with the front firing
w~eapon. Instead of the pronminen t muzzle hrake ports ofi the BM [)*
used ioi the .1K-7-1 the inach in e gun has a shoirt
flash su ppressior IThe in agazitne is ion ger than that
REMJARKs:
norlidl V used with the AK-7-1, hut the magazines
are in tericliangeabhie. Thie N 1~K 7 1 has at bipod. 'Since its intro~duictio~n in the late 1940s, the
('AIABILITIF.S: IlPK-74I has beciime the standard squad machine
gtin in 'Soviet
motorized rifle units. It is replacing
'[he 5I.45-mi ronuin o1if the N IK-74 has at con- hot h the HPKh and PKKM 7.62-mnm weapons. Air-
siiierahlv higher mnuzzle velocityv than the 7.62-mm hiorne squtids also employv the R1PKS-74.
5-14
FM 100-2-3
PKM
d i-'ai -?~
a,~:"
8-
IESCRIPTION:
The 7.62-mm general-purpose machine gun lbelt. The bielt feeds from a box placed to the right
Pu/cm yot Klashnihkou WK) is a gas-operated, of the weapon.
belt-fed, sustained-fire weapon. The. Soviets based
its design on the Kalashnikov assault rifle. No- The l K'F is the tank-mounted version of the
I' K. ILate-model Soviet tan ks, turreted A('s and
table differences from the assault rifle are the gas
cylinder beloW the barrel and the ho]low-frame ICVs, and amphibious scout (cars mount it as a
coaxial machine gun. It has a longer and heavier
stock resembling that of the SVI) sniper rifle. The
barrel than the 'K. It also lacks the I'K's stock,
PKM fires 7.62 x 534R rimmed cartridges using a
metal nondisintegrating belt. sights, bipod, and trigger mechanism. The 'K'
has a solenoid at the rear for remote-controlled
firing, although it also has an emergency man ual
The basic P K model is bipod-mountedd. It is led
trigger.
by a 100-round belt carried in a box fastened to
the right side of the receiver. It weighs 9 kilo The P KH is a vari ant of the IK'I'. It is in-
grams and is 1,161 millimeters long. It is con- tended for use as a pi ntle-mounted gun on A'( 's
structed partly of stamped metal and partly of' and SP) guns. It differs from the lPKT by having
forged steel. a butterfly trigger rather than a solenoid trigger
and by having double space grips andl front and
The I'KS is a l'K mounted on a lightweight rear sights. 'T'here may also be a PKM1, (derived
(4.75-kg)tripod. It uses either a 200- or 250-round from the PKM rather than from the 'K.
5-15
FM 100-2-3
The PKM is an improved, lighter version (8.4 machine gun has an effective range of 600 meters
kilograms) of the PK, using stamped metal com- against slow-moving aircraft.
ponents instead of machined metal. Joinable
25-round sections of nondisintegrating metallic The PKT serves as a coaxial machine gun on
belts feed the bipod-mounted PKM. An assault most modern Soviet tanks, ICVs, and APCs. The
magazine attached to the rails under the receiver PKB (PKBM) serves as a pintle-mounted gun on
can carry 100 cartridges belted in this way. Either older armored vehicles such as the BRDM,
200- or 250-round belt boxes can also feed the PKM. BTR-50, and BTR-60.
5-16
FM 100-2-3
DShK 38/46
1!
.w
W"_:i~~;"~
a~~i i n-
DESCRIPTION:
The )ShK is one of the standard heavy ma- medium tanks and armored personnel carriers. It
chine guns of the Soviet Army. It is a gas- is capable of full automatic fire only.
operated, belt-fed, air-cooled weapon which fires
REVMARKS:
from the open-bolt position. The model 38/46 has
a shuttle feed housed in a flat, rectangular cover. The Soviets adopted the original l)ShK (model
It has reversible feed; that is, the ammunition belt :38 or M1 98) in 19;18 as a ground-mounted, dual-
can feed from either the left or the right side with purpose antiaircraft and antitank gun. Largely
minor adjustment. It also has a quick-change superseded by the 14.5-mm ZUl-series weapons in
barrel. the antiaircraft role, the ground-mounted version
has become obsolete. In 1946, the Soviets adopted
the improved version (model 8/46 or M1938/46,
also known as I)ShKM) with a modified feed
CAPABILITIES:
mechanism and a quick-change barrel. It is still
The Soviets use the )ShK extensively as an in use as a vehicle-mounted armament. When used
antipersonnel and antiaircraft armament on as a tank machine gun, it is known as the I)ShK'I.
5-17
FM 100-2-3
'SVT on T-64H1
I~
'-"":; o
1
ill_~liiI
1
% i
DELSC RIPTION:
The NS V is ai gas-operated, belt-fed, air-cooled by means of an electrical solenoid when the tank
automatic weapon with a horizontal sliding wedge is butt oned up. An optic serves this purpose.
breechblock and a quick-change barrel. It has a Insteadl of' the normal ;()-round Immunition belt
long, smooth, unfinned barrel with a conical flash container, the NSV on the 'I'-i1 may use a larger
suppressor. It features a rectangular stamped-and belt container, which prolably holds 200 rounIs.
riveted receiver. Ammunition loaded in nondisinte-
grating belts feeds into the weapon from a C'A PA IIIL ITIES:
50-round-capacity metal container.
0n a vehicular mount, the NSV can engage
A tripod-mounted version of' the NSV is avail-
Iboth aerial and grounnd targets. The weapon fires
alble for infantry use in a ground role. Hlowever,
frnn an open-bol t pioisiti on. It fires the same 12.7
the NSV appears more commonly mounted on the
x 108-mm cartridges as the older 1)Sh N model
turrets ofT--I, 'I'-'72. and '1'-St) tanks as an anti-
384.16. Although the NSV is approximately 11
aircraft m achine gun. On the T-72 and apparently
kilograms lighter than the I Sh1K, the ruggedness
also on the 'I'ti). it has a rotating nount; there is
of the gas regulator and cylinder suggest that
no provision for firing it from within the tank.
barrel vibrations would be dampened, resulting in
The tank commander employs the K 10-'T reflex
accuracy comparable to that of the l)ShIK. The
sight to engage aircraft. On the ''72 1' () mount,
firing mechanism (loes not provide for semi-
he engages ground targets with the metallic sights
automatic fire. The weapon has a ;1h() degree
(tangent leaf rear and folding front post) on the
traverse and an elevation capabilit- of -5 to +7i,
gun itself.
degrees. It has an estimiated barrel life of 5,))0
The 1T--4 tank mounts a modified version with rounds, and its barrel change ti me is approximately
a fixed mount on the commander's cupola. It fires seconds5.
5-18
FM 100-2-3
LIMIT TAIONS:
Although ammunition can feed from either side, the configuration of the tripod, the ground-mounted
the manufacturer determines lirection of feed; NSV has only a limited antiaircraft capability.
soldiers cannot easily change it in the field. Evi-
dence indicates that NSV mounts on the T-72 and RE MARKS:
T-80 permit only left-hand feed, and that the
NSV mount on the T-6.1 provides for right-hand The NSV was first ohserved in 97C6 but, was
feed only. The left-hand-operated trigger mecha- probably introduced in the early 1970s. The desig-
nism on the vehicular mounts is awkward, but nation incorporates the initials of its designers
training can overcome this awkwardness. )ue to (Nikitin, Sokolov, and Volkov).
NT SV on T-72
r.
m
1 --- - ~
5-19
FM 100-2-3
KP V
)ESCRIPTION:
The Soviets use the 14.5-mm heavy machine Metallic nondisintegrating link belts, coupled
gun Vladimiro (KPV) in both ground and antiair together in 10-round sections, can feed it either
craft roles. in its antiaircraft role, the KPV is the from the left or the right of the receiver. The
basic machine gun mounted on the ZLIJ series of quick-change barrel is removable with the barrel
antiaircraft gun mounts. It also serves as the jacket as a unit. The bore is chromium-plated to
main turret armament of the BRDM-2 amphibious increase barrel life. The weapon fires the Soviet
scout car and the BTR-60PB, BTR-70, and BTR-() 14.: x 114-mm cartridge.
ADCs. In this armored vehicle role, the weapon is
known as KIVT. The gun is simple in design and rugged in con-
struc'tion. It is considered to be reliable.
CAPABILITIES:
REMARKS:
The KPV is a recoil-operated, fully automatic
weapon which fires from the open-bolt position. The Soviets first produced the KI'V in 1958.
5-20
FM 100-2-3
VEHICLE
CHARACTERISTICS BRDM-2 BTR-60PB BTR-70 BTR-80
LENGTH
Gun forward (m) 5.70 7.22 7.535 7.535
Without gun (m) 5.70 7.22 7.535 7.535
ENGINE V-8 140-hp, 2x6-cyl, 90-hp, 2x8-cyl, 120-hp, V-8, 260-hp diesel
gasoline gasoline gasoline (turbocharged)
SPEED
Road (km/hr) 100 80 80 80-85
Water (km/hr) 10 10 10 10
GRADABILITY (0) 30 30 30 30
ARMOR (maximum)
Hull (mm) 14 9 10 25
Turret (mm) 7 7 7 7
INFRARED
Driver yes yes yes yes
Gunner no no no no
Commander yes yes yes yes
NBC PROTECTION filtration and over- filtration and over- filtration and over filtration and over-
pressure system pressure system pressure system pressure system
5-21
FM 100-2-3
MAIN ARMAMENT
CHARACTERISTICS BRDM-2 BTR-6OPB BTR-70 BTR-80
NUMBER 1 1 1
STABILIZATION no no no no
FIRE CONTROL telescopic sight telescopic sight telescopic sight telescopic sight
SECONDARY ARMAMENT
CHARACTERISTICS BRDM-2 BTR-6OPB BTR-70 BTR-80
NUMBER 1 1 1 1
TYPE coaxial machine gun coaxial machine gun coaxial machine gun coaxial machine gun
FOOTNOTES. *See characteristics of DShK 38/46, KPVT, and PKT on page 5-12
"Elevation is -5 to +60 on variants with high-angle-of-fire turret.
5-22
FM 100-2-3
BRDM-2
1. II
I""il
D":
;~~ it ~-
;.r a - p"a"
DESCRIPTION:
Like the earlier BRI)M, the BRI)M-2 is a fully The basic ]BRI)M-2 rcconnazissa nce' uchic/c
is
armored, four-wheel-drive, amphibious reconnais- distinguished by its turret, which is the same as
sance vehicle. It has two pairs of belly wheels and that mounted on the BTI -60iP1. The conical turret,
a centralized tire pressure regulation system for which mounts two machine guns (14.5-mm and
increased cross-country capability. It also has a 7.62-mm), is unusual in that it has no top hatch
single waterjet for propulsion through water. opening. 'This model carries a crew of four: the
Externally, it differs from the BRI)M lue to its commander, the gunner, theldriver. and the co-
larger, box-like hull. It retains the boat-like bow driver. It also has a land navigation system that
of the BRD)M. However, the crew compartment is gives coordinate readings.
now farther forward and the engine is in the rear.
In the basic model, a small conical turret is The BRI)M-2rkh radiological-cheicalrccon-
mounted on the hull in a central position above aaissance' ic/ihic/c, has dispensers for emplaci ng
the belly wheels. There are two front cupolas. Both warning flags around contaminated areas. Its
sides have centrally placed vision blocks. The primary armament is the 7.62-mm l'K' F instead of
engine is larger than the BRI)M's (it is a 140-hp the 1-.5-mm K lVT. The reginentaI chemical
V-8 instead of a 90-hp 6-cylinder). The BRI)M-2 defense platoon acnd the division-level chemical
has an JR spotlight and JR driving lights, as well defense company use it, as does the divisional
as an NBC filter system. reconnaissance battalion. Tl'he Soviet open press
has designated it the BRI)M-2rkhb; this stands for
CAPABILITIES:
radiological-chemical-biological reconnaissance.
Like the 1RI)M, the BRI)M-2 exists in several
versions. The first four of these have the same ''he BRL)M-2 ( command cchic/c has no turret;
roles as their 3R)M counterparts. however, it carries a generator andl extra radios.
5-23
FM 100-2-3
BI
~,
A'
- had+
5-24
FM 100-2-3
BTR-60P13
n zF
'U
r"
TO
~ i
~t~ h-~-~^
. I
,ri:
1115~, s
DESCRIPTION:
The BTR-60PB is an eight-wheel-drive vehicle 'he lT'R-6()0lJJ arnrel comnmand vehicle has
with evenly spaced wheels, except for a slightly no turret; however, it does have additional
larger space between the second and third wheels. comm unication eq uipment. It is easily recognizable
It has a long, boat-like hull with well-sloped armor by the bent, dipole antenna that runs nearly all
on the sides and overhead armor cover. Its small around the top of the vehicle. The BT R(it) P1. nor-
conical turret is identical to that of the RDI)M-2. mally does not have integral armament. There are
The turret sits over the second set of wheels and numerous other command variants, with and with-
mounts coaxial 145-mm and 7.62-mm machine out turrets. 'lhcy dlif'f'er accordin g to role and
guns. The BTR-60P13 has a three-man crew: the command level.
commander, the driver, and the gunner. There are
two semicircular hatches for the crew in front of CAPABILITIES:
the turret. The vehicle also has two rectangular
hatches behind the turret for mount and dismount The B'lR-6t)PB is the standard Al)(' in some
of up to eight passengers. There are three firing motorized rifle units. It is widely used by Soviet
ports in each side of the troop compartment. The naval infantry. It has begun to replace BID)M-2s
rear-mounted power plant employs two 6-cylinder, in some divisional reconnaissance battalions. 'he
90-hp engines. A single waterjet propels the vehicle performs well cross-country in conditions
vehicle through water. The tires are partially filled that favor wheels. In the water, the vehicle is
with a foam-rubber-like substance. They have the steered by a rudder in the waterjet port and by
centralized pressure regulation system common to the two front sets of wheels, which also have
Soviet wheeled APC's. power steering. The boat-shaped hull with sloped
5-25
FM 100-2-3
sides provides good swimming capability and BTR-60PB. The BTR-60PU command vehicle, with
helps deflect hostile fire. The BTR-60PB has a additional radios, is a later modification. The
searchlight and IR equipment. These give it a Forward Air Control Vehicle, another modified
night fighting capability; however, the gunner's BTR-60PB, has a large window replacing the co-
periscope is a day sight only. axial machine guns in the turret and a large
portable generator mounted on the rear deck. All
LIMITATIONS: versions in the series are still in service, although
The BTR-60PB's armor is thicker than that of the BTR-60P and -60PK models seldom appear
older model APCs. However, it is still vulnerable today in first-line units. The Soviets have exported
to Frag-HE as well as to small arms fire. Its tires the vehicle to many countries, including North
are extremely vulnerable to puncture. Soft ancil- Korea and most of the Warsaw Pact. There are
lary equipment (antennas and integral fuel tanks) also Polish, Romanian, and Czech versions of this
are vulnerable to destruction by field artillery vehicle. Since 1978, the BTR-70 has begun to
weapons. Troops must mount and dismount replace the BTR-60PB.
through the top hatches; this exposes them to fire. The artillery command and reconnaissance
REMARKS: vehicle (ACRV) M1979(2) is another BTR-60
variant. It serves as a command observation post
The BTR-60PB first appeared in 1965 as the (COP) vehicle in towed artillery batteries and
third modification in the BTR-60P series of battalions. The same organizations have two other
APCs. It was preceded in 1961 by the open-topped types of ACRV: the M1979(1), mounted on a
BTR-60P and in 1964 by the BTR-60PA (also GAZ-66 box-body van (BBV), serves as a battery
known as BTR-60PK). The latter added overhead fire direction center (FDC); the M1979(3), mounted
armor cover but lacked the turret of the on a ZIL-131 BBV, serves as a battalion FDC.
5-26
FM 100-2-3
BTR-71
-9ir
r: ~~
d
~Sr J rc;~
i r
Ic
#p"A
I~i~bi~
The ITR-70 is a successor vehicle to the BITR Like the BTR{-601H, the B3TK-7() has good cross-
6OPB. Both vehicles have the same turret arma- country capability, high road speed, and large
ment. The BTR-70 is slightly longer in the hull. troop-carrying capacity. The redesigned seating
It also has a recognizable gap between its front arrangement allows the troops to sit back-to-back,
set of road wheels and the rear set. Triangular- facing outward. The vehicle's versatility and
shaped access doors are in this lower hull space amphibious capability are also advantages. Its pri-
on both sides of the vehicle. They provide side mary disadvantage is its relatively light armor
entrance and exit for troops. (The BTR-6018 has protection, although the bow section reportedly
only top hatches.) Also, the wave deflector attaches may incorporate special layered armor.
differently on the BTR-70 than on the BTR-60P13.
The BTR-70 has two upgraded, 8-cylinder, 120-hp
gasoline engines.
5-27
FM 100-2-3
7 NOV 86 *1
REAR
BUMPERS
rV
P2J
1>>~
HIGH-ANGLE-
OF-FIRE
TURRET
MODIFIED
- ,1 F'TnR r
/-
'Xmi BRUSH
GUARDS
;F,-' -
M j
REMARKS:
The BTR-70 was first seen in 1978; thus, it modified wave deflector, rear bumpers, and head-
received the preliminary designation BTR M1978. light brush guards; rooftop firing ports (this
A BTR-70 variant (M1986/ 1) appeared in the included two on each side, mounted in chamfered
October 1986 Moscow parade. This vehicle edges of the hull roof); and brackets which the
mounted the following equipment: the modified Soviets may possibly use to attach additional
high-angle-of-fire turret used on the BTR-80; a armor to the sides of the vehicle.
5-28
FM 100-2-3
HTR-x0
;~~- p ~w
.'at.c.: i.
,
d- " a
;.W
.
, E {, ..
.iR .
I)ES(RIPTIO :
The Soviets based the BTR-80 on the BTR-70 The redesigned side doors are split horizontally.
APC. It has a 260-hp, V8, turbocharged, water- The upper portion opens forward; this gives dis-
cooled, diesel engine. The reconfigured rear portion mounting troops some protection against small
of the hull accommodates a new, single engine. arms fire from the front of the vehicle. The lower
The Soviets removed the roof chamfers of the portion opens down, forming a step. Six smoke
modified BTR-70, raised the rear, and squared off grenade projectors are mounted on the rear of the
the rearward-sloping engine compartment. turret. Armor protection, particularly in the frontal
60-degree arc, has probably increased.
CAPABILITIES:
LIMI TA TIONS:
The Soviets modified the truncated cone turret
used on the BTR-70 for the BIR-80 by redesigning The side firing ports are angled forward. This
the mantlet. This allows the 14.-mm and coaxial design prevents mounted infantrymen from engag-
7.62-n m machine guns to be elevated to a maxi- ing targets directly to the sides and rear of the
nmum of 6( degrees. This high angle of fire is useful vehicle with small arms fire.
in engaging targets on steep mountainsides, such
as those in Afghanistan. It may also give the REMARKS:
BTR-30 increased air defense capability. The Soviets
have also modified the design and positioning of In 1981, the Soviets began production of a
the tiring ports; the ports are now round, rather dieselized variant of the BTR-70, which they called
than tear-shaped, and have ball mounts similar the BTR-80. The Soviets have retrofitted some
to those used on the lMLP. The forward firing ports B3TR-70s with several of the improvements incor-
now sit in angled recesses which allow the indi- porated into the BTR-80, including the high-angle-
vidual weapons to fire to the front of the vehicle. of-fire turret.
5-29
FM 100-2-3
Light armored vehicle (tracked) characteristics Light armored vehicle (tracked) armament characteristics
MAIN ARMAMENT CALIBER (mm) 12.7 (14.5) 73 30 73 7.62 12.7 (1V13 AND
CREW 2 (cdr, driver) 3 (cdr, driver, 3 (cdr, driver, 3 (cdr, driver, 2 (driver, 5 1V16)
CHARACTERISTICS
gunner) gunner) gunner) gunner)
NUMBER 1 1 1 1 1 1
PASSENGERS (capacity) 20 8 7 4 up to 10 (varies INA
TYPE open-mounted smoothbore automatic gun smoothbore turret-mounted turret-mounted
with mission)
heavy MG DShK 2A28 2A42 2A28 MG PKT AAMG DShK
WEIGHT (mt) 14.2 13.5 14.3 7.5 9.7 11 (KPV)
GROUND PRESSURE 0.51 0.57 0.64 0.57 0.46/0.28* INA 360 360 INA
2 TRAVERSE (0) 90 360 360
(kg/cm )
ELEVATION (0) -10 to +80 -4 to +33 -5 to +74 -4 to +33 up to +30 INA
LENGTH
RATE OF FIRE (rd/min) 540-600/80-100 8/2-3 550/200-300 8/2-3 650/250 540-600/80-100
Gun forward (m) NA 6.74 6.86 5.41 6.45 NA (high/low cyclic)
Maximum/Sustained (600/150)
Without gun (m) 7.32 6.74 6.86 5.41 6.45 7.06 no no dual plane no no no
STABILIZATION
WIDTH, overall (m) 3.14 2.94 3.13 2.55 2.85 2.81 FIRE CONTROL reflex sight image intensify- image intensify- image intensify- optical sight, reflex sight
HEIGHT, overall (m) 1.85 2.15 2.08 (to top 1.77 1.87 2.43 (optical sight) ing, 1PN22M1 ing, BPK-1-42 ing, 1PN22M1 PP-61
of turret) AMMUNITION (Type) API, API-T HEAT-FS, AP-T, Frag-T, HEAT-FS, Ball, ball tracer, API, API-T
CLEARANCE (mm) 330 400 460 100-450 395-415 395-415 (API, API-T, I-T) Frag-HE(FS) HEI Frag-HE(FS) API
ENGINE 6-cyl, 240-hp, V-6, 290-hp, V-6, 290-hp, V-6, 240-hp, V-8, 290-hp, V-8, 290-hp, MUZZLE VELOCITY
diesel diesel diesel, UDT-20 diesel diesel diesel (m/sec)
SPEED (maximum) API 840 (1,000) NA 900 NA 855 840
Road (km/hr) 45 65 65 80 60 60 HEAT-FS NA 700 NA 700 NA NA
Water (km/hr) 10 6 7 10 6 6 FRAG-HE(FS) NA 700 900 700 NA NA
FUEL CAPACITY (liters) 400 460 460 300 450 450 MAXIMUM RANGE (m)* 7,000 (7,000) 2,200 INA 2,200 4,000 7,000
ROAD RANGE (km) 240 500 600 320 500 500 EFFECTIVE RANGE 1,000 (1,400) AA/ 800-1,000 3,000 AA/ 800-1,000 1,000 1,000 AA/
TRENCH CROSSING (m) 2.80 2.00 2.50 1.60 2.70 2.70 50% Ph (m) 1,500 (2,000) 2,000-4,000 1,500 ground
ground ground**
VERTICAL STEP (m) 1.10 0.80 0.77 0.80 0.70 0.70
ARMOR PENETRATION
GRADABILITY (0) 38 30 30 32 35 35
(mm @ 00 obliquity 20/13.2 (30/20) 300 (HEAT-FS, 55/50 300 (HEAT-FS, 8 (500 m) 20/13.2
FORDING (m) amphibious amphibious amphibious amphibious amphibious amphibious @ 500/1,000 m) any range) any range)
ARMOR (maximum) BASIC LOAD (rd) 750 (500) 40 40 2,000
Hull (mm) 10 19 19 15 7 15
SECONDARY ARMAMENT MODEL NA PKT*** PKT*** PKT*** NA NA
turret (mm) NA 23 23 23 7 20
CHARACTERISTICS CALIBER (mm) NA 7.62 7.62 7.62 NA NA
INFRARED
NUMBER/TYPE NA I/coaxial 1/coaxial 1/coaxial MG, NA NA
Driver yes yes yes, passive IR yes yes yes
2/bow MG
Gunner NA yes yes, BPK-1-42, no no no
day/night II BASIC LOAD (rd) NA 2,000 2,000 2,000-3,000 NA NA
Commander yes yes yes, 1P3-3 day yes no no (total)
only
AUXILIARY ARMAMENT TYPE NA ATGM ATGM ATGM NA NA
NBC PROTECTION PK and PU filtration and filtration and filtration and filtration and filtration and
CHARACTERISTICS MODEL. NA AT-3/SAGGER or AT-4/SPIGOT or AT-3/SAGGER or NA NA
models have overpressure overpressure overpressure overpressure overpressure
AT-4/SPIGOT or AT-5/SPANDREL**** AT-4/SPIGOT or
limited radio- system system system system system
logical protec- AT-5/SPANDREL**** AT-5/SPANDREL****
tion LAUNCH RAILS/TUBES NA 1 1 1 NA NA
DOI 1954 1967 1980 About 1970 1970 1974 BASIC LOAD (rd) NA 4 4 3 NA NA
°
STATUS obsolescent standard standard standard standard standard FOOTNOTES. *Gun at 450.
"1,000 meters direct fire at 2-m high target.
"'See MT-LB main armament and page 5-12.
FOOTNOTE. *Normal/wide track. *""Seepage 5-102
5-30
FM 100-2-3
RTR-50PK
s:.l
ar
'1
9*
DESCRIPTION:
The Soviets developed their first amphibious integral armament. The vehicle characteristics are
APC, the BTR-50P, using the basic PT-76 light tank essentially the same as those of the B3TR-50P.
chassis and hull and then adding an armored
The MTK mineclearing vehicle is a modified
superstructure in place of a turret. Since its intro-
wTm-5I1K with the Li-67 explosive line charge.
duction, the BTR-50P has spawned a series of
variants. The BTR-5OPA added a 14.5-mm KPV Another variant, designated MTP, serves as an
amphibious armored maintenance support vehicle.
heavy machine gun mounted on the roof of the
(see p. 5-208.)
commander's cupola. The BTR-50PK added over-
head armor and limited radiological protection.
5-31
FM 100-2-3
BMP-1
if
DESCRIPTION: CA PABILITIES:
The BMP is a fully armored AICV. Its low- A combination of effective antitank firepower,
silhouetted hull has a sharp, sloping front with a high mobility, and adequate protection makes the
conspicuously ridged surface. A centrally located, BMP a formidable addition to the inventory of
extremely flat, truncated cone turret mounts a Soviet motorized rifle units. Its 73-mm main gun
73-mm smoothbore gun and a 7.62-mm coaxial fires a rocket-assisted, fin-stabilized HEAT projectile
machine gun. A launching rail for SAGGER mis- with an effective range of 800 to 1,000 meters. It
siles attaches above the gun. The 290-hp, water- also has an automatic loader. For longer range
cooled, 6-cylinder diesel engine is in the right front antitank capability, the HMP can carry any of
of the hull. The driver's hatch is at the left front, three ATGMs: the AT-3/SAGGER, effective to 3.000
directly in front of the commander's hatch, which meters; the A'T'-1, SPIGOT, effective to 2,000 meters;
mounts an IR searchlight. The gunner's hatch is or the AT-5 SPANI)REL, effective to 4,000 meters.
on the left side of the low turret roof. To the rear
of the turret are four large hatches in the roof of
the troop compartment; two large exit doors are
also in the rear. There are four firing ports in each The BMP is amphibious, propelled through
side of the troop compartment and one in the left water by its tracks rather than by the waterjet
rear door. The suspension has six unevenly spaced propulsion of the PT-76. It has the range and speed
road wheels of the PT-76 type, with three track necessary to keep up with the fast-moving tanks
support rollers and a front drive sprocket. it normally follows in offensive formations.
5-32
FM 100-2-3
The BMP has a three-man crew. This includes of stabilization, the 73-mm gun or the coaxial
the vehicle commander, who becomes the squad machine gun cannot fire accurately on the move
leader when the infantry passengers dismount over rough terrain The BMP must be stationary
through the rear exit doors. Vision blocks and when firing and tracking an ATGM. The SAGGER
firing ports in the sides and rear of the troop is difficult to reload; it cannot be reloaded at all
compartment allow the infantrymen to fire assault under NBC conditions without breaking the integ-
rifles (AKM or AK-74) and light machine guns rity of the vehicle's protective overpressure system.
(PKM or RPK-74) from inside the vehicle on the To reload the SPIGOT and SPANDREL, the gunner
move. The troops also carry the RPG-7V antitank must open his hatch; this, again, negates the
grenade launcher, which can be fired by a pas- overpressure system and exposes him to fire. The
senger standing in a rear hatch. BMP ICVs carry land navigation system must be zeroed every 30
the SA-7/14/16 and AGS-17 weapon systems in minutes.
the BMP-equipped MRB's air defense and automatic
grenade launcher platoons. When buttoned up, crew REMARKS:
and passengers have NBC protection in the pres- The BMP, introduced in 1967, represents a
surized and filtered hull. This allows them to transition from the "armored personnel carrier" to
operate regardless of the outside environment. the "infantry combat vehicle" in the Soviet and
The BMP has an infrared searchlight, peri- most Warsaw Pact armies. It replaces the BTR-50P
scopes, and sights for night operations. It also has and complements the wheeled BTRs in first-line
a capability to make its own smoke screen by motorized rifle units. Because of the extreme vul-
injecting diesel fuel into the exhaust manifold. nerability demonstrated by the BMP in the 1973
Middle East War, there has been extensive debate
LIMITATIONS: in the Soviet Army as to how this vehicle should
be used in battle. The BMP is significantly smaller
The BMP has relatively thin armor, with a than Western APCs and has considerably greater
maximum thickness of 19 millimeters in the hull firepower.
and 23 millimeters in the turret. This provides
protection against .50-caliber armor-piercing rounds The most common variant of the infantry
only over the 60-degree frontal arc. The vehicle is combat vehicle is the BMP-1, which appeared in
extremely vulnerable to ATGM and tank fire. Its 1970. It is also called the BMP-A. Its most notice-
compactness dictates the location of critical areas able modifications are the lengthening of the bow
in such a manner that penetration anywhere on and the extension of the deflector shroud to the
the vehicle will normally result in a mobility, fire- rear. These improved the vehicle's swimming capa-
power, or personnel kill These critical areas include bility, which was inhibited by the forward place-
the engine compartment and ammunition storage ment of the engine. Other changes include the
area, on the right side; fuel cells in the rear doors; following: an enlarged, squared firing port for the
and the troop compartment. PKM machine gun below the turret; repositioned
vision blocks above the crew compartment; re-
Because of its limited capability to depress the designed rear roof hatch positions; and the addition
main gun, the BMP cannot engage tanks and of an air intake on the rear roof. Many BMPs
APCs from good hull-down positions. It is thus now mount either the improved, semiautomatic
very vulnerable to enemy fire when it exposes itself AT-3c/SAGGER C or the new AT-4/SPIGOT or
to engage targets. Although the turret can traverse AT-5/SPANDREL ATGM.
360 degrees, the main gun and coaxial machine
gun must be elevated to clear the IR searchlight Some BMP-ls have appeared in Afghanistan
on the commander's cupola. This creates a dead with additional armor. This armor consists of full
space for both weapons between 10:00 and 11:00 side skirts, which extend to the tops of the road
o'clock. wheels; it also includes armor plating bolted to
the upper hull sides, above the side skirts. Appar-
The BMP can maintain its top speed of 65 ently, the design of the armor still allows the side
kilometers per hour for only short periods of time. firing ports to open The Soviets have retrofitted
This results from the high amount of vibration some BMP-ls with six smoke grenade projectors,
and the possibility of transmission failure. Due to mounted together on the rear of the turret as they
the complicated loading mechanism and the lack are on the BTR-80.
5-33
FM 100-2-3
/-- ~-- --
BMP VARIANTS:
The BMP infantry combat vehicle has also model has a small parabolic antenna on the roof
become the basis for a family of variants per- for the TALL MIKE radar. One of these vehicles
forming other roles. Until the actual Soviet des- is assigned, along with three BMP-ls, to the recon-
ignation is known, each variant bears a designation naissance company of a MRR or TR. Three of
corresponding to the year in which it was first them are assigned to the reconnaissance battalion
observed. of an MRI) or TI).
The BMP-1K command vehicle (previously known The BMP-1KSh command and communications
as BMP M1974) differs from the BMP-1 mainly vehicle mounts a large telescopic antenna and
by having additional radio equipment and antennas more radio equipment than the BMP-1K. The turret
and having the machine gun ports welded shut. has no armament. Regimental and division staffs
It is used as a battalion-level command vehicle. reportedly use this variant. It was previously called
The artillery mobile reconnaissance post PRP-3 BMP M1978.
was previously known as BMP M1975. It has an
enlarged two-man turret that has been moved The VPV, previously known as the BMP
toward the rear. The turret armament consists of M1983/1, is a Czechoslovak maintenance and sup-
only a 7.62-mm machine gun, rather than the 73-mm port variant of the BMP. It has the standard
gun and SAGGER rail of the BMP-1. A rectangular BMP-1 chassis, but with the turret removed and
folding antenna for the SMALL FREI) battlefield a rotatable crane added. This crane reportedly
surveillance radar is mounted on the rear of the assists in removing light vehicle turrets and
turret. The effective range of the radar is 20 kilo- engines.
meters. The PRP-3 carries a five-man crew and
extensive radio and optical equipment. The Soviets The PPO mobile trainining post uses the BMP
assign one of these vehicles to each howitzer bat- chassis. The Soviets have removed the turret and
talion (towed or SP); another is organic to the have used the space normally occupied by the
target acquisition battery of each artillery regiment. fighting and passenger compartments to provide
eight student training stations. Positions are also
The BRM reconnaissance vehicle, previously available for an instructor and a driver. Each of
known as the BMP M1976(1), has the same en- the student stations has a hatch, observation
larged two-man turret as the PRP-3 but mounts devices, and communications equipment which
the standard 73-mm main gun (without the duplicate those of a normal BMP commander's
SAGGER launcher). The BRM-1, or BMP M1976(2), position.
5-34
FM 100-2-3
K
BMP-1KSh command and communications vehicle
i
I r------ ~P*b~-
ed rra~--n: "~T~~
Llro~, B Ia-
Mj-
s~s~ar~aj
i-,
~-
------- --
""^.U-LI-*~L11~;3
jB~
5-35
FM 100-2-3
Lf
11
i~;'"
r
. .
d
w~
DESCRIPTION:
The BMP-2 is an infantry combat vehicle vari- Against ground targets, particularly ATGMs, the
ant of the BMP-1 that incorporates a major arma- gun is capable of long-range suppressive fire with
ment change. It has an enlarged two-man turret an effective range of 2,000 or 4,000 meters, depend-
which mounts a 30-mm automatic gun, model 2A42, ing on the type of ammunition selected. The crew
with a long, thin tube and a double-baffle muzzle can remove the ATGM launcher and employ it in
brake, along with a 7.62-mm coaxial machine gun a dismounted mode. The BMPI-2 can generate screen-
on its front. On top of the turret is an ATGM ing smoke by using the engine exhaust or the six
launcher. This launcher can employ both AT-4 81-mm smoke grenade projectors mounted on the
SPIGOT or AT-5/SPANI)REI, missiles. The AT-5/ turret. It also has the overpressure and filtration
SPANDREL canister is normally seen mounted. systems used on the BMP-1, and an automatic
The engine is an upgraded 300-hp, V-6 diesel. The protection system which shuts down the engine
vehicle commander now sits in the two-man turret, and activates the overpressure and filtration
along with the gunner. Because of the enlarged systems in the event of a nuclear explosion.
turret, there is room for only two roof hatches in
the rear fighting compartment, rather than the four REMARKS:
of the BMP-1. The BMP-2 can accommodate one
The BMP-2 was first seen in April 1981 with
less passenger than the BMP-1; there also is one
Soviet forces in Afghanistan. It also appeared in
less firing port for an assault rifle on each side.
the Zapad-81 exercise in the Soviet Union in
However, a new machine-gun-type firing port on
September 1981. Initially identified with the
the left side of the hull, forward of the turret,
STANAG designator BMP M1981, the vehicle has
indicates that an infantryman now occupies the
the actual Soviet designator of BMP-2.
BMP-1 vehicle commander's position.
BMP-2s seen in the May of 1985 Moscow parade
CAPAB ILITIES:
had attachment points on the lower glacis for
The 30-mm dual-purpose automatic gun can fire mounting mineclearing devices similar to the
at either air or ground targets. With a maximum KMT-4 and KMT-6. These vehicles also displayed
elevation of 74 degrees and an effective antiaircraft a layer of applique armor; the armor was on the
range of 3,000 meters, the 30-mm gun can engage vehicles' turret fronts and sides, and on the two
low-flying, subsonic aircraft and helicopters. forward hull hatch tops.
5-36
FM 100-2-3
BMD-1
~-~ SF~I11~~
s, a f~
DESCRIPTION:
The BMI) AAICV superficially resembles the only five evenly spaced road wheels with four
BMP-1, although it is considerably smaller. This support rollers, and in having no rear exit doors.
full-tracked amphibious vehicle has a BMP-type The driver's hatch and vision blocks are centered
turret. Like the BMP-1, its main armament is a below the main gun. There is an additional hatch
73-mm smoothbore gun with a 7.62-mm coaxial on either side of the driver. The troop compartment
machine gun mounted on the right side of the has overhead armor cover; however, it has only
main gun and either a SAGGER ATGM launcher one firing port on each side and one in the rear
mounted over the gun or a SPIGOT SPANI)REL, from which the mounted infantrymen can fire their
launcher mounted on top of the turret. The BMI), weapons. The HMI) has a hydropneumatic suspen-
however, also has two additional 7.62-mm machine sion with a variable height capability. A rear-
guns, one mounted in each of the front bow mounted, 240-hp, 6-cylinder, water-cooled, diesel
corners. The bow is much shorter than that of the engine powers the vehicle; two waterjets at the
BMP, and the upper part of the hull is shaped rear propel it in water.
differently. It also differs from the HMP in having
5-37
FM 100-2-3
CAPABILITIES:
The air-droppable BMD is considerably smaller must dismount over the sides of the vehicles, since
and lighter than the BMP but has roughly the there is no rear door.
same capabilities. Soviet airborne divisions use it
as an infantry combat vehicle. Its turret armor is REMARKS:
the same (maximum 23 millimeters) as that of the
BMP, but its hull is thinner (maximum 15 milli- The BMI) was first seen in the I)vina exercises
meters). An internal NBC filtration system provides in the USSR in 1970. It was not seen again until
the November 1973 Moscow Red Square parade.
protection for the three-man crew and four combat
troops. Two squad members, including the squad Since then, the Soviets have used the BMI) to
leader, ride in the two hatch positions on each completely mechanize the three airborne regiments
side of the driver; the remaining three occupy the in each Soviet airborne division. This substantially
compartment between the turret and engine. The increases the division's firepower and maneuver-
BMD has an estimated maximum speed of 60 to ability. It also equips the assault companies of
80 kilometers per hour on land and 10 kilometers army-level independent air assault battalions and
per hour in water, with a land cruising range of the assault battalions of air assault brigades. Some
320 kilometers. It has an onboard directional naval infantry units may also have it.
gyrocompass. Although originally thought to be a light tank,
LIMITATIONS: the BMD may more properly be considered the air-
borne equivalent of the BMP-1 infantry combat
Since the BMI) has the same turret as the vehicle. However, except for the turret and main
BMP-1, the turret armaments probably have the armament, it is an entirely new design and not a
same limitations, except that the BMI) does not modified BMP. Excluding the obsolescent ASU-57,
have a dead space in its traverse. The passenger the BMI) (at approximately 7.5 metric tons) is the
space is somewhat cramped. The airborne soldiers lightest tracked combat vehicle in the Soviet Army.
BMD M 9 79/1
r b
5-38
FM 100-2-3
BMD-1 KSh
P,4
k
y
a~~i
V'A
- "
BMD VARIANTS:
The basic BMD was initially introduced around per side. The BMI) turret and its integral arma-
1970. Between then and about 1973, it underwent ments are absent, replaced by a low, flat super-
a variety of minor product-improvement modifi- structure. The vehicle has at least two firing ports
cations. The final design, designated BMD-1, has per side. It retains the bow machine guns. The
a recognizable dome-shaped NBC filter intake on collective NBC protection system is also present.
the right-center hull roof. The BMD-1 has retained Some vehicles mount a self-entrenching blade on
the protection, mobility, and firepower character- the lower glacis.
istics of the BMD.
The BMD-IKSh, previously known as the BMI)
M1979/3, is a C' vehicle which differs from the
M1979/1 in its addition of several folding antenna
The BMD M1979/1 variant is an airborne APC
masts. It also has a generator on the rear deck.
which first appeared during the 1979 Soviet
Afghanistan incursion. The chassis of the M1979/1 The 120-mm SP howitzer (airborne)2S9 is also
is approximately 600 millimeters longer, with the based on the lengthened BMI) chassis. (See page
addition of one road wheel and one support roller 5-62.)
5-39
FM 100-2-3
MT-LB
C ~?
,~- : r*" a
v e ;D;,; A t
;il :' ~i
1 rl:i
8;: -jam
:r4
DESCRIPTION:
The MT-LB is an amphibious armored tracked ten personnel besides its two-man crew (driver and
vehicle. It has a low-silhouette, box-like hull made commander-gunner). It also serves as a prime
of welded steel plates, and a small turret on the mover for various types of artillery. In this case,
right front that mounts a single 7.62-mm machine it can also carry the artillery crew of six to ten
gun. There are four firing ports: one on each side personnel. It frequently serves as prime mover for
of the vehicle and one in each of the two rear the 100-mm antitank gun T-12. As a cargo and
exit doors. The flat hull roof has two forward- general transport vehicle, it has a cargo capacity
opening, troop exit hatches. The flat-track suspen- of 2.0 metric tons. (Its towed load is 6.5 metric
sion consists of six road wheels with no return tons.) The Soviets use the wide-tracked MT-LBV
rollers. as a soft-terrain vehicle.
5-40
FM 100-2-3
if!
II C7s
r r'
":~.
pi11
;i t 4<
_ at r . ,
kc
P?
r,;~~~
P'Z
-V
,
-a~~,,
,.r
I*Yi - :I~ !°
"- 4
r
%
r
P0, c~~-~~II
MT-LB VARIANTS:
The MT-L13 chassis is also the basis for many The MT-LB M19753 has the BiG EI) battle-
other vehicles. Its versatility suggests that the field surveillance radar mounted on the rear half
Soviets could use the MT-LB chassis for even more of the MT-LB3 chassis. Unlike the 2S1 and the
military purposes in the future. The following ACRV IV12, the chassis of the radar variant does
paragraphs describe currently known variants. not appear to he lengthened. It still has the
original six-road-wheel suspension, and it retains
The 122-mm SP howitzer 2S1 was introduced the MT-LB's small front turret with its 7.62-mm
in 1974. It is based on a chassis derived from the machine gun. It also has the MT-LBR's two rear
MT-1LB. known as the MIT-LBu. The 281 is some- exit doors.
what longer that the MT-LB (7.40 meters versus
6.45 meters.) It has seven road wheels; the M-LB
has six.
The ACRV 1V12 also uses the MT-LBu chassis. The SA-13 TELA.I uses the MT-LB chassis. So
The small turret at the front of the MT-LB is do the RKhM chemical reconnaissance vehicle, the
absent. The 1V12 has a larger turret mounted on MTK-2 mineclearer, and the R-33OJP comnuni-
the rear half of the vehicle. cations jammer.
5-41
FM 100-2-3
ACRV 1 V13
DESCRIPTION: C'APABILITIES:
ACRV 1V12 is the overall designation for a The four versions of the ACRV are deployed
series of vehicles known to consist of four ver- in SP howitzer battalions. The following para-
sions: 1V13, 1V14, 1V15, and 1V16. All four use graphs describe these versions.
the MT-LBu chassis. The suspension consists of
seven road wheels with no support rollers. The The ACRV IV1I3 remains in the battery firing
high, box-like hull has a steep glacis at the front. position as the battery fire direction center (FI)C).
It also has a flat, round turret on the rear half. The battery senior officer (the platoon leader of
The straight vertical rear of the hull contains a the first firing platoon), assisted by (manual) fire
single exit door. A total of three or four antennas direction computation and communications per-
may attach on top of the hull. sonnel, mans it. It has direct radio communications
with the battery COP, the battalion COP, and the
The ACRV 1V13 normally has a 12.7-mm I)ShK battalion FI)C. The battery senior officer relays
AA machine gun on a swivel mount atop the firing data to the SP howitzers.
turret. The ACRV 1V14/1V15 turret mounts the
following items: a laser rangefinder, optical The ACRV 1V14 and IV15 serve as battery
observation devices, and associated fire-control and battalion commanders' COPs, respectively.
equipment. The ACRV 1V16 may mount a 12.7-mm They do not remain in the firing position; in
machine gun. It probably contains a digital fire- most cases, they collocate with the COPs of the
direction computer. The ACRV 1V13 and 1V14/ supported maneuver unit commanders. The artillery
1V15 also vary from the ACRV 1V16 by having commander decides how to attack targets of
a rectangular box projecting from the right side opportunity and targets relayed to him by the
of the hull, just below the turret. supported maneuver unit. Target acquisition,
5-42
FM 100-2-3
A ('RV 1 V14
,
' ;:
' ....
: -
ACRV1 1 V16
5-43
FM 100-2-3
Medium Tanks
Medium tank vehicle characteristics Medium tank armament characteristics
5-44
FM 100-2-3
T-55
'I -
k~ ~:
--- -
'1. "
aBB
DESCRIPTION: CAPABILITIES:
The T-55 medium tank has a fully tracked, The T-55 c-ombines a high-velocity gun with a
five-road-wheeled chassis. This chassis has a space highly mobile chassis, a low silhouette, and excep-
between the first and second road wheels and no tional long-range endurance. Improvements over
return rollers. The T-55 has a low-silhouetted hull the T-54 include a larger V-12 water-cooled diesel
with a dome-shaped turret mounted over the third engine with 580 rather than 52() horsepower, andl
road wheel. The 100-mm rifle-bore main gun has an inc-reased cruising range of 5)0 rather than 10)
a bore evacuator at the muzzle. The T-55 also kilometers (60) kilometers with auxiliary tanks).
mounts a 7.62-mm coaxial machine gun; the later The increased cruising range can go up to 715
T-55A version lacks the bow machine gun. kilometers with two 200-liter auxiliary fuel tanks
which (an be carried on the rear. The T-55 has
The T-55 differs from the older T-54 models
two-plane stabilization of the main gun rather
because it lacks the right-hand cupola and the
than verticle stabilization only. It also has a basic
turret dome ventilator, which is located in front
load for the main gun of 43 rather than 14 rounds.
of that cupola on the T-5-4. Most. T-55s also lack
the turret-mounted 12.7-mm AA machine gun of The T-55 can ford depths of 1.I meters without
the T-54. All T-55s mount an infrared gunner's preparation. It has snorkel equipment which
searchlight above and to the right of the main enables it to cross dlepths of up to 5.5 meters at a
gun. This searchlight, however, is not a distin- speed of 2 kilometers per hour. This equipment
guishing feature since it has been retrofitted to takes about ;30 minutes of preparation, but can be
many T-54 and T-54A tanks. jettisoned immediately on leaving the water. All
5-45
FM 100-2-3
T-55s have the PAZ radiation detection system; the prepare a medium tank unit for a snorkeling
T-55A also has an antiradiation liner. The Soviets operation. Extrance and exit points may also need
may have retrofitted some T-55s with a full NBC preparation.
collective protection system (air filtration and
overpressure). Injecting vaporized diesel fuel into REMARKS:
the exhaust system can generate a dense smoke The T-54-series tanks first appeared in 1949.
screen. They replaced the T-34 tank of World War II. The
LIMITA TIONS: Soviets continuously improved and modified the
T-54; when sufficient changes had been made, they
The half-egg-shaped turret of the T-55 has good redesignated it the T-55. They introduced the T-55
ballistic qualities; however, it creates cramped in 1958. It incorporates all the improvements of
working conditions for the crew. This results in a the fully developed T-54 series without being
slow rate of fire. Its silhouette is one meter lower radically different in design or appearance. The
than the M60's. This advantage is counterbalanced T-55A appeared in the early 1960s.
by its poor armor protection, which is thin by
More T-54/55 tanks have been produced than
Western standards. Its gun control equipment is
any other tank in the world. The Warsaw Pact
also crude. It shares the disadvantage that most
countries and many others use the seven main
Soviet tanks have: a limited ability to depress the
production models extensively. Czechoslovakia and
main gun. This hinders its ability to fire effectively
Poland manufacture the T-54/55. Communist
from defilade, forcing it to expose itself to engage
targets. Ammunition and fuel storage positions are China's version is known as Type 62. Many T-54/55
vulnerable. The lack of a turret basket presents tanks are still in service; however, the T-62, T-64,
loading difficulties, and there is limited ready T-72, and T-80 are replacing them as the primary
ammunition. The driver, commander, and gunner main battle tanks in first-line Soviet tank and
all sit in a line. motorized rifle units.
The T-55 is not airtight. The filtration system The Soviets are modernizing some T-55s. Improve-
ments include new APFSDS ammunition. This
protects the crew from radioactive dust. However,
ammunition has a muzzle velocity of 1,500 meters
they must wear individual protective masks and
per second and armor penetration of 300 milli-
clothing to guard against chemical and biological
meters. Other improvements include the following:
agents. The tank must thus pass through con-
laser rangefinders; add-on armor, as on the T-62;
taminated areas rapidly and the crew must decon-
smoke grenade launchers; track skirts; and up-
taminate it before it is fully operational.
graded mobility components (track and engine).
The tank can be made watertight for fording Czech T-55 improvements include a crosswind
water obstacles up to 1.4 meters deep (or 5.5 meters sensor and a warning device that alerts the crew
with snorkel). However, it takes one-half hour to when the vehicle is being lased.
5-46
FM 100-2-3
T-62
f --
r R f "L
r
.N~
ss
DESCRIPTION:
The T-62 medium tank has a fully tracked, the way up the gun tube from the turret. There is
five-road-wheeled chassis. The chassis has close also a 7.62-mm coaxial machine gun. The T-62A
spaces between the three front road wheels and model also mounts a 12.7-mm AA machine gun
large gaps separating the third, fourth, and fifth at the loader's hatch position.
road wheels. The drive sprocket is at the rear and
the idler at the front; there are no track return A gunner's IR searchlight is mounted on the
rollers. The rounded turret, mounted over the third right, above the main gun. A smaller IR search-
road wheel, is more smoothly cast and more nearly light is mounted on the commander's cupola. The
egg-shaped than that of the T-54/55 series. The driver's hatch is in front of the turret on the left
commander's cupola on the left is cast with the side of the flat, low-silhouetted hull.
turret. It is not bolted on as in the case of the
T-54/55. The loader's hatch on the right is also CAPABILITIES:
farther forward.
Like the T-55, the T-62 has a 580-hp, V-12,
The 115-mm smoothbore main gun has a longer water-cooled diesel engine. 'T'his engine gives the
and thinner tube than the 100-mm gun of the T-62 a cruising range of 280 kilometers cross-
T-54155. Its bore evacuator is about two-thirds of country; 450 kilometers on paved roads, with
5-47
FM 100-2-3
integral fuel cells; and 400 kilometers cross- armor; crude gun control equipment (on most
country, or 650 kilometers on paved roads, with models); limited depression of the main gun; and
two 200-liter auxiliary fuel tanks. The tank also vulnerable fuel and ammunition storage areas. The
shares the snorkeling and smokescreen-generating automatic spent-cartridge ejection system can cause
capabilities of the T-54/55 series. It has the same dangerous accumulations of carbon monoxide. It
PAZ radiation detection system as the T-55. The can cause possible physical injury to the crew from
Soviets may have retrofitted some T-62s with full cartridge cases projected against the edge of a
NBC collective protection systems (air filtration poorly aligned ejection port and rebounding into
and overpressure). Most models have the same IR the crew compartment. Opening the ejection port
night sight and driving equipment and the same under NBC conditions would also expose the crew
fire control equipment as the T-54/55. Some T-62s, to contamination.
however, have received a passive night sight. This
replaces the gunner's active IR sight. A laser Each time the gun fires, the tube must go into
rangefinder may now replace the stadiametric detent for cartridge ejection. The power traverse
reticle rangefinder. of the turret is inoperable during ejection and
reloading operations. Manual elevation and tra-
The most significant improvement over the verse are slow and not effective for tracking a
T-54/55 tanks, however, is the 115-mm smoothbore moving target; therefore, rapid fire and second-hit
main gun. It fires a hypervelocity, armor-piercing, capabilities are limited. The turret also cannot be
fin-stabilized, discarding sabot (HVAPFSDS) round traversed with the driver's hatch open. Although
with a muzzle velocity of 1,615 meters per second. the tank commander may override the gunner and
The penetrator flies in a very flat trajectory; traverse the turret, he cannot fire the main gun
therefore, it is extremely accurate out to a maxi- from his position. He is unable to override the
mum effective range of 1,600 meters. The specific gunner in elevation of the main gun, causing
number of each type of round varies with the target acquisition problems.
expected tactical situation; however, the 40-round
basic load typically includes 12 HVAPFSDS, 6 To fire the 12.7-mm AA machine gun, the loader
HEAT, and 22 HE rounds. must be partially exposed. This makes him vulner-
able to suppressive fires; he must also neglect his
The T-62 also has an automatic shell ejector main gun loading duties.
system. The recoil of the main gun activates this
system. It also ejects spent casings through a port REMARKS:
in the rear of the turret.
The T-62 is a further step in the line of
The T-62 has the standard 7.62-mm PKT coaxial development begun with the T-54/55 series. It first
machine gun with a range of 1,000 meters. It also appeared in 1961. It became the standard main
features a 12.7-mm DShK AA machine gun. The battle tank in Soviet tank and motorized rifle units,
gun has a range of 1,500 meters against ground gradually replacing the T-54 and T-55. The T-62A
targets and a slant range of 1,000 meters against variant first appeared in 1970. Currently, how-
aircraft. The T-62A also has a stabilized main gun; ever, it is being replaced by the new generation
it enables the gunner to track and fire on the move T-64/T-72/T-80 tanks as the first-line Soviet main
with improved accuracy. battle tank.
A command tank model, designated the T-62K, T-62 tanks of the TR involved in the six-
also has a land navigation system. This system regiment "troop withdrawal" from Afghanistan in
has a gyroscopic compass and a calculator giving 1986 showed a number of modifications: full-length
continuous enroute readout of two factors: the track skirts; curved, add-on armor sections mounted
tank's location, in relation to its point of origin; on the front and sides of the turret; and additional
and its distance from, and azimuth to, a predeter- armor on the upper glacis. The add-on turret armor
mined objective. provides additional protection against shaped-
LIMITATIONS: charge antitank weapons. These tanks carried a
probable laser rangefinder mounted atop the main
The T-62 has all the limitations listed before gun. They also had smoke grenade projectors on
for the T-55: a cramped crew compartment; thin the sides of the turret.
5-48
FM 100-2-3
T-64A
s-,.- -
I
A..: .: ; :B r
r*h
I
*-.91'
;C k+C:l"
t
,
J
I
r, ~uC1
r417 ~a r
g~-\- QY~
y$gb~
~
DESCRIPTION:
The T-64 and T-72 medium tanks are similar include six sinmall, stamped road wheels; four track
in appearance. Both retain the low silhouette of return rollers; a 12-tooth drive sprocket; double-pin,
earlier T-54/55/62 tanks; both have a live track rubber-bushed track; and linear-type shock
with six evenly spaced road wheels; and both have absorbers. Other features are as follows:
a drive sprocket at the rear and an idler wheel at * A gunner's IR searchlight mounted to the left
the front. The driver's hatch is centered at the of the main gun.
top of a sharply sloped upper glacis. The glacis * A newly designed 12.7-mm NSV AA machine
has four steel ribs and a V-shaped water and debris gun on the commander's cupola with a fixed
deflector. The low, rounded turret is centered on mount.
the hull. The commander's cupola is on the right
* The AA machine gun, which can fire buttoned
side of the turret; the gunner's hatch is on the
up.
left side. The 125-mm main gun has a four-section
removable thermal shield. It has two sections in * Several large external ammunition stowage
front of, and two sections to the rear of, the mid- boxes, normally attached to the sides of the
tube bore evacuator. A 7.62-mm coaxial machine turret.
gun is mounted to the right of the mantlet. Inte- * A long snorkel stowed on the rear edge of the
grated fuel cells and stowage containers give a turret. (A second snorkel with an elbow for
streamlined appearance to the fenders. The tank attachment to the engine exhaust is stowed
has a toothed shovel/dozer blade on the front of inside the first.)
the hull, beneath the glacis. There are attachment * A smaller engine compartment than the 'T'-72.
points beneath the blade for the KMT-6 mine- Its radiator grill is near the turret.
clearing plow. Early models sometimes mounted * A command variant with an additional whip
four detachable track protection plates on the front antenna and a 10-m antenna mast. The mast
half of each side. Later versions have shown can be erected in the center of the turret using
detachable full-length standoff skirting. guy wires, with an antenna connector located
There are several design differences between the in front of the commander's cupola. It employs
two tanks. Those features peculiar to the T-64 the same TNA-3 land navigation system found
5-49
FM 100-2-3
in the T-62K command tank and molnts no AA with the IR searchlight, visibility decreases to 800
machine gun. It serves as a battalion and meters when the night sight is used.
regimental command vehicle.
REMARKS:
CAPABILITIES: The T-64 entered production in 1967. It is the
The T-64 has greater mobility than the T-62. first of a new family of Soviet main battle tanks
The 5-cylinder, opposed-piston, diesel engine has developed as successors to the T-54/55/62 family.
an estimated output of 710 horsepower. Two 200- The first T-64s had the 115-mm gun of the T-62;
liter auxiliary fuel drums can fit on the rear of the T-64A version subsequently received the
the hull. 125-mm gun.
The T-64 has better armor protection than the The T-64A has an optical rangefinder. It fires
T-62. Its greatly increased frontal armor protection normal 125-mm tank gun ammunition. It originally
is due to the use of improved layered armor. It had four-part fold-out track skirts. It has since
can also mount track protection plates or full- received full-length track skirts, but retains brackets
length skirts. Low-flash fuel storage also offers for the four-part skirts. Originally produced without
protection to the sides. The front-mounted shovel smoke grenade projectors, many T-64As have been
enables the tank to dig itself in within 20 to 30 retrofitted with twelve of them; these are on both
minutes. It also increases the armor protection of sides of the turret. The hull glacis armor consists
the lower hull front when it is folded upwards. of layers of steel enclosing fiberglass layers. The
cast armor of the turret is reinforced with non-
Besides its PAZ radiation detection system and
metallic materials. The T-64A was deployed in
an antiradiation liner, the T-64 has a collective
WGF in 1976. It replaced most T-55s in three
NBC filtration and overpressure system. It also armies: 2d Guards Army, 3d Shock Army, and 20th
has the same integral smoke-generating capability Guards Army. In 1980, it was introduced in the
as earlier T-54/55/62 tanks. Variants have the SGF. Since late 1984, the T-64B has partially
same type of turret-mounted smoke grenade pro- replaced it in both Groups of Forces.
jectors seen on the T-72 and T-80.
The T-64B, previously known as the SMT
The 125-mm smoothbore main gun fires a hyper- M1981/1, has a laser rangefinder. It can fire the
velocity, armor-piercing, fin-stablized, discarding- AT-8/SONGSTER ATGM from its main gun; this
sabot (HVAPFSDS) round. The round may have is in addition to firing standard 125-mm ammuni-
a muzzle velocity of over 1,750 meters per second
tion. It has full-length track skirts, and it has four
and an effective range of 2,100 meters. The transverse ribs in front of the driver's hatch. A
40-round basic load would typically include 12 radio frequency antenna in an armored housing
HVAPFSDS, 6 HEAT, and 22 HE rounds. The car-
replaces the rangefinder optic on the right side of
tridges are semicombustible with stub-cases. An
the turret. The optic on the left side of the turret
automatic loader allows the number of crew is larger, approximately twice as large as that on
members to decrease to three: the commander, the
the T-64A and T-72 variants. The T-64B has only
gunner, and the driver. The gun has an automatic eight smoke grenade projectors, mounted in groups
spent-cartridge ejection system similar to that of of four on both front sides of the turret.
the T-62.
Modified T-64Bs with reactive armor were first
The T-64B has an onboard computer. Some observed in October 1984. To accommodate this
variants may have a laser rangefinder. armor, the eight smoke grenade projectors are
LIMITA TIONS: combined into two groups of four at the rear of
the left side of the turret. Only two transverse ribs
An automatic loader has allowed the Soviets appear in front of the driver's hatch. Also, stowage
to reduce not only the number of crewmen, but boxes have been relocated. These modifications
also the size of the turret. Therefore, the space allow reactive armor boxes to fit on the upper
available in the turret has not significantly in- glacis, the front of the turret, and the turret roof.
creased. The ability to depress the main gun (-5 Applique armor has been added to the turret roof
degrees) is still limited. When using the mast and sides, and to the left and right of the driver
antenna, the command variant is immobile, since on the hull roof. An antiradiation liner now
the mast must be anchored in the ground. Even protects the interior of the turret.
5-50
FM 100-2-3
T-72
5-51
FM 100-2-3
LIMITA TIONS:
Same as for T-64. The West incorrectly called the variant SMT
M1981 3 the T-80. This variant and the similar
REMARKS:
T-72M1 show some improvements: a thicker upper
The Soviets introduced the T-72 in the early glacis with three, rather than four, transverse ribs
1970s. It is not a further development of the T-64; in front of the driver's hatch; increased frontal
instead, it is a parallel design, a high-production turret armor; and applique armor on the turret roof.
tank that complements the T-64. The Soviets have It has smoke grenade projectors, an antiradiation
used the T-64 only in forward-deployed Soviet liner, and a laser rangefinder. It possesses infrared
units. However, they use the T-72 within the USSR night sights for the gunner (TPN-1-49-23) and
and export it to non-Soviet Warsaw Pact armies commander (TKN-3). The variant is now the
and several other countries. standard model for Soviet units with the T-72.
The basic T-72 had an optical rangefinder. It
also had four-part track skirt plates like the basic A further modified variant appeared in the
T-65's. A variant, the T-72M, shows modification: November 1986 Moscow parade. It displayed more
full track skirts; smoke grenade projectors (seven frontal turret protection than the SMT M1981 3.
on the left and five on the right of the turret Like the modified T-64B, it had several components
front); and no right-hand optic, indicating the moved to make room for reactive armor. Eight
presence of a laser rangefinder. This variant is smoke grenade projectors are mounted on the left
for export; it first appeared with the East German rear side of the turret; the stowage box positions
Army in October 1981. The variant SMT M1981/2 have been shifted; and there are only two trans-
displayed a raised rear deck cover. verse ribs on the upper glacis.
SMT M1981/3
.. x
i; r
iij
i".
5-52
FM 100-2-3
T-80
DESCRIPTION:
The T-80 uses features of both the T-64 and It has an autoloader for the main gun. Its arma-
T-72. It also has some unique features. For example, ment and optics are like those of the T-64B. Its
it has a new type of rubber-tired road wheels. infrared sight indicates that it lacks a thermal
These are larger than the T-64's, but slightly imager.
smaller than the T-72's. The road wheels are
mounted in noticeable pairs, with the middle pair The T-80 may have enhanced frontal armor;
particularly close together. The rubber-bushed, that is, it may have an upper glacis of steel layers
double pin track has rubber track pads and enclosing fiberglass layers, and a cast steel turret
U-shaped track guides. A self-entrenching blade is incorporating nonmetallic materials. It has the
mounted on the lower glacis. The rear hull has a same collective NHC protection system and anti-
large exhaust. radiation liner as the T-64 and the T-72 tanks.
The T-80 displays a large left-hand optic, indi- The T-80 has improved mobility due to an esti-
cating a laser rangefinder. The smoke grenade mated 1,000-hp gas-turbine engine. Hlowever, its
launchers are moved to the rear of the turret sides weight has increased to 42 metric tons.
to make room for reactive armor boxes. (Reactive
armor appears on many T-80s.) The tank also has REMA RKS:
an enlarged snorkel on the turret rear.
A T-80 prototype existed in 1976, but it did not
CAPABILITIES: enter production until the early 1980s. It has been
deployed since 1984 in Soviet units in the W(F;
The T-80 is the most recent Soviet tank to enter that is, in the two armies which did not receive
series production and it incorporates the latest the T-64: the 1st Guards Tank Army and 8th
in Soviet technology. It is capable of firing the Guards Army. It is likely that the Soviets will
AT-8 SONGSTER ATGM through its main gun; initially reserve the 'T'-80 for their own forces, as
it can also fire conventional 125-mm ammunition. they did with the T-64.
5-53
FM 100-2-3
LENGTH
Gun forward (m) 5.00 8.50 7.63
Without gun (m) 3.60 6.00 6.90
SPEED (maximum)
Road (km/hr) 40 40 44
Water (km/hr) NA NA 10
GRADABILITY (°) 30 38 38
ARMOR (maximum)
Hull (mm) 6 40 14
Turret (mm) NA NA 16
INFRARED
Driver no yes yes (some vehicles)
Gunner no yes no
Commander no yes yes (some vehicles)
5-54
FM 100-2-3
MAIN ARMAMENT
CHARACTERISTICS ASU-57 ASU-85 PT-76
CALIBER (mm) 57 85 76
SIGHTING DEVICE direct fire telescope direct tire telescope telescopic sight
AMMUNITION (types) Frag-HE, HVAP, Frag, HE, HVAP-T, Frag-HE, HEAT, HVAP-T, AP-T
AP-T, API-T APC-T AP-T, HEAT,
smoke
RATE OF FIRE
Maximum (rd/min) 8-12 (antitank role) 7-8 6-8
Sustained, 1st hr (rd) 100-150 70 INA
SECONDARY ARMAMENT
CHARACTERISTICS ASU-57 ASU-85 PT-76
5-55
FM 100-2-3
ASU-85
DESCRIPTION:
The ASU-85 has a PT-76 type chassis with six capable of providing general fire support. It fires
road wheels (with a wider space between the first a HVAP round which will penetrate 180-mm armor
and second). Its box-shaped, low-silhouetted hull at 1,000 meters. IR equipment gives the ASU-85
has a sharply sloping glacis plate in front. The good nightfighting capability. It has a 240-hp, V-6,
main armament is an 85-mm gun. The gun has a water-cooled diesel engine. It carries a crew of
double-baffle muzzle brake and a bore evacuator four: the commander, the gunner, the loader, and
on its long, thin barrel. A large IR searchlight the driver.
for the gunner is mounted above the mantlet. The
gun also has a smaller IR searchlight for the LIMI TA TIONS:
commander at the right. The armor-covered crew
The ASU-85's suspension uses components of
area is NBC-sealed. The secondary armament is
the PT-76 light tank. However, it has no waterjets
a 7.62-mm coaxial machine gun. Some ASU-85s
and is not amphibious. It has relatively thin
also mount a 12.7-mm AA machine gun I)ShK.
armor: the glacis plate is only 40 millimeters thick,
CAPABILITIES: and the upper hull side only 15 millimeters thick.
5-56
FM 100-2-3
PT-76
-1 ji ~.
V
n4 ~I
ai
DESCRIPTION:
The PT-76 is a lightly armored amphibious tank. BMP-1, BMP-2, BRM, and BRM-1 vehicles. It may
It has a flat, boat-like hull. Its suspension has still equip the reconnaissance companies and bat-
six road wheels and no return rollers. A dish-type talions of some MRRs, MR)Rs, TRs, and TI)s. The
turret mounts over the second, third, and fourth TBs of naval infantry units still have it as well.
road wheels. The turret has a double hatch for Aside from its reconnaissance role, it can cross
commander and loader. The driver's hatch is be- water obstacles in the first wave of an attack and
neath the main gun, at the top of the sloping can provide fire support during the establishment
glacis plate. of a beachhead. Its V-6, 240-hp water-cooled engine
gives it a road speed of 44 kilometers per hour,
Four variants are distinguished by the dif- with a cruising range of 260 kilometers. Its twin
ferences in the 76-mm main armament. Early waterjet propulsion system moves it through water
models mounted a ID-56T gun with no bore evac- at 10 kilometers per hour with a range of 100
uator and a long, multislotted muzzle brake. Later kilometers. The 76-mm main gun is light for a
models mount a D-56TM gun with a bore evacuator modern tank; it fires HVAP and HEAT rounds
and a double-baffle muzzle brake. Further variants capable of penetrating APCs and other light
have a stabilized I)-56TM gun (PT-76B) and an armored vehicles. The PT-76 is a reliable, highly
unidentified clean-barrel gun. A coaxial 7.62-mm mobile reconnaissance vehicle. It has an ideal
machine gun also is mounted at the right of the design for amphibious capability, but it has many
main gun. limitations as a fighting vehicle.
The PT-76 was formerly the standard recon- Like most Soviet tanks, the PT-76 has limited
naissance tank of the Soviet and Warsaw Pact ability to depress its main gun; therefore, it cannot
armies. It has been replaced in first-line units by fire effectively from defilade. Its amphibious design
5-57
FM 100-2-3
5-58
FM 100-2-3
ARTILLERY
Guns and Howitzers
Gun and howitzer characteristics (armament and vehicle)
203-MM
76-MM 120-MM 122-MM 130-MM 152-MM 152-MM 152-MM 152-MM HOWITZER 203-MM
ARMAMENT MOUNTAIN GUN SP HOWITZER 122-MM SP HOWITZER ARMAMENT FIELD GUN GUN-HOWITZER SP HOWITZER FIELD GUN SP GUN ARMAMENT B-4 (M1931) and SP GUN
CHARACTERISTICS M1966 (ABN) 2S9 HOWITZER D-30 2S1 CHARACTERISTICS M-46 D-20 2S3 2A36 2S5 CHARACTERISTICS B-4M (M1931) 2S7
5-59
FM 100-2-3
FOOTNOTE. *To of turret in travel position (at maximum ground clearance)/in firing position.
5-60
FM 100-2-3
M1966
" w
f~"'
r~ A
g e*=:.,
-~i-a '"~f~ L~.-~g
,ir- at-.~-ii* v
DESCRIPTION:
The M1966 has split box-section trails and a ZIS-3 (M1942). Its maximum range is between
relatively small, two-piece, flat-sloped shield with 10,500 and 11,500 meters.
winged sides and a scalloped top. The shield has
REMARKS:
large wheel cutouts for the swing-axle-mounted
wheels. There is a direct fire sight aperture in the The M1966 first appeared publicly during a
left shield section. The shield lacks a sliding 1966 Soviet May I)ay parade in Baku. It probably
central section. replaces the 76-mm mountain gun M1938 since it
has improved performance over the older weapon.
CAPABILITIES:
This gun is rarely seen in the USSR and is not
The weapon may break down into two animal known to be deployed outside the USSR. Some
loads for transport. A light truck can tow it when MRD)s may use it in mountainous terrain. The
it is fully assembled. This gun can probably fire GAZ-66 truck can tow it. Helicopters can air-lift
the same projectiles as the 76-mm field gun both the gun and prime mover.
5-61
FM 100-2-3
2S9
DESCRIPTION:
The 2S9 is an amphibious, 120-mm SP howitzer capability. This is especially useful in mountainous
mounted on a stretched version of the BMI) terrain. Besides conventional Frag-HE, the 2S9
chassis. The chassis of the BMI) is light enough can probably fire HIEAT rounds in a limited
for air insertion of the weapon, but is also strong antitank/ antiarmor role.
enough for the recoil of the 120-mm howitzer. The
REMARKS:
large turret is in the middle of the chassis, which
has six road wheels. The smooth barrel has no The 2S9 was previously known as the M1981
bore evacuator or muzzle brake. in the West. Its Soviet nickname is Anona (custard
apple). It first appeared publicly during the May
CAPABILITIES:
1965 parade in Moscow. It may replace the
Airborne and air assault units employ this SP 120-mm mortar in airborne regiments and towed
howitzer. It significantly increases their organic artillery in airborne divisions. Various Western
fire support capabilities. The 2S9 can move rapidly sources have erroneously termed this versatile
cross-country with the BMI)-equipped forces. In weapon a "gun mortar" or "gun/howitzer." It
addition to the normal trajectory of the howitzer, actually combines the functions of a mortar and
the 2S9 can fire upon reverse slopes with a mortar a howitzer.
5-62
FM 100-2-3
D-30
vk}
__ A
DESCRIPTION:
The I)-30 has a unique three-trail carriage, a degrees traverse and is equipped for high and low
conspicuous box-like shield for the recoil-recuperator angles of fire. This makes the I)-30 fully suitable
mechanism mounted above the tube, and a small for antitank defense.
protective shield which is fitted between the
wheels. The gun has a semiautomatic, vertically The l)-30 fires a variable-charge, case-type,
sliding, wedge-type breechblock. A truck (Ural-375 separate-loading ammunition. It has a special non-
or ZIL-131) or armored tractor can tow it at speeds rotating, fin-stabilized HEAT projectile which
up to 80 kilometers per hour. It is towed muzzle- allows it to effectively engage armored vehicles
first by a large lunette just under the muzzle brake, with direct fire. The I)-30 can also fire a flechette
with its trails folded under the barrel. Early models round.
of the D-30 had a multibaffle muzzle brake; more
recent models have a double-baffle muzzle brake LIMITA TIONS:
similar to that used on the SP version 2S1. It is doubtful that full elevation is possible when
CAPABILITIES: the breech is directly over a trail leg.
5-63
FM 100-2-3
2S1
~
r,'Ja d~ iks .w
.ter +
DESCRIPTION:
The chassis of the 2S1 somewhat resembles that The long 122-mm howitzer on the rounded front
of the PT-76. However, the 2S1 is mounted on a of the turret derives from the towed 122-mm how-
chassis derived from the MT-LB, known as the itzer I)-30. The double-baffle muzzle brake is flush
MT-LBu. The 2S1 has seven road wheels (versus with the forward edge of the hull; the bore evac-
six for either PT-76 or MT-IB) and no return uator is midway along the tube.
rollers. Its drive sprocket is at the front, and the
idler is at the rear. Like the MT-LB, the 2S1 can The 2S1 is distinguished from the 152-mm SP
use two different widths of track. The wider tracks howitzer 2S3 by its smaller turret and less massive
lower the ground pressure and facilitate travel over gun. The 2S1 also has a single unit shield for the
soft terrain. The amphibious 2S1 is propelled recoil-recuperator mechanism above the tube. The
through the water by its tracks. 2S3 has two separate cylinders above the tube.
Also, the tube of the 2S1 does not extend beyond
The boat-like hull contains the engine com- the front of the vehicle, while the 2S3 tube does.
partment at the right front. The driver's compart-
CAPA BILITIES:
ment is at the left front, with the driver's hatch
to the left of the gun tube. A low-silhouette, rotating The 2S1 is organic to the howitzer battalions
turret tops the fighting compartment in the rear of BMP-equipped (and some BTR-equipped) MRRs
of the hull. Atop the all-welded turret are the com- and TRs. Since it is tracked and amphibious, it
mander's cupola (with its single hatch cover) on has the cross-country capability necessary to keep
the left and the loader's hatch on the right. The pace with supported BMPs and tanks. It has a
gunner, also located in the left side of the turret, maximum range of 15,300 meters. The Soviets use
has no hatch. The commander and driver have it extensively in a direct fire role against armored
IR night sighting equipment; however, there is no vehicles or in breaching minefields and other
IR gunnery equipment. An interesting feature on obstacles.
the turret is the teardrop-shaped port cover on the
left front near the gunner's position. The 2S1 has The vehicle has a relatively light weight of less
a direct fire sight besides its panoramic telescope. than 16 metric tons. It also has a ground pressure
The vehicle has a collective NBC overpressure and of approximately 0.5 kilograms per square centi-
filtration protective system. meter. This allows it to operate in swamps and
5-64
FM 100-2-3
5-65
FM 100-2-3
M-46
I' ! b
""
ANNE".
;r
t 7 --
DESCRIPTION: CAPABILITIES:
The 130-mm field gun M-46 has a recognizable Gun battalions of artillery brigades organic at
long, thin tube with a cylindrical, perforated front and army levels use the M-46. These bat-
(pepperpot-type) muzzle brake. It has a hydro- talions may be assigned to maneuver divisions as
pneumatic recuperator and a recoil cylinder located part of a divisional artillery group ()AG).
above and below the tube, respectively. For travel,
the crew withdraws the tube from battery to reduce The M-46 is an excellent indirect fire weapon
the overall length of the weapon. The rearward- with high muzzle velocity and exceptional range
angled, winged shield may then hide the recuper- (27,490 meters). It is also a formidable antitank
ator above the tube from sight. The gun has a weapon with impressive armor penetration capa-
manually operated horizontal sliding wedge breech- bility. Its tactical role usually is counterbattery.
block. It fires case-type, variable-charge, separate-
loading ammunition. It has night direct fire sights
(IR and/or passive in nature). REMARKS:
The gun is mounted on a two-wheeled split trail The M-46 first appeared in public in May 1954.
carriage with large sponge-filled rubber tires on The West originally knew it as the M1954. The
each of the single wheels. For travel, it has a armies of many countries, both communist and
two-wheeled limber. A truck or armored tractor can noncommunist, still use it. Since 1978, however,
tow it at speeds up to 50 kilometers per hour. The two new nuclear-capable guns, the 152-mm field
trails consist of steel plates welded into box-section gun 2A36 and the 152-mm SIP gun 2S5, have begun
construction. to replace the M-46 in Soviet forces.
5-66
FM 100-2-3
D-20
.f ""Z lc
x P
: , . ,..
DESCRIPTION:
The I)-20 uses the same carriage as the obso- engage armored targets with direct fire. A truck
lescent 122-mm field gun 1)-74. This short, split- or armored tractor (AT-L) can tow it.
trail carriage has distinguishable features: caster
LIMITA TIONS:
wheels, folded upward for travel, at the end of
each trail; a prominent central emplacement jack The I)-20 is a very large gun-howitzer, equating
connected to the bottom forward cradle; and a to 6-inch caliber. It is heavy for a simple towed
scalloped, winged shield with traveling central carriage. Its restricted mobility, however, is some-
portion. The tube, however, differs from that of what compensated for by its range.
the I)-74 in that it is much shorter (29 versus 47
calibers) and larger in diameter, and has a larger REMARKS:
double-baffle muzzle brake. Both guns have a two-
The I)-20 was formerly known as the M1955
cylinder recoil mechanism above the tube; both
or M-55. First introduced in 1955, it replaced the
tubes are prominently stepped, with a semi-
heavier, less powerful, 152-mm gun-howitzer ML-20
automatic, vertically sliding, wedge breechblock.
(M1937) in the Soviet and Warsaw Pact inventory.
Both guns also fire similar case-type, variable-
It is now organic to army/front-level artillery while
charge, separate-loading ammunition.
the SP version 2S3 is in the artillery regiment
organic to MRI)s and TI)s. All Warsaw Pact
CAPABILITIES:
armies except Bulgaria now import the l)-20. The
The I)-20 is organic to the artillery division of Soviet Army is now introducing a new 152-mm
a Soviet front and to the artillery brigade of a gun-howitzer 2A65. The 2A65 has an extended
TA or CAA. The circular emplacement jack and range of 30,000 meters and a conventional maxi-
caster wheels make it possible to rotate the whole mum 24,000-m range. It fires the same rounds as
gun swiftly up to 360 degrees. The gun also has the DI-20, including a semiactive laser-guided
direct fire sights for both day and night. It can projectile (SLP).
5-67
FM 100-2-3
2S3
DESCRIPTION:
The 2S3 comprises a modified version of the support for MRI)s and TI)s. Its maximum range
152-mm towed gun-howitzer 1)-20 and a chassis of 17,230 meters with a Frag-HE round is the
similar to the SA-4/GANEF launch vehicle. The same as that of the 152-mm towed gun-howitzer
thick tube extends beyond the front of the hull I)-20. It also fires a RAP round to an extended
by the length of the double-baffle muzzle brake. range of 20,500 meters. Unlike the 122-mm SIP
It differs from the D)-20 in its addition of a bore howitzer 2S 1, it is not amphibious.
evacuator just behind the muzzle brake; a brace
LIMITA TIONS:
attached just behind the bore evacuation supports
the tube in travel position. The running gear differs The twin recuperators above the tube restrict
from that of the SA-4 in that it has only six road the elevation to +63 degrees. Armor is thin-skinned,
wheels (with larger spaces between the three front providing only minimum protection for the four-
wheels only) and different spacing between the four man crew.
support rollers. REMARKS:
The driver sits in the left front of the vehicle, The 2S3 first appeared in the Soviet inventory
with the engine located on the right side. The in 1973. It somewhat resembles the US 155-mm
commander sits at the left center of the turret, SP howitzer M-109.
with the gunner in front of him. The loader is at Since its introduction, the 2S3 has gradually
the right side of the turret. The crew uses a hatch been replacing two other systems: the towed 152-mm
in the rear of the hull for loading ammunition. howitzer I)-1 (M1943) in the artillery regiment of
There is also a large hatch on the right side of MRDs, and the towed 122-mm howitzer D-30 in
the turret for loading ammunition and discarding the artillery regiment of both MRDs and TD)s. Also,
expended brass. The commander's cupola mounts the 2S3 is currently replacing some towed 152-mm
a 7.62-mm machine gun. artillery in the front-level artillery division. The
CAPABILITIES: Soviet Army is now introducing a new 152-mm
SP gun-howitzer 2S19. It probably has the same
The 2S3 provides highly mobile, all-terrain fire range as the towed 2A65.
5-68
FM 100-2-3
2A36
a ~s:: lk fI P
~x1~ ;;
pi
'x
DESCRIPTION/CAPABILI TIES:
The towed, nuclear-capable 152-mm field gun Soviet forces. It also shows the importance the
2A36, along with its SP counterpart 2S5, is replac- Soviets continue to place upon towed artillery for
ing the 130-mm field gun M-46 in the gun bat- supporting fires. The 2A36 has a maximum
talions organic to artillery brigades at front and range of 28,000 meters and an extended range of
army levels. This gun has a distinctive four- 33,000 meters.
wheeled carriage. The Soviets have fielded it since
1978 and now deploy it in their forces in Eastern REMARKS:
Europe. This deployment suggests the importance
that Soviet doctrine places on the capability to The provisional designation for the 2A36 was
deliver low-yield nuclear strikes relatively close to M1976.
5-69
FM 100-2-3
2S5
5-70
FM 100-2-3
M1931 (B-4M)
&,
~3~;
rrrr~~_~ i
,,_~a~
K- B
DESCRIPTION:
The 203-mm howitzer M1931 (B-4) has a rela- have adapted it to fire a nuclear round.
tively short tube, only 25 calibers long. It has a
hydraulic recoil buffer, a hydropneumatic recu- LIMI TA TIONS:
perator, and a screw-type breechblock. It fires
bag-type, variable-charge, separate-loading ammu- The M1931 has a very limited traverse of 10
degrees in either direction and a slow rate of fire
nition. Early models used a full-track, but not SP,
carriage in firing position and for short moves. of 0.5 rounds per minute. (Some reports indicate
For longer moves, the tube was removable for that the rate of fire is one round per minute.)
When towed, it must employ a two-wheeled limber
transport on a separate four-wheeled tube trans-
porter. On later models (B-4M), a large four- (front running gear).
wheeled carriage replaced the tracked one to
permit long moves without removing the tube. In REMARKS:
firing position, the wheels of the B-4M are raised, The M1931 (1-4) is a rather old weapon. The
and the weapon rests on a firing platform. Both Soviets developed it in 1931 and adopted it for
models use the same box trail and are towed by service in 1934. The modified version (B-4M) with
the AT-T tracked artillery tractor. four-wheeled carriage appeared only after World
CAPABILITIES: War II. It may be found in the high-powered artil-
lery brigade at front level. The 203-mm SP gun
The M1931 fires a 98.8-kg HE round to a 2S7 is now replacing the B-4M. The 2S7 mounts
maximum range of 18,025 meters. The Soviets on a tracked chassis.
5-71
FM 100-2-3
2S7
~-"ru~111~
DESCRIPTION:
The 2S7 is an unturreted gun mounted on a The massive gun tube is mounted well to the
long, tracked chassis. It has seven evenly spaced, rear, extending far beyond the front of the vehicle.
T-80-type road wheels and six support rollers. The In travel position, it is secured by a tie-down ring
drive sprocket is at the front of the suspension. attached to the center of the cab roof. The tube
The idler wheel at the rear can be lowered hydrau- has no muzzle brake but has a slight thickening
lically all the way to the ground, along with the at the muzzle. Above and below the rear of the
large, dozer blade-like spade on the rear of the gun tube are the recoil cylinder and recuperator.
vehicle; this gives the SP gun increased stability The power-assisted loading mechanism is on the
during firing. right side of the breech; the gunner sits on the
left side of the breech; and the cannonier services
The boat-like bow projects far beyond the front the gun from a platform on the left rear of the
of the suspension. Extending across the entire vehicle. A radio antenna is mounted atop the left
width of the bow is an armored cab for the driver side of the hull, roughly above the fifth road
and crew. The cab has two windows, which can wheel.
be covered with steel shutters; it also has an NBC CAPABILITIES:
collective protection system. Located directly be-
hind the cab is the engine compartment, with rec- The 2S7 is organic to the high-powered artil-
tangular exhaust vents on both sides of the hull. lery brigade, which may be allocated to a front.
5-72
FM 100-2-3
5-73
FM 100-2-3
Mortars
Mortar characteristics
82-MM
MORTAR 82-MM 120-MM 120-MM 240-MM
M1937 AUTOMATIC 120-MM MORTAR SP MORTAR 160-MM 240-MM SP
(1942-43 MORTAR MORTAR 2811 2S12 MORTAR MORTAR MORTAR
CHARACTERISTICS VERSION) 289 M1943 (M-120) (M-120) M-160 M-240 2S4
DOI 1943 1983 1943 early 1980s early 1980s 1953 1952 1975
STATUS obsolescent standard standard standard standard standard limited standard
standard
CREW 5 3 6 INA INA 6-7 8-9 INA
CALIBER (mm) 82 82 120 120 120 160 240 240
WEIGHT
Total (kg) 55.8 800 521.5 INA INA 1,314 4,240 INA
Firing Position (kg) 55.8 INA 283.5 INA INA 1,291 3,610 INA
MOUNT (type) baseplate and split-trail carriage, baseplate and baseplate and GAZ-66 baseplate and baseplate and SP, tracked
bipod with emplacement bipod bipod truck wheels wheels chasiss
jack
BASEPLATE WEIGHT (kg) 35* NA 94** INA INA 240 (baseplate 685 (baseplate INA
normally not normally not
detached) detached)
SIGHTING DEVICE collimator sight, INA collimator sight, INA INA panoramic tele- panoramic tele- INA
MP-42 MP-42 scope, MP-46M scope, MP-46M
(on-carriage); (on-carriage);
colliamtor (off- collimator (off-
carriage) carriage)
AMMUNITION (types) Frag-HE, smoke, Frag-HE, smoke, Frag-HE, HE, Frag-HE, Frag-HE, HE HE, nuclear, HE, nuclear,
illuminating, illuminating, smoke, illumi- smoke, illumi- smoke, illumi- chemical chemical
incendiary incendiary, nating, incen- nating, incen- nating, incen-
possible diary, possible diary, possible diary, possible
chemical chemical chemical chemical
PERFORMANCE
Elevation (") +45 to +85 0 to +85 +45 to +80 INA INA +50 to +80 +45 to +70 INA
Traverse (°) 10 total 20 total 6 total INA INA 25 total 17 total INA
Maximum range (m) 3,040 5,000 5,700 7,200 7,200 8,040 9,700*** 9,700***
Minimum range (m) 90 100 500 460 460 750 800 800
Rate of Fire
Maximum (rd/min) 25 40-60 9 10 10 3 1 INA
Sustained, 1st hr (rd) 210(10-fin rd) INA 70 INA INA 48 38 (25 with INA
140(6-fin rd) heaviest charge)
Muzzle velocity 210.5 (Frag-HE) INA 272 (Frag-HE, HE) INA INA 343 (HE) 362 (HE) INA
(m/sec)
UNIT OF FIRE (rd) 120 INA 80 INA INA 80 40 INA
EMPLACEMENT/DIS- varies varies varies varies varies varies varies INA
PLACEMENT TIME (min)
FOOTNOTES. "23.5 kilograms for bipod.
*68 kilograms for bipod.
*"'Also known to have extended-range capability of 20,000 meters.
5-74
FM 100-2-3
2139
'.i~i
... ,
.p*% "~
>.
1~..r*a
-4 -
DESCRIPTION:
The 82-mm automatic mortar 2B9 differs vastly chemical rounds. The Soviet press has reported a
from earlier mortars in its appearance. It uses a (cyclic) rate of fire of up to 120 rounds per minute.
conventional artillery carriage with split trails However, the practical rate of fire is approxi-
and an emplacement jack located at the front. In mately 40 to 60 rounds per minute; a 4-round
the firing position, the jack is lowered and the burst leaves the tube in as little as 2 seconds.
wheels pivot forward, lifting off the ground. This This quick volume of fire considerably increases
permits the three-man crew to rapidly traverse and the shock effect of the first burst of fire on targets
shift the fires of the weapon. The GAZ-66 truck such as infantry and crew-served weapons. The
may tow or carry the mortar. mortar has a shorter minimum range than the
M1943: 100 versus 500 meters. This and an
CAPABILITIES: increased rate of fire significantly improve the
firepower of an MRB. The 289 serves as an alter-
The 2B9 is breech-loaded with ammunition fed native to 120-mm mortars in some MRHs.
automatically from 4-round ammunition clips. It
can also be hand-loaded. In the photo above, the REMA RKS:
loader in the foreground is holding one clip;
The Soviet nickname for the 289 is Vasilck.
another clip is already on the loading tray on the
(This is pronounced va-sil-YOK and means
right of the mortar.
"cornflower.") The Soviets used an SP version
The 2B9 has a maximum range of 5,000 meters, mounted on the rear deck of the MT-ILB tracked
a minimum range of 100 meters, and a 10-degree armored vehicle in Afghanistan. It had the
traverse in either direction. It fires Frag-HIE, mortar elevated on steel boxes and its carriage
illuminating, incendiary smoke, and possibly wheels removed.
5-75
FM 100-2-3
M1943
DESCRIPTION:
The M1943 is a conventional, muzzle-loading, permits all-azimuth firing. The M1943 has a maxi-
smoothbore mortar with a large circular base- mum range of 5,700 meters and a minimum range
plate. For movement over short distances, it can of 500 meters.
quickly break down into three parts: barrel, bipod,
and baseplate. For normal travel, the whole
weapon folds together, and a GAZ-66 truck tows LIMI TA TIONS:
it on a two-wheeled tubular carriage. It also can
As with most Soviet mortars, the M1943 is diffi-
travel in the truck's bed. If necessary, animals can
cult to turn rapidly over a wide traverse. However,
pack the mortar in its three parts.
it can accommodate small-angle shifts (of up to 6
CAPABILITIES: degrees) without shifting the bipod.
5-76
FM 100-2-3
2B11
4 B
DESCRIPTION:
The 120-mm mortar 2111 resembles the older of 7,200 meters. It has a minimum range of 460
M1943 version, with several improvements. Like meters and is nine times lighter than a 122-mm
the M1943, the 2111 has a special safety device howitzer.
to prevent double loading when the mortar round
is not fired or not removed from the tube. When The 28111 is organic to the mortar batteries of
a round is loaded, it trips a tab on the tube, pre- MR3s and airborne regiments. Each battery has
venting another round from being loaded. This tab six or eight tubes.
shifts to the "ready" position when the round fires,
allowing the 211 to be reloaded. The 2811 is
mounted on a lightweight carriage for towing by REMARKS:
either the GAZ-66 or UAZ-469 light trucks. The 120-mm mortar originally identified as
CAPABILITIES: M-120 has at least two versions. The Soviets call
the towed version 28 11 and the self-propelled
The rate of fire is 10 rounds per minute with 6 version 2812. Some mortar batteries have replaced
seconds required to reload the tube for the next the older 120-mm mortar M1943 with the 21311,
firing. The 21311 mortar can fire a projectile others with the 2S12. Still other batteries employ
weighing almost 16 kilograms to a maximum range the 82-mm automatic mortar 2139 (Vasilek).
5-77
FM 100-2-3
2812 on GAZ-66
J
DESCRIPTION: REMARKS:
The 2S12 is a self-propelled version of the 120- The Soviet nickname for the 2S12 is Sani (sled).
mm mortar 2B11 (M-120) carried on the bed of a There are also reports of the 2S12 mounted on a
GAZ-66 truck. modified MT-LB chassis.
CAPABILITIES:
Same as for 2B11. The SP model provides even
more mobility for this versatile mortar.
5-78
FM 100-2-3
M-160
tir
DESCRIPTION:
The 160-mm mortar M-160 is a breech-loaded, to the firing position and fires the round with a
trigger-fired weapon. It has a relatively long tube, lanyard attached to the trigger. The M-160 has a
a large circular baseplate with four lifting handles, maximum range of 8,040 meters and a minimum
and permanently attached wheels. The GAZ-66 range of 750 meters.
general purpose cargo truck normally tows it.
REMARKS:
CAPABILITIES:
The Soviets introduced the M-160 in 1953 as a
The crew releases the entire tube from the base replacement for the older 160-mm mortar M1943.
and rotates it to a horizontal position for loading. Compared to its predecessor, the M-160 has a
A tray-served round then is hand-rammed into the longer tube and greater range. Some divisions
breech end of the tube. The crew returns the tube have the M-160 instead of 152-mm howitzers.
5-79
FM 100-2-3
M-240
K '
r 1 Ym " 4-
ibm
J
DESCRIPTION: LIMITATIONS:
The 240-mm mortar M-240 is the largest Soviet The M-240 has reasonable elevation but only
towed mortar. It is also the largest mortar used limited traverse. For loading, the crew rotates the
by any army in the world. It has a very large tube on its trunnions to the horizontal position.
baseplate with star-shaped ribbing on the under- Lifting the round to the breech, which is more
side, a very long tube (5,340 millimeters), small than five feet off the ground, is a four- or five-
vertical cylinders on either side of the tube just man task. The short range of the mortar must
above the axle, and a collar around the tube in present a problem for deployment in a nuclear role.
which the trunnions are located. A truck or tracked
artillery tractor tows the M-240 muzzle-first. It also REMARKS:
carries the ammunition and the eight- or nine-man
crew. The Soviets first produced the M-240, also
known as the M1953 or M-53, in 1952. The West
CAPABILITIES: first saw it in 1953. It is no longer in production.
Soviet forces originally employed it in roles where
The M-240 is a trigger-fired and breech-loaded
US forces would use medium artillery. In recent
mortar. It is similar in operation to the M-160.
years, they have adapted it to fire nuclear rounds
Its wheels remain attached during firing.
and relegated it to service in some independent
The M-240 has a maximum range of 9,700 high-powered artillery brigades at front level. They
meters and a minimum range of 800 meters. It have some in reserve stocks. The 240-mm SP
fires HE, chemical, and nuclear rounds, Its maxi- mortar 2S4, believed to be a modification of the
mum rate of fire is only one round per minute. M-240 system, is now in service.
5-80
FM 100-2-3
2S4
. 5
U
QJ~L P
ma
DESCRIPTION:
The 2S4 system comprises a heavy mortar meters. This SP version can fire to an extended
carried in an open mount atop the same type of range of 20,000 meters. The 2S4 can also fire
tracked chassis used for the SA-4 SAM system, chemical and nuclear rounds.
the 2S3 SP howitzer, and the 2S5 SP gun. The
The use of the SP mount overcomes the towed
suspension features six road wheels and four
M-240's significant shortcomings in mobility,
support rollers. It has more space between the
greatly decreasing the emplacement/displacement
first, second, and third road wheels. The mortar
time. It also circumvents serious handling and
travels with its muzzle forward; the muzzle does
loading problems for the massive 240-mm rounds.
not extend to the front of the vehicle, only even
A power-assisted rammer pushes rounds stowed in
with the first road wheel. The large baseplate has
the vehicle hull into the breech of the mortar; the
four flat sides, rounded corners, and a star pattern
mortar pivots on its trunnions to bring the breech
on its bottom. It is folded at a forward angle
near the rear of the hull for loading.
above the breech in travel position. The crew uses
a remote console to hydraulically lower the mortar LIMITA TIONS
over the back of the vehicle into firing position.
The barrel points rearward when the baseplate Like the M-240, the 2S4 has only limited tra-
rests on the ground. verse capability. The open mount provides no pro-
tection for the crew in firing position. The mortar's
short range must present a problem when the 2S4
CAPABILITIES: has a nuclear role.
The 2S4 is organic to the high-powered artillery REMARKS:
brigade which may be allocated to a front. The
mortar is essentially identical to the towed The 2S4 was first observed in 1975; therefore,
240-mm mortar M-240, which it is replacing. Like it originally received the provisional designation
the M-240, it is capable of firing a standard M1975. It is a replacement for the towed M-240
130-kg HE round to a maximum range of 9,700 in high-powered artillery brigades.
5-81
FM 100-2-3
Rocket Launchers
CREW 5 5 2 INA
MODEL Ural-375D (6 x 6) ZIL-131 (6 x 6) GAZ-66B (4 x 4) ZIL-135 (8 x 8)
WEIGHT, with launcher 14,850 10,200 6,000 approximately 23,000
and rockets (kg)
LENGTH, travel position (m) 7.42 7.00 5.655 approximately 9.30
WIDTH, travel position (m) 2.50 2.50 2.400 approximately 2.80
HEIGHT, travel position (m) 3.05 2.50 2.44 approximately 3.20
ROAD SPEED, maximum 75 75 87 approximately 65
(km/hr)
FUEL CAPACITY (liters) 360 340 210 approximately 770
ROAD RANGE (km) 750 525 875 approximately 520
5-82
FM 100-2-3
BM-21
4-
d;;
DESCRIPTION:
The BM-21 is distinguishable from other MRLs The BM-21 fires a rocket with a range of 20,380
by its square-cornered, 40-tube launching apparatus meters. Each launch tube is grooved to impart a
with 4 banks of 10 tubes. A protective canvas often slow rotary motion to the rocket. However, the
covers the apparatus. The BM-21 is mounted on rocket is primarily fin-stabilized. This combination
the Ural-3751) 6 x 6 truck chassis, which has a of spin- and fin-stabilization ensures closely
distinctive fender design and a spare tire on the grouped fire at ranges of up to 16 kilometers.
rear side of the cab. The BM-21 has no blast
On explosion, the warhead produces a great
shields on the driver's cab. However, the material
fragmentation effect and shock wave. The warhead
used in the cab windows and windscreen is strong
fill may be Frag-HE, chemical, or incendiary.
enough to withstand the overpressures and other
effects associated with the firing of 122-mm rockets. Because of its high volume of fire and large
area coverage, the BM-21 is well suited for use
CAPABILITIES: against troops in the open, for use in artillery
preparations, and for delivery of chemical concen-
The BM-21's crew can fire it either from the trations. One volley from a BM-21 battalion is 720
cab or remotely from a distance of up to 60 meters rounds. Because these weapons have a large circu-
when using a cable set. They can fire some or all lar error probable (CEP), they are not suited for
rockets at a fixed 0.5-sec interval. They can fire attacks against point targets.
single rockets manually at any desired interval.
This five-man crew can reload the launcher in 8 The Ural-3751) vehicle has a maximum road
to 10 minutes. speed of 75 kilometers per hour, a cruising range
5-83
FM 100-2-3
of 750 kilometers, and an exceptional cross- the smaller caliber of its rockets, the BM-21 also
country capability. can fire a greater quantity of rockets than the
earlier models. This makes it especially useful for
LIMITATIONS: area fire and for delivering massive surprise fires.
When firing rockets, the vehicle must park The rocket launcher battalion organic to each
obliquely to the target. This protects the unshielded MRD and TD uses the BM-21. Forces at front
cab from blast damage. and army levels also employ it. The 220-mm rocket
launcher (16-round) BM-22 is replacing it at front.
REMARKS:
In 1972, the Czechoslovak Army introduced a
The BM-21 entered service in 1964 as a replace- new version with the BM-21 launching apparatus
ment for the 140-mm (16- and 17-round) BM-14 mounted on a modified 10-ton TATRA 813 (8 x 8)
rocket launchers. It is now the most widely used truck. A reload pack of 40 additional rockets sits
truck-mounted rocket launcher in the Warsaw Pact between the launcher and the armored cab, allow-
forces. Older, heavier rocket launchers are seldom ing a decreased reload time of 1.5 to 3.0 minutes.
seen in front-line units. These would include the Although this combination is larger and heavier
200-mm (4-round) BMD-20, the 240-mm (12-round) than the Soviet BM-21 on the Ural-375D truck, it
BM-24, and the 250-mm (6-round) BMD-25. has the same road speed and a similar cruising
Although the BM-21 rockets are smaller in caliber range (600 kilometers). Its additional rocket supply
than previous models, the warhead is equal to that also permits greater tactical flexibility. This vari-
of the 140-mm rocket, and the range exceeds that ant, known as the RM-70, is now in service in at
of the older 140-mm and 240-mm models. Due to least Czechoslovakia and East Germany.
5-84
FM 100-2-3
BM-:
-4 I ; : 4 i .. ;;
,j*.
Iv
A:
Ai
. Yl :. -,a ~ d
X41w-:- r
t ^_'sll Y
'i4 ' r r
,rb~ r
Y"
Y ; i 'Ft
~1" C
F i Jt I~
ti x
,~,; aw.rC
00A, ,I st
" vi , +'
n A.
!
44ic
DESCRIPTION:
The 122-mm MRL 13M-21-1 closely resembles the effective against uncovered troops, during artillery
BM-21. However, the BM-21-1 variant uses a preparations, and for delivery of chemical agents.
ZIL-131 chassis instead of a Ural-3751); therefore,
it has a slightly lower profile than the BM-21. The LIMITA T'ONS:
rear fenders of the ZIL-131 rotate with the launcher Like most MRIs, the BM-21-1 produces a distinct
when the BM-21-1 is aimed for firing. A more blast area. The vehicle must park obliquely to the
important difference is that the BM-21-1 has only target to avoid damage to the vehicle's cab when
36 tubes, unlike the BM-21 which has 40. A the launcher fires the rockets.
launching apparatus has had the two center tubes
in each of the lower two banks removed. REMA RKS:
5-85
FM 100-2-3
BM-
i$A
dP
aF ;.:, snim.
ys
DESCRIPTION:
The 12-tube launcher, with its two tiers of 6 to a canvas-covered cab and a windshield that can
tubes, is mounted on the lower chassis of the be folded down to simplify air-landing or air-
GAZ-66B truck. The BM-21V launcher is traversed dropping. The BM-21V has a maximum highway
forward towards the cab while traveling. It uses speed of 87 kilometers per hour.
two stabilizing jacks when the lower chassis is
traversed toward the rear for firing.
REMA RKS:
CAPABILITIES:
The BM-21V received a provisional designation
The BM-21V fires the same 122-mm fin-stabilized of M1975 because that was the year in which
rocket as the BM-21 and BM-21-1. The rockets can it was first observed. The addition of V to the
deliver Frag-HE, chemical, or incendiary warheads equipment designator probably means
to a range of 20,380 meters. This airborne MRL uozdushnodesantnyy or airborne. The BM-21V
can fire all 12 rockets in 6 seconds or fire each mounts on the air-droppable GAZ-66B. This MRL,
singly. It can reload in 5 minutes. The B version can provide organic supporting fires to airborne
of the GAZ-66 has reduced weight and mass due or air assault units.
5-86
FM 100-2-3
BM-22
DESCRIPTION:
The 16-round 220-mm rocket launcher BM-22 spin-stabilized rockets have a range of 40,000
uses a ZIL-135 8 x 8 truck chassis similar to that meters, greatly exceeding the range of earlier
used for the FROG-7 system. Its launch tubes are Soviet heavy rocket launchers. The maximum rate
arranged in three banks, with the lower two banks of fire for the BM-22 is approximately one round
having six tubes each and the upper bank having every .5 seconds. Reloading the launcher with a
four tubes. second set of 16 rockets takes 15 to 20 minutes.
A reload vehicle, also based on the ZIL-135 The BM-22 is currently replacing the 40-round
chassis, complements the BM-22. It is a flatbed 122-mm rocket launcher BM-21 in the rocket
vehicle carrying 16 rockets arranged in two stacks launcher brigade of front-level artillery divisions.
positioned on either side of the vehicle bed. A However, it has not yet replaced the BM-21 in the
loading device which transfers the rockets from rocket launcher regiment at army level. It is not
the reload vehicle to the launcher is mounted expected to replace the BM-21 at division level.
between the two stacks.
CAPABILITIES: REMARKS:
The BM-22 fires rockets with Frag-HE, chemi- The West first saw the BM-22 in 1977, hence
cal, and ICM warheads. Submunitions for the ICM its preliminary designation MRL M1977. The
warheads include AP and AT mines, fragmentation Soviet designation is BM-22 rather than BM-27,
bomblets, and incendiary bomblets. The fin- and as previously assumed.
5-87
FM 100-2-3
Free rocket and surface-to-surface missile characteristics Free rocket and surface-to-surface missile vehicle characteristics
5-88
FM 100-2-3
FROG-7
"w
4dv
4
I .
The FROG-7 is the latest addition to the free The FROG-7 TEL vehicle provides no N (.'
rocket over ground (FROG) family of unguided, protection for the crew. The single-rail launcher
spin-stabilized, short-range, battlefield support has limited traverse.
artillery rockets. It employs a ZIL-135 TEL vehicle,
REMARKS:
which carries one rocket and an on-board crane
on an eight-wheeled chassis. A similar vehicle can The Soviets introduced the FROG-7A in 1965
transport three reload rockets for each TEL. The as a replacement for earlier FROG variants. Some
rocket is of conventional, single-stage design. It variants had been in service since the mid-1950s.
has a cylindrical warhead of the same diameter The FROG-1 and -2 are obsolete. Some non-Soviet
as the rocket body, giving it a cleaner and more Warsaw Pact armies still have the FROG-3, -4,
modern appearance than its predecessors. and -5 variants, mounted on a nonamphibious
version of the PT-76 light tank chassis. The Soviet
Army still has a few of these rockets. The FROG-5
CAPABILITIES:
still serves as a training rocket, and the FROG-6
The range of the rocket is 70 kilometers; the is a dummy rocket used for training purposes only.
cruising range of the TEL, vehicle is 400 kilometers. The FROG-7B, introduced in 1968, is essentially
The FROG-7 can deliver HE, nuclear, or chemical the same rocket as the FROG-7A, but with a
warheads. The FROG-7B variant also has an longer warhead section. The Soviets export non-
improved conventional munitions (ICM) warhead, nuclear versions of the FROG-7 to both Warsaw
with submunitions rather than a unitary warhead. Pact and some non-Warsaw Pact nations. The SS-21
The FROG battalion of Soviet divisions may have tactical ballistic missile is rapidly replacing the
the FROG-7A or -7B. FROG-7.
5-89
FM 100-2-3
SS-21/SCARAB
DESCRIPTION:
The tactical ballistic missile SS-21/SCARAB on-road or 29 kilometers per hour off-road in
uses a six-wheeled amphibious TEL similar to the support of operations. The SS-21 tactical ballistic
SA-8/GECKO SAM. Like the SA-8, it has good missile has a range of 70 kilometers. It also has
cross-country capability. It probably has an air improvements over the FROG(-7 in reaction time,
filtration and overpressure system for collective reliability, accuracy, and handling. The SS-21 has
chemical, radiological, and biological protection. three variants which can deliver IIE, nuclear,
The missile lies on the centerline of the TEL. chemical, and improved conventional munitions. It
There is space on both sides to transport equip- can deliver these warheads with a very high degree
ment. Protective doors on the top of the TEL cover of accuracy and reliability.
the missile during travel. These doors open to the
sides when the missile is erected to the vertical REMARKS:
position for firing. A modified version of the same The Soviets have nicknamed the SS-21 Tochka,
6 x 6 vehicle serves as a missile resupply vehicle which means "point." It first appeared in 1976 in
for the SS-21. the USSR. The West first reported it in WGF in
CAPABILITIES: 1981. The SS-21 is now rapidly replacing the
FROG-7 in divisions opposite NATO. Soviet armies
Both the SS-21 TEL and the resupply vehicle in WGF are consolidating division-level SS-21
can travel an average of 60 kilometers per hour battalions into army-level brigades.
5-90
FM 100-2-3
SS-1c/SCUD B
DESCRIPTION:
The SCUI)-series guided missiles are single- and army commanders an integral nuclear weapons
stage, short-range ballistic missiles using storable capability.
liquid propellants. Although originally transported
on a Joseph Stalin heavy tank chassis, the
SCUD B is now primarily mounted on a TEL REMARKS:
vehicle based on the MAZ-543 (8 x 8) wheeled
chassis. Unlike the FROG series of unguided The Soviets introduced the SCUI) B on the JS-3
missiles, the SCUI)s have movable fins. tracked chassis in 1961. It appeared on the
MAZ-543 wheeled chassis in 1965. It replaced the
CAPABILITIES: JS-3-mounted SCUD A, which had been in service
since the mid-1950s. Both Warsaw Pact and non-
The MAZ-543 TEL gives the SCUI) missile
Warsaw Pact nations have imported non-nuclear
system greater road mobility. It reduces the
variants of the SCUI) missiles. The SCUI) A is
number of support vehicles required, and still
also known as SS-lb, and the SCUI) B as SS-lc.
preserves a great choice in selecting off-road firing
positions. SCUD missiles are organic to SSM The SS-23 has greatly improved range (500
(SCUD) brigades at front/army level. Warheads kilometers). It also has increased accuracy and
can be HE, chemical, or nuclear. The missile, reduced reaction and refire times. The SS-23 had
launched vertically from a small platform at the begun to replace the SCUD B in forward areas.
rear of the TEL, has a range of 300 kilometers. However, the 1987 INF Treaty calls for removal
The SCUD-series missiles have the Soviet front of the SS-23 from the Soviet inventory.
5-91
FM 100-2-3
SS-12/SCALEBOA RD
DESCRIPTION:
The SS-12/SCALEBOARD uses the same The SCALEBOARI) is a front- and theater-level
MAZ-543 (8 x 8) chassis as the SCUD B. It differs, weapon system that gives the Soviet commander
however, in the environmental protective container a nuclear capability. To date, the SCALEBOARI)
that completely encloses its SCALEBOARI) missile; has appeared only with Soviet forces. The mid-
this is the primary recognition difference. The range missile can be stationed in the western part
latest version, SS-12 Mod 2iSCALEBOARD B, is of the USSR and still hit important targets in
a two-stage, solid-fuel system with improved range Central Europe.
(900 kilometers), accuracy, and warhead, compared
to the SCUD. REMARKS:
5-92
FM 100-2-3
Artillery-Associated Radars
Artillery-associated radar characteristics
( 7
2 ~
Y
, Acs
:5-
5-93
ANTITANK GRENADE ANTITANK GRENADE ANTITANK ROCKET ANTITANK ROCKET
CHARACTERISTICS LAUNCHER RPG-7V LAUNCHER RPG-16D LAUNCHER RPG-18 LAUNCHER RPG-22
LAUNCHER
Tube caliber (mm) 40 58.3 64 73
Length (m) 0.953 1.100 1.050 (extended) 0.850 (extended)
0.705 (closed) 0.750 (closed)
Weight (kg) 7.9 (empty) 10.3 2.70 (grenade 3.00 (approximately,
and launcher) grenade and launcher)
PROJECTILE
Projectile type rocket-assisted grenade rocket-assisted grenade rocket rocket
Warhead type HEAT HEAT HEAT HEAT
Warhead caliber (mm) 85/70* 58.3 64 73
Length (m) 0.905/INA* 0.600 0.670 INA
Weight, complete 2.25/INA* 3.0 14 - 1.8 (approximately)
round (kg)
PERFORMANCE
Muzzle velocity (m/s) 120 130 115 INA
Maximum velocity (m/s) 300 350 115 INA
Effective range (m) 300/500** 500/800** 200 250
Maximum range (m) 920 (limited by varies (self- varies (self- INA
self-destruct element) destruct element) destruct element)
Armor penetration 330 up to 375 up to 375 390 (approximately)
(mm @ 0 ° obliquity
@ any range)
Rate of fire (rd/min) 4-6 4-6 NA (disposable NA (disposable
weapon) weapon)
CREW 2 1 and ammunition bearer 1 1
UNIT OF FIRE (rd) 20 varies varies INA
DO0 1962 mid-1970s mid-1970s 1985
STATUS standard standard standard standard
RPG-7V
DESCRIPTION:
The RPG-7V is a recoilless, shoulder-fired, are four large, knife-like fins at the rear of the
muzzle-loaded, reloadable, antitank grenade projectile which unfold when the round leaves the
launcher. It fires an 85-mm (PG-7) or 70-mm tube, and smaller, offset fins at the very rear
(PG-7M) rocket-assisted HEAT grenade from a which produce a slow rotation. The maximum
40-mm smoothbore launcher tube. The launcher has effective range is 500 meters for stationary targets
two hand grips; a large optical sight; a thick, and 300 meters for moving targets. Maximum
wooden heat guard around the middle; and a large, range is 920 meters, at which point the projectile
flared blast shield at the rear of the tube. The self-destructs approximately 4.5 seconds after
launcher is 953 millimeters long without grenade, launching. The PG-7/-7M grenade, with a shaped-
and 1,340 millimeters with PG-7 grenade. The charge warhead, has armor penetration of 330
launcher weighs 7.9 kilograms and the PG-7 millimeters.
grenade weighs 2.25 kilograms.
The current RPG-7V model can mount a tele-
CAPABILITIES: scope and both infrared and passive night sights.
All RPG-7 models have optical sights which can
The RPG-7V is light enough to be carried and be illuminated for night sighting. They have open
fired by one person. However, an assistant sights for emergency use.
grenadier normally deploys to the left of the gunner
to protect him with small arms fire. The grenadier The RPG-7V is the standard squad antitank
normally carries two rounds of ammunition, and weapon in motorized rifle units. (Each squad has
the assistant grenadier carries three rounds. one weapon.) The weapon is also found in recon-
naissance units. Airborne units use the RPG-71),
The RPG-7V is an improved version of the which can separate into two sections.
earlier RPG-2. The RPG-2 had only one hand grip;
a smaller, simpler sight; a smaller blast shield;
and no heat guards. It fired a smaller, 80-mm, LIMI TA TIONS:
nonrocket-assisted grenade.
The RPG-7V requires a well-trained gunner to
The internal rocket motor of the PG-7/7M estimate ranges and lead distances for moving
grenade ignites after traveling approximately 11 targets. Crosswinds as low as 7 miles per hour
meters; this gives the projectile higher velocity can complicate the gunner's estimate and reduce
(sustained out to 500 meters), flatter trajectory, first-round hit probability to 50 percent at ranges
and better accuracy. Further enhancing accuracy beyond 180 meters. An RPG projectile screen of
5-95
FM 100-2-3
chain link fence will completely neutralize 50 II German Panzerfaust. The Soviets fielded it in
percent of the rounds and degrade the penetrating the early 1950s. The RPG-7, introduced in 1962, is
capability of the remaining rounds. a second-generation weapon employing a rocket-
assisted projectile. The current version, designated
Reloading and reaiming the RPG-7V requires RPG-7V, is in service throughout the Warsaw Pact
a minimum of 14 seconds. Firing leaves noticeable (except Czechoslovakia). The folding version for
signatures in the form of flash, smoke, and noise. airborne troops, introduced in 1968, was initially
The unprotected gunner is extremely vulnerable to known as RPG-8, but then redesignated RPG-71).
suppressive fires. A third generation weapon, the RPG-16D, incor-
porates further refinements resulting from battle
testing the RPG-7V in Southeast Asia and the
REMARKS:
Middle East. It has replaced the RPG-7I) as the
The first Soviet recoilless antitank grenade standard squad antitank weapon in Soviet airborne
launcher, the RPG-2, derived from the World War forces.
RPG-1 6D
\ J
DESCRIPTION/CAPABILITIES: LIMITATIONS:
The RPG-161) is a reloadable antitank weapon. The RPG-16DI) is heavier than the RPG-7V/-71),
It is shoulder-fired, either with or without the but one person can still carry and fire it.
support of a bipod mounted at the muzzle end. It
has an optical sight above the tube, a single hand
grip below the tube, and a conical blast shield at REMARKS:
the rear. The 58.3-mm rocket-assisted HEAT pro-
jectile PG-16 has an increased range of 500 to 800 The Soviets introduced the RPG-16D in the
meters and a greater armor penetration capability mid-1970s as a replacement for the RPG-7D).
of up to 375 millimeters, compared to the PG-7./-7M Western observers also expected a one-piece version
projectile of the RPG-7. As with the RPG-7, the (RPG-16?) to replace the RPG-7V in motorized rifle
RPG-16DI) grenadier probably carries two rounds of units; however, the Soviets have not yet deployed
ammunition. The assistant grenadier carries three such a weapon. To date, only the airborne forces
rounds and protects the grenadier with his assault have employed the two-piece airborne version
rifle. designated RPG-161).
5-96
FM 100-2-3
RPG-18
DESCRIPTION/CAPABILITIES:
The RPG-18 is a short-range, tube-launched, antitank grenadier provided for in the TOE. All
disposable infantry antitank rocket launcher. It is soldiers in the squad train on it. This increases
somewhat similar to the US LAW system. The the squad's capabilities to destroy tanks at short
lightweight tube presumably consists of fiberglass- range.
reinforced plastic. The operator carries the launcher
in a collapsed position and extends the inner tube LIMI TA TIONS:
to make the weapon ready to fire. It fires a 64-mm
rocket (PG-18) with an effective range of 200 meters The RPG-18 should not be fired if friendly
and a HEAT warhead capable of penetrating up personnel are in a 90-degree sector within 30
to 375 millimeters of armor. The fuze of the HEAT meters behind it. It also should not be fired if
grenade activates 2 to 15 meters after leaving the there are obstacles nearer than 2 meters in front
tube and self-destructs after a flight time of 4 to of it, or if the height of the line of fire is less
6 seconds. The trigger, safety catch, and rear peep than 20 centimeters. Once the tube is extended for
sight are roughly in the middle of the extended firing, it cannot be shoved back together again.
tube, or at the rear end of the collapsed tube. The
folding sight at the forward end of the tube is REMARKS:
calibrated for ranges of 50, 100, 150, and 200
meters. The Soviets introduced the RPG-18 in the mid-
1970s. It is widely distributed throughout the Soviet
The RPG-18 is probably a squad-level weapon. Army, including the airborne forces. For employ-
Unlike the RPG-7V/-7D and RPG-161), the RPG-18 ment in airborne units, the RPG-18 comes with a
is not linked to a specific person; that is, to the cover which protects it during parachute jumps.
5-97
FM 100-2-3
RPG-22
4!
CT
The RPG-22 is a short-range, tube-launched, Instructions printed on the side of the RPG-22
disposable, infantry antitank rocket launcher, launch tube indicate that back-blast covers a
similar to the US LAW system. The lightweight, 90-degree sector out to 30 meters behind the weap-
collapsible launch tube consists of two parts: the on; that it should not be fired if a wall is closer
outer tube made of fiberglass and a sliding inner than 2 meters behind it; and that the line of fire
tube made of aluminum. The inner tube extends should be at least 20 centimeters from the ground.
10 centimeters to the front of the outer tube in
firing position. It fires a 73-mm fin-stabilized rocket
with an effective range of 250 meters and a HEAT
warhead capable of penetrating approximately 390
millimeters of armor. REMARKS:
The trigger and the pop-up rear peep sight are The Soviets introduced the RPG-22 in 1985. In
in the middle of the extended tube. The pop-up time, it will probably replace the RPG-18. As with
front sight is at the forward end of the outer tube. the RPG-18, it has no dedicated grenadier; however,
The front sight is calibrated for ranges of 50, 150, all soldiers train to use the squad-level, throwaway
and 250 meters. weapon.
5-98
FM 100-2-3
Antitank Guns
72-MM 100-MM
CHARACTERISTICS RECOILLESS GUN ANTITANK GUN
SPG-9 T-12/MT-12
CREW 3 6-7
WEIGHT
Firing position (kg) 47.5 (tripod 12.0) 3,100
Travel position (kg) 47.5 (tripod 12.0) 3,100
LENGTH, travel position (m) 2.110 9.16
WIDTH, travel position (m) 0.990 1.78
HEIGHT, travel position (m) 0.800 1.44
FIRE CONTROL iron and optical; direct fire telescope;
IR and passive IRsystem for gunner
night sights mounted on gun
AMMUNITON (types) rocket-assisted HVAPFSDS, HEAT-FS,
HE, HEAT Frag-HE
PERFORMANCE
Elevation (0) -3 to +7 -6 to +20
Traverse (0) 30 total 54 total
Maximum range (m) 1,300 (limited 8,200 (18,000-21,000
by self-destruct with gun at 450)
element)
Effective direct fire 1,000 1,000 (HEAT)
range (m) 2,000 (HVAPFSDS)
Muzzle velocity (m/sec) 435 900 (HEAT)
1,500 (HVAPFSDS)
RATE OF FIRE
Maximum (rd/min) 6 (practical) 10 (practical)
Sustained, 1st hr (rd) INA 75
ARMOR PENETRATION (mm @ 400 (HEAT, any range) 400 (HEAT, any range)
0 ° obliquity @ 1,000 m) 225 (HVAPFSDS)
UNIT OF FIRE (rd) 80 60
Emplacement/displacement INA 2-3/2-3
time (min)
DOI 1970 1965
Status standard standard
a i
5-99
FM 100-2-3
SPG-9
- ------- 4t~
sr
* cr
_
*(%jmmt
drll~ "-Ilka
M-
~6
.
j~Jc
rJ
5):
.mot
N-. 0C
DESCRIPTION:
The SPG-9 is a tripod-mounted, recoilless anti- has an effective range of 1,000 meters and can
tank gun that fires a 73-mm fin-stabilized, rocket- penetrate 400 millimeters of armor. It has a high
assisted HEAT projectile. The launcher is 2,110 muzzle velocity (435 meters per second) which is
millimeters long and weighs 47.5 kilograms (59.5 increased to 700 meters per second by rocket assist.
kilograms with tripod). The projectile weighs 3.5 The SPG-9 is organic to the antitank platoon of
kilograms. Its great length is due to the propellant a BTR-equipped MRB. The Soviets usually employ
charge case attached behind the fins. The SPG-9 it with mutually supporting ATGMs.
can also fire a 4-kg rocket-assisted HE round.
CAPABILITIES: REMARKS:
The SPG-9 is manportable, but a truck or APC The SPG-9 began replacing the previous recoil-
normally carries it. It must be dismounted and less antitank guns (82-mm B-10 and 107-mm B-11)
placed on its tripod for firing. It normally has a around 1970. It is now in service not only in Soviet
crew of three. Both IR and passive night sights MRBs, but also in the Polish, Bulgarian, East
are available. The rocket-assisted HEAT projectile German, and Hungarian armies.
5-100
FM 100-2-3
MT-12
>'' ~:
£ t
.4
1' i
. ct,;
. .~
t
'.
ar
DESCRIPTION:
The T-12 is a 100-mm smoothbore antitank gun round can penetrate about 225 millimeters at 1,000
mounted on a two-wheeled, split-trail carriage, meters. The theoretical rate of fire is reportedly
with a single caster wheel near the trail ends. The 14 rounds per minute; however, rate for aimed fire
long (8,484-mm) gun tube has a cylindrical, is only 6 rounds per minute, and the maximum
multiperforated muzzle brake which is only practical rate is 10 rounds per minute.
fractionally larger in diameter than the thin barrel.
The MT-12 variant has a winged shield angled to LIMITA TIONS:
the rear on both sides and an additional recoil
The T-12 or MT-12 can function as a field gun
cylinder above the breech on the right. Both
only under limited circumstances; this is due to
versions frequently mount infrared night sighting
its limited maximum elevation (+20 degrees). With
equipment.
trails dug in to provide 45-degree elevation,
CAPABILITIES: maximum range is 18,000 to 21,000 meters.
5-101
FM 100-2-3
WEIGHT, preflight (kg) 270 (A), 29.0 (B,C) 11.3 7.4 12-18 WEIGHT, preflight (kg) INA INA INA
LENGTH, overall (m) 1.16 0.864 0.863 1.30 (tube) LENGTH, overail (i) INA INA INA
DIAMETER, (mm) 148 120 119 150 DIAMETER, (mm) INA INA 125
FIN SPAN, (i) 0.70 0.37 0.354 INA FIN SPAN, (i) INA INA INA
RANGE RANGE
Maximum (m) 2,500 (A), 3,500 3,000 2,000 4,000 Maximum (i) 5,000 1,000 4,000
(B), 4,000 (C) Minimum (m) 500 INA INA
Minimum (i) 500 (A, 8), INA (C) 500 (A), INA (C) 70 100 APPROXIMATE TIME OF 11 (to 5,000 m) INA supersonic
APPROXIMATE TIME OF 17 (A), 23 (B), 25 11 16 FLIGHT TO MAXIMUM
FLIGHT TOMAXIMUM 26-27 (C) RANGE (sec)
RANGE (sec)
WARHEAD
WARHEAD Type HEAT HEAT HEAT
Type HEAT HEAT HEAT HEAT Weight (kg) INA INA INA
Weight (kg) 5.4 2.5 2.5 3.0 ARMOR PENETRATION 600-700 INA 700-800
ARMOR PENETRATION 500+ 400+ 500-600 500-600 (mm @ 0° obliquity @ any
(mm @ 0° obliquity @ range)
any range)
GUIDANCE SACLOS SACLOS SACLOS
GUIDANCE MCLOS (A, B), MCLOS (A), SACLOS SACLOS COMMAND LINK radio wire radio
SACLOS (C) SACLOS (C)
LAUNCHING PLATFORM Mi-24/HIND ElF manpack T64B, T-80
COMMAND LINK radio wire wire wire
DOI 1973 1979 around 1981
LAUNCHING PLATFORM BRDM/BRDM-2 (A, B) manpa'k (A) manpack BRDM-2,
Mi-8T/HIP E (8, C) BRM/BRDM-2 BMP-1, BMP-2, BMP-2 STATUS standard standard standard
Mi-24/HINO AID BMP-1, BMD-1 BMD-1
(B, C) Mi2/HOPLITE,
Mi-8TB/HIP F
5-102
FM 100-2-3
AT-2/SWATTER on BRDM
1-*-- -at.
rar;l~lll
5-103
FM 100-2-3
The Mi-8T HIP E can mount two SWATTERs Mi-24/HIND A and D mount two SWATTERs on
above each of its two external weapons racks. The wingtip launch rails on each of their two stub
wings.
1r;;
-r
k~I _
tlp
-C--
5-104
FM 100-2-3
AT-3/SAGGER on BRDM-2
~,~*~
Ya u
}. . lr ^ r r
/
DESCRIPTION:
The SAGGER is a wire-guided ATGM with a missile by means of a firing button on the control
HEAT warhead. The missile is 864 millimeters in box. He then uses the control box's periscope sight
length, 120 millimeters in diameter, and 11.3 and control stick to guide the missile to the target.
kilograms in weight. It has several launch con-
figurations: manpack, armored vehicle, and even On BR1)M BRI)M-2 scout vehicles, six launch
helicopter. rails are mounted on the underside of a retractable
armored cover, with eight additional missiles
With the manpack version, the operator carries carried inside the vehicle. The BMP-1 and BM1)-1
the SAGGER missile in a fiberglass "suitcase." combat vehicles have single launch rails mounted
He attaches it by a hinged support to the lid of above the 73-mm main gun and carry a total of
the case. From that position, he launches the four and three missiles, respectively.
5-105
FM 100-2-3
The Mi-2/HOPLITE helicopter can carry two carries two missiles and the control box in suit-
SAGGERs on each side of its cabin. The Mi-STB/ cases. The assistant gunner carries two more
HIP F carries six SAGGERs. missiles in suitcases. The backup gunner carries
the RPG-7V. The team can set up, check out, and
CAPABILITIES:
fire one missile in 5 minutes or all four missiles
The SAGGER can engage targets at ranges of in 12 to 15 minutes. Using a four-position selector
500 to 3,000 meters and penetrate over 400 milli- switch on the control box, the gunner can fire up
meters of armor. It employs an MCLOS guidance to four missiles consecutively. He can remotely fire
system in which the operator must observe both missiles from positions up to 15 meters from the
missile and target and guide the one towards the launchers. For targets at ranges of less than 1,000
other. The wire-guided missile is invulnerable to meters, the gunner can guide the missile by eye;
electronic countermeasures and has a very small for longer ranges, he must use the 8-power magni-
percentage of malfunctions. fying periscopic sight. The RPG-7V gunner usually
is deployed 150 to 200 meters in front of the
The retractable launcher on the BRI)M-2 vehicle SAGGER position to cover targets inside the mini-
has the ability to traverse 70 degrees to the left mum SAGGER range of 500 meters. The antitank
or right with elevation varying from 3.5 to 17 platoon also has two SPG-9s which may deploy
degrees. with the manpack SAGGERs.
The AT-3c/SAGGER C variant employs SACLOS
guidance. It is mounted primarily on the BRD)M-2, BRI)M/BR1)M-2 SAGGERs are organic to the
but it may also be mounted on the HIP F and antitank missile battery of MRRs and airborne
HOPLITE helicopters. These heliborne systems regiments, to the antitank battalion of MRI)s, to
provide greater flexibility to the ground command the antitank regiment of CAAs, and to the antitank
but at a greater vulnerability cost to the launch brigade of artillery divisions. The BRD)M/BRI)M-2
platform. vehicles have a reaction time of one minute to fire
from a completely buttoned-up mode. The crew can
The antitank platoon of a BTR-equipped MRB fire six missiles without reloading, and the vehicle
has two ATGM squads, each with two manpack can carry eight additional missiles inside. Succes-
SAGGER firing teams. Each three-man team has sive missiles can be fired and tracked within five
a control box, four SAGGER missiles, and an seconds of the previous missile's impact. The
RPG-7V antitank grenade launcher. The gunner gunner can operate either from within the vehicle
5-106
FM 100-2-3
or from a remote position up to 80 meters away. launching gives off a gray smoke cloud and a loud
The vehicle has a two-man crew that includes the roar, its signature is difficult to detect on the
commander/gunner and the driver. They also have battlefield.
assault rifles and an RPG-7V antitank grenade
launcher.
REMARKS:
LIMITA TIONS:
The SAGGER, also known by the designation
The SAGGER A gunner must visually track AT-3, was first seen in 1961. It is more compact
target and missile simultaneously; this requires than the earlier AT-1/SNAPPER and AT-2/
extensive training and constant practice. Although SWATTER ATGMs, but carries an equally powerful
the missile leaves the launcher armed and can warhead. In recent years, the Soviets have retro-
detonate and kill at very short range, it can be fitted some SAGGER systems, designated AT-3c,
captured by the gunner only at ranges of 500 to with semiautomatic IR/wire guidance systems.
800 meters. Under combat conditions, however, Only the vehicle- and helicopter-mounted missiles
most gunners probably can successfully engage have been so retrofitted. This is obviously an
targets only between 1,000 and 3,000 meters. The interim measure pending the full deployment of
missile has a very long flight time to the target: longer-range, second-generation AT-5/SPANDREL
12.5 seconds to 1,500 meters, and 25 seconds to and AT-6/SPIRAL missiles. The AT-4/SPIGOT is
3,000 meters. Evasive action is effective against replacing manpack SAGGERs as well as those
it, especially at long range. Although a SAGGER mounted on the BMP-1 and BMD-1.
5-107
FM 100-2-3
A T-4/SPIGOT
s." ,y ft
"",
""r--:-
!i!r ~_5
r "~
i~
)~
")
L"'
DESCRIPTION:
The AT-4/SPIGOT is a tube-launched, wire- The Soviets originally designed the AT-4 as a
guided, SACLOS, ATGM system, similar in many ground-launched weapon system. However, turrets
respects to the US TOW system. The AT-4 system of the BMP-1 and BMI)-1 combat vehicles can
consists of three major components: the SPIGOT mount the AT-4 launcher. The BRDM-2 launcher
missile, the launch tube, and the missile launcher. vehicle of the AT-5 system and the launcher on
The missile is 863 millimeters long and 119 milli- the BMP-2 can fire the SPIGOT missile.
meters in diameter; it weighs 7.4 kilograms and
has a HEAT warhead. The launch tube is 1,100
millimeters long, 130 millimeters in diameter, and CA PA BILITIES:
5.2 kilograms in weight. It serves to store and
The SPIGOT has a minimum range of only 70
carry the missile. The tripod-mounted launcher for
meters and a maximum range of 2,000 meters.
ground-launched employment has a periscope sight
Missile speed is estimated at 185 meters per second,
attached to its left side. The sight and the missile
with a maximum flight time of 11 seconds. The
tracker comprise a single unit, which is mechani-
warhead, which is probably smaller than that of
cally attached to the launch-tube connecting rail
the SAGGER, has an armor penetration capability
so both move together in elevation. A locking lever
of 500 to 600 millimeters. Probability of first-round
allows the complete periscope sight and missile hit should be at least the same as for the semi-
tracker unit to be released and rotated into a folded
automatic AT-3c/SAGGER C; that is, 90 percent.
position for transport. The monocular optical sight
has 4-power magnification and a 4.5-degree field The SAC1OA)S guidance system increases accu-
of view. The crew loads the SPIGOT missile by racy and reduces operator training requirements
sliding the tube onto the launch supports from the since it is no longer necessary for the operator to
rear until the electrical contacts and a mechanical track target and missile simultaneously. The opera-
catch engage; then the system is ready for launch. tor keeps his sight trained on the target while the
5-108
FM 100-2-3
9
5-109
FM 100-2-3
A T-5/SPANDREL
-:4~
!i 01d
~
.. 1~
- - Y- - -~ p,.--z
DESCRIPTION:
The AT-5/SPANI)REL is a wire-guided, can launch either the SPIGOT or SPANI)REL
SACLOS, ATGM system mounted on the BRI)M-2 missile. The basic onboard load for the BMP-2 is
amphibious scout car chassis. The dimensions and four missiles.
shape of the launch tube are similar to those of
the AT-4/SPIGOT, but the SPANDREL missile is CAPABILITIES:
considerably heavier. The SPANI)REL launch tube
has a blow-out cap at the front, and it is flared The SPANDREL has a maximum range of 4,000
at the rear. Five SPANI)REL missiles, or any meters and a minimum range of 100 meters. Other
combination of SPIGOT and SPANI)REL missiles, capabilities are essentially the same as those listed
are carried on a traversable mount just behind the above for the AT-4/SPIGOT, except for the time
two front cupolas of the BR1)M-2. A bowed hatch of flight.
in the vehicle roof immediately behind the launcher
allows the mount to be folded backwards into the LIMI TA TIONS:
hull for reloading under armor protection. The
vehicle carries an additional 10 reload missiles Same as for the AT-4/SPIGOT.
inside. A rotatable optical sighting/tracking peri-
scope, similar in appearance to the periscope on REMARKS:
the AT-4/SPIGOT launch apparatus, is mounted
atop the gunner's hatch on the right front of the The Soviets nicknamed the AT-5/SPANI)REL
vehicle roof. system Konhurs (contest). They introduced it around
1974 or 1975, although they did not display it
A single-tube AT-5 launch platform with an publicly until the Red Square parade on November
integrated optics/tracker housing is mounted atop 1977. The BRI)M-2-mounted AT-5 system will even-
the turret of the BMP-2 amphibious infantry tually replace all vehicle-mounted AT-2 and AT-3
combat vehicle. As with the BRI)M-2 launch ped- systems in the Soviet Army. It is already opera-
estal configuration, this variant of the AT-5 system tional in Warsaw Pact countries.
5-110
FM 100-2-3
A T-6/SPIRAL on HIND E
DESCRIPTION:
The AT-6/SPIRAL is a tube-launched, SACLOS, 500 meters. Missile speed is probably about 450
ATGM mounted on the Mi-24/ HINI) E and F heli- meters per second. The warhead could weigh up
copters. It replaces the heliborne AT-2/SWATTER to 10 kilograms with an armor penetration capa-
variants found on previous HIND models. Nor- bility of 600 to 700 millimeters. Probability of
mally, there are I-shaped launch fixtures for two first-round hit should be at least the same as for
SPIRAL launch tubes on each wingtip of the HINDI) the AT-2c; that is, 90 percent. The SACLOS guid-
E and F. However, the HIND E and F may carry ance system probably operates the same as the
a second AT-6 launch platform on the outboard AT-4 SPIGOT and AT-5 iSPANI)REL, except that
universal pylon on each wing. This allows them the SPIRAL, is not wire-guided.
to mount a total of 8 SPIRAL missiles. Some
HIND E and F models have "stacked" AT-6 launch LIMITA TIONS:
platforms on the wingtip pylons and the outboard
universal pylons, for a possible total of 16 During the flight time of the SPIRAL to the
SPIRALs. Unlike the AT-4/SPIGOT and AT-5 target (estimated at approximately 11 seconds to
SPANDREL, this missile is not wire-guided. The 5,000 meters), the target can take evasive action,
SPIRAL uses a SACLOS system with IR missile but the helicopter launch platform has limited
tracking and radio guidance (similar to the uprated ability to take evasive action itself since the AT-6
AT-2c/SWATTER C). It is much larger than pre- operator must keep the target in his sight.
vious Soviet ATGMs.
REMARKS:
CAPABILITIES:
Although introduced in 1973, the AT-6 SPIRIAL
The SPIRAL has a maximum range estimated was first observed on the HINI) E in 1978. Some
at 5,000 meters. Its minimum range may be similar sources credit the SPIRAL with a range of up to
to the earlier AT-2 SWATTER ATGMs; that is, 7,000 meters.
5-111
FM 100-2-3
A T-7/SAXHORN
~:
"Q;
i- r :~~J
~
I- C:a:
s::
R~b\t, t"~~\~zp~
Z d
DESCRIPTION:
The AT-7 SAXHORN is a tube-launched, tor tracks the target visually using a monocular
SACLOS, ATGM system with a wire command scope. The missile is guided automatically to the
link. One man can carry and operate it, but its target on which the operator keeps the crosshairs
crew normally consists of two men. The second of his sight.
man probably carries additional missile canisters.
L IMI TA TIONS:
CAPABILITIES:
Same as for the AT-4/SPIGOT.
The AT-7 system is organic to the machine
gun, antitank platoon of the BTR-equipped MRC. REMARKS:
This platoon has three manpack launchers.
The AT-7/SAXHORN system was introduced in
The SAXHORN missile, with a HEAT warhead, 1979 and is the Soviet equivalent of the US )ragon
has a maximum range of 1,000 meters. The opera- system.
5-112
FM 100-2-3
A T-8/SONGSTER
'7
DESCRIPTION:
The AT-8 SONGSTER is a tank-gun-launched visually using a monocular periscope; the missile
ATGM system with SACLOS guidance and a is guided automatically to the target on which he
radio-frequency guidance link. It is known to be keeps the crosshairs of his sight. The missile has
fired by the T-64B and T-80 medium tanks. a primary antitank role, but it also has a secon-
dary antihelicopter role.
CAPABILITIES:
5-113
ARMAMENT CHARACTERISTICS 23-MM ZU-23 23-MM ZSU-23-4 30-MM 2S6 57-MM S-60
CREW 5 4 4 7
WEIGHT, travel/firing position (kg) 930 (estimated)/950 34,000 4,763/4,763
see vehicle
LENGTH, travel/firing position (mm) 4.60/4.60 characteristics INA 8.84/8.84
WIDTH, travel/firing position (mm) 1.86/2.41 INA 2.08/6.93
HEIGHT, travel/firing position (mm) 2.07/1.28 INA 2.37/6.02
GUN
Caliber (mm) 2 x 23 4 x 23 4 x 30**** lx 57
Ammunition loading (type) 2 box magazines metallic link INA 4-rd clip
2/50-rd metallic belts (about 500
link belt rounds per belt)
AMMUNITION (types), HEI, HEI-T, API-T HEI, HEI-T, API-T INA Frag-HE-T, APC-T
PERFORMANCE
Elevation (O) -10 to +90 -4 to +85 INA -4 to +87
Traverse (*) 360 360 INA 360
Maximum horizontal range (m) 7,000 7,000 INA 12,000
Ground target range (m) 2,000 2,000 INA INA
Maximum vertical range (m) 5,100 (about 3,500 5,100 (about 3,500 INA 8,800 (about 7,400
w/self-destruct fuzing) w/self-destruct fuzing) INA w/self-destruct fuzing)
Tactical AA range (m) 2,500* 2,500* 4,000 6,000 (off-carriage fire
control)
4,000 (on-carriage fire
control)
Cyclic rate of fire (rd/min) 800-1,000 per barrel 800-1,000 per barrel INA 105-120
Muzzle velocity (m/sec) 930-1,000** 930-1,000** INA 960-1,000***
Armor Penetration (m 24.1/19.3 24.1/19.3 INA 101.1/96.5
@ 0° obliquity (API-T) (API-T) (APC-T)
@ 500/1,000 m)
UNIT OF FIRE (rd) 1,200 2,000 INA 200
BASIC LOAD ON VEHICLE (rd) INA 2,000 INA INA
EMPLACEMENT/DISPLACEMENT 15-20sec/35-40sec varies, dependent on INA 1 min/3 min
TIME potential or actual fire
mission
FIRE CONTROL optical-mechanical comput- on-board GUN DISH fire- on-board HOT on-carriage: optical-mechanical
ing sight (AA); control radar, electronic SHOT fire computing sight (AA), straight-
straight-tube telescope computer, and optical control radar tube telescope (ground);
(ground) sights off-carriage: PUAZO-5 director
and SON-4 (WHIFF) radar (old),
PUAZO-6/60 director and
SON-9 or -9A (FIRECAN)
radar (newer), or FLAP
WHEEL fire control radar
(newest)
PRIME MOVER UAZ-69, GAZ-63, or GAZ-66 NA NA Ural-375 or AT-T
DOI 1962 1965 1986 1950
STATUS standard standard standard standard
5-115
FM 100-2-3
ZU-23
pn~
~-:8 ~,a 1
:::
~ i~F
DESCRIPTION:
The ZU-23 comprises twin 23-mm cannons on The ZU-23 fires the same ammunition as the
a towed two-wheel carriage. The cannons mount 23-mm SP AA gun ZSU-23-4. On the towed
side-by-side between large ring-type trunnions. In system, ammunition feeds from box magazines
appearance, the ZU-23 resembles the 14.5-mm mounted on the outside of each trunnion. Reload-
ZPU-2; however, the shape and placement of the ing is fast and uncomplicated. The magazines are
ZU-23 ammunition boxes (at right angles to the easily accessible. The beginning link of the new
gun carriage) and prominent muzzle flash suppres- belt attaches to the link of the last old cartridge.
sors are distinguishing features. This last cartridge automatically interrupts the
firing cycle when it reaches the feedway and
signals the bolt to remain open.
CAPABILITIES:
LIMITA TIONS:
The ZU-23 is a highly mobile, air-droppable
weapon. A battery of 6 ZU-23s is organic to Soviet One drawback of the ZU-23 is its inability to
air assault brigades, as well as to airborne regi- fire anything but automatic fire.
ments. A battalion of 18 ZU-23s is organic to the REMARKS:
Soviet airborne division. It is that division's
principal antiaircraft artillery (AAA) weapon. It Introduced in 1962, the ZU-23 is the Soviets'
has an effective AA range of 2,500 meters. It can newest lightweight, automatic, towed AA gun. It
also be effective against lightly armored ground is used extensively by airborne units and possibly
vehicles. by some MRRs that have not yet converted to the
ZSU-23-4/SA-9 air defense battery. ZU-23s also
In firing position, the ZU-23 is leveled by jacks provide close-in air defenses for an SA-4 brigade.
and stabilized on a three-point base. It uses an
optical-mechanical computing sight for AA fire The Soviets have exported the ZU-23 to many
and a straight-tube telescope for ground targets. countries. Some of these countries have added a
The crew can fire the gun from the traveling posi- degree of mobility to the system by mounting it
tion in emergencies. on various trucks and armored vehicles.
5-116
FM 100-2-3
ZSU-23-4
DESCRIPTION:
The ZSU-23-4 is a fully integrated, SP AA TRs. Two ZSU-23-4s will usually support each of
system with four liquid-cooled 23-mm automatic can- the two first-echelon battalions. These two
nons mounted on the front of a large, flat, weapons are normally separated by 200 meters,
armored turret. The chassis has many components and they typically travel 400 meters behind the
borrowed from other Soviet armored vehicles. The battalion's leading elements.
suspension system resembles that of the PT-76
The ZSU-23-4 is not amphibious, but has a
and ASU-85; that is, it has six road wheels and
fording capability of just over one meter. I)uring
no track support rollers. The driver sits in the
river assault operations, the ZSU-23-4s would be
left front of the hull; the rest of the crew (the
ferried to the far bank immediately after the lead-
commander, gunner, and radar operator) sit in
ing companies.
the turret. The GUN DISH fire control radar
mounted on the rear of the turret can fold down The ZSU-23-4 has the capability to both acquire
during travel. and track low-flying aircraft targets, with an effec-
tive AA range of 2,500 meters. It also is capable
The Soviets have produced a number of dif-
of firing on the move because of its integrated
ferent ZSU-23-4 models. These are distinguishable
radar/gun stabilization system. The high-frequency
externally by the types of stowage boxes on the
operation of the GUN D)ISH radar emits a very
turret and minor modifications in the mounting
narrow beam that provides excellent aircraft
of the guns.
tracking while being difficult to detect or evade.
CAPABILITIES: Hlowever, such a frequency also dictates a limited
range; linking the system to other long-range
A platoon of four ZSU-23-4s, along with four acquisition radars in the area can compensate for
SA-9/GASKIN SAM systems, is organic to the air this. The ZSU-23-4 can also engage lightly
defense missile and artillery battery of MRRs and armored ground vehicles.
5-117
FM 100-2-3
The four guns are water-cooled and have a ZSU-23-4 receives a degree of protection from the
cyclic rate of fire of 800 to 1,000 rounds per thin armor (maximum thickness 9.4 millimeters in
minute each. However, the gunner normally fires the hull, 8.9 millimeters in the turret). A radiation
them in bursts (2 to 3 rounds per barrel) to reduce detection and warning system and an air filtra-
ammunition expenditure and prolong barrel life. tion and overpressure system provide collective
Each ZSU-23-4 carries about 2,000 rounds onboard. NBC protection.
Supply trucks, which follow the ZSUs at a
distance of 1.5 to 2.5 kilometers, carry an esti- LIMITATIONS:
mated additional 3,000 rounds for each of the
four ZSUs. Electronic target acquisition, tracking, Heavy machine gun fire can penetrate the hull
and ranging are automated; an onboard computer and turret. Tread and road wheels are vulnerable
determines superelevation and azimuth lead. to artillery fire. Frag-HE rounds can penetrate the
Conventional optical sights also are available. armor, destroy the radar dish, or rupture the liquid
coolant sleeves of the 23-mm cannons. The system
The onboard load normally mixes two types of. is also vulnerable to ECM.
ammunition at a ratio of three HEI-T rounds per
one API-T round. An HEI round is also available. REMARKS:
The HEI-T and HEI rounds are intended for
defeating aircraft by blast, fragmentation, or The ZSU-23-4, introduced around 1965, is called
incendiary effect. However, they may also be used Shilka by the Soviets. The rest of the Warsaw
against personnel in a ground role. The API-T Pact has deployed it widely since 1970. Despite
round can penetrate lightly armored ground tar- the ZSU-23-4's good record, the 30-mm SP AA
gets and aircraft and defeat them by an incen- system 2S6 is replacing it. The 2S6 system, previ-
diary effect. Tracers facilitate correction of fire. ously known as SP AA gun M1986, has improved
AA range, rate of fire (per barrel), and fire-control
The An-22/COCK or I1-76/CANDID transport equipment. The newer system is mounted on a
aircraft or the Mi-26/HALO A heavy-lift helicop- more heavily armored chassis derived from the
ter can airlift the ZSU-23-4. The crew of the SA-4/GANEF SAM launcher vehicle.
5-118
FM 100-2-3
2S6
DESCRIPTION:
The 2S6 system integrates four 30-min auto- and missiles allows the 2S6 to replace both the
matic cannons with launchers for eight SA-19 ZSU-23-4 SP AA guns and the SA-13 SAM sys-
SAMs on the same chassis. In addition to two tems at this level. The separate radars for target
guns and four SAM launchers on each side, the acquisition and fire control enable the 2S6 to
turret mounts a fire control radar on its front and search for and engage targets simultaneously.
a target acquisition radar on its rear. The sus- Compared to the ZSU-23-4, the 2S6 guns have
pension system resembles that of the SA-4 GANEF improved AA range and rate of fire (per barrel).
SAM system, but it has only six road wheels. The onboard SAMs can engage even longer-range
targets.
CAPABILITIES:
REMARKS:
A battery of six 2S6 systems is organic to the
air defense battalion which replaces the air The 2S6, previously known as the SP AA gun
defense missile and artillery battery in some M1986, has been deployed in W(F since the spring
MRRs and TRs. The mixed armament of guns of 1987.
5-119
FM 100-2-3
S-60
FY A
DESCRIPTION:
The S-6 is a towed, road-transportable, short- guidance. This weapon, designed to provide de-
to medium-range, single-barrel 57-mm AA gun fense against aircraft and helicopters, can also be
system. The recognition features include a four- effective against lightly armored ground vehicles.
wheeled carriage; a long, thin tube with multi- The four-wheel carriage can be leveled and stabil-
perforated muzzle brake; and a distinctive gun ized on jacks to form a point firing base. The four-
shield. The prime mover for the S-60 is usually round clips feed ammunition horizontally into the
the Ural-375 cargo truck. Besides on-carriage weapon. The gun can fire from the traveling posi-
optical fire control, the S-60 also employs an off- ti(n in emergencies.
carriage SON-9 or FLAIY WHEEL. fire control
radlar, mounted on a separate van. LIMITA TIONS:
'A PA BIL!TIES: ''he towed S-60 system lacks the mobility of
'he S-60) is present in the AA regiment of some the newer SAM systems which are replacing it.
MKIl)s and TI)s. However, the SA-ti GAINFUL or
SA-8(GE CKO SAM systems have replaced it in REMARKS:
most divisions in the forward area. It also may
be organic to territorial defense units, especially The S-60, introduced around 1950, is no longer
around airfields. An S-60-equipped regiment has organic to first-line Soviet divisions. The Soviets
24 guns: four firing batteries, each consisting of introduced an SP version, the ZSU-57-2, in 1957.
six guns and a fire control center. It had twin 57-mm guns mounted on a modified
'T-54 tank chassis. The ZSU-57-2 has the same
The S-60's tactical AA range is 4,000 meters characteristics as the S-60 except that it is not
with optical sights and (,000 maters with radar radar-controlled. It is now -onsidered obsolete.
5-120
FM 100-2-3
FOOTNOTES. *SA-4a/4b.
'*SA-6a/6b.
**SA-7a/7b.
5-121
FM 100-2-3
5-122
FM 100-2-3
SA-2/GUIDELINE
SA-2/ G UIDELINE
.. f
?1
&4c~
DESCRIPTION:
The SA-2/GUIDELINE is a two-stage, radar- usually found in the rear area with the mission
guided SAM. It travels on a semitrailer towed by of defending static assets such as supply and
a truck or tractor to the launch site. The SA-2 command installations. SA-2 units are not subor-
has appeared in several versions. Most of these dinate to the ground forces but to the air defense
have HE warheads; however, one version, first seen forces at the strategic level. However, the Soviets
in 1967, reportedly has a nuclear warhead. may incorporate them into the front air defense
system to provide high-altitude air defense of front
CAPABILITIES: critical rear area assets.
The SA-2, with a slant range of 35 to 50 kilo- An SA-2 regiment consists of three battalions,
meters, can defend high-altitude approaches up to each having a single firing battery. Each battery
28,000 meters. The weapon is a national-level asset has six launchers arranged in a star formation, a
5-123
FM 100-2-3
SA-2/GUIDELINE (continued)
centrally located FAN SONG fire control radar, against an enemy employing sophisticated ECM
and a loading vehicle. Although the launchers are equipment. Other drawbacks are the system's
transportable, they normally deploy in fixed sites. restricted mobility and its limited capability
The two forward batteries usually locate 40 to 50 against low-altitude air targets.
kilometers behind front lines; the third battery
locates 80 kilometers behind. The system nornally REMARKS:
is integrated with other rear area air defense The SA-2 system, operational since 1959, is
systems to permit redundant coverage. technologically obsolescent. The Soviets are grad-
LIMITA TIONS: ually phasing it out of their inventory. The Soviet
designation for the GUIDELINE missile is
Although the SA-2 is reportedly effective within V750VK; the complete SA-2 system is known as
its kill zone, it is unlikely to be very effective V75SM.
5-124
FM 100-2-3
SA-3/GOA
SA-3/GOA
~sCX~C~ajrr~
~e~i~~d F
hl 0
'ya
r '"
drp - - ,.
r 4
-
~ow
a,, j
DESCRIPTION:
The SA-3/GOA is a two-stage, solid-fuel, low- capabilities of the SA-2. As with SA-2 units, SA-3
to medium-altitude SAM. Two ready missiles travel units are not normally subordinate to the ground
in tandem on a modified truck or tracked vehicle forces, although they may be integrated into the
from which the crew loads the missiles onto a front air defense system.
ground-mounted, trainable launcher for firing. Both
twin and quadruple launchers are in use. The LIMITA TIONS:
truck-mounted FLAT FACE radar acquires the The SA-3 system is not mobile. It is movable,
targets, while the LOW BLOW radar carries out but its displacement time is considerable.
the fire control function.
REMARKS:
CAPABILITIES:
The Soviets introduced the SA-3 into service in
The SA-3 has automatic radio-command guid- 1961. Newer, more mobile systems with improved
ance. The weapon can engage air targets at alti- capabilities (for example, the SA-6 and SA-8) have
tudes between 100 and 25,000 meters at slant replaced it in its original role as a low-altitude
ranges of 6 to 25 kilometers. It is principally a air defense weapon in support of maneuver
point/small-area defense weapon. Along with the elements. However, it has continued in its role as
S-60 and other AA guns, it may provide low- to a rear area air defense weapon. The Soviets intro-
medium-altitude air defense of front critical rear duced a quadruple launcher in 1973 for this
area assets as a complement to the high-altitude purpose.
5-125
FM 100-2-3
SA-4/GANEF
SA-4b/GANEF Mod 1
DESCRIPTION: CAPABILITIES:
The SA-4/GANEF is a two stage, medium- to The SA-4 has a slant range of 80 to 100 kilo-
high-altitude SAM. It employs four wrap-around, meters and a kill zone at altitudes between 100
solid-fuel boosters and a cruise-type liquid-fuel and 25,000 meters. The LONG TRACK radar,
ramjet sustainer to attain long range. Guidance which also supports other missiles, provides long-
is radio-command with semiautomatic homing. The range surveillance while the PAT HANI) radar
GANEF missiles travel in pairs on a tracked TEL provides target acquisition and fire control.
with 360-degree traverse. The system includes the
A total of 27 SA-4 TELs are organic to a
PAT HAND fire control radar and the necessary
front/army SAM brigade. The brigade comprises
C' and logistic support vehicles and equipment.
three battalions with three batteries each. Each
The SA-4 brigade also has THIN SKIN height-
finding and LONG TRACK target acquisition battery has three twin launchers, one PAT HAN)
radars. ZU-23 guns provide close-in air defense of radar, and one loader vehicle. All are tracked.
the launchers. Besides providing high-altitude air defense for an
advancing army, the system's excellent mobility
When it appeared, the SA-4 TEL vehicle was a allows some batteries to support the army's for-
completely new design; that is, it was not a ward maneuver elements, filling gaps between
modification of any previous chassis or vehicle. A low-altitude SA-6 or SA-8 batteries. Thus, three
reload vehicle based on the SA-4 chassis carries SA-4 batteries might typically follow about 10
two additional missiles and follows the TEL kilometers behind the army's foward forces, with
vehicle. the other batteries moving in a belt 25 kilometers
5-126
FM 100-2-3
SA-4/GANEF (continued)
behind the front lines. The SA-4 TEL is air- in 1964. It entered service in the Soviet Army
transportable in the An-22 transport aircraft. around 1967. An improved version, designated
SA-4b/GANEF Mod 1, was first seen in 1974. The
LIMITATIONS: SA-4b features a shorter nose, with approximately
The SA-4 system is vulnerable to suppressive two feet of the missile forebody removed, as well
fires and ECM. Its capabilities are significantly as a modified TEL.
reduced when the system is on the move. The TEL
has no on-board radar. The SA-11 and SA-12 systems are replacing
REMARKS: the SA-4 in nondivisional air defense units. The
Soviets have deployed the SA-11 in army-level
The SA-4 was the Soviets' first mobile SAM SAM brigades; they have initially deployed the
system. The original SA-4a/GANEF was first seen SA-12 in front-level SAM brigades.
5-127
FM 100-2-3
SA-6/GAINFUL
SA-6a/GAINFULL
lipI
rte
DESCRIPTION: CAPABILITIES:
The GAINFUL is a two-stage, solid-fuel, low- The SA-6 can deliver extremely responsive fires
altitude SAM. It has radio-command guidance with with a slant range of 24 kilometers and a kill zone
semiactive radar terminal homing. Three missiles from 50 to 12,000 meters in altitude. After the SA-6
are carried and launched from a three-rail mount regiment's LONG TRACK surveillance radar
with 360-degree traverse. The SA-6a launcher is acquires target data, the STRAIGHT FLUSH
mounted on a modified PT-76 tank chassis similar missile site radars take over target acquisition and
to the ZSU-23-4. Like the ZSU-23-4, the SA-6a TEL fire control. Target tracking is on a single beam;
is not amphibious. In travel position, the three- final intercept is by semiactive radar homing,
missile launcher normally is lowered with the using continuous-wave radar. In ECM conditions,
missiles facing toward the rear. The SA-6b system the crew can perform tracking optically.
mounts three GAINFUL missiles on a different
type of tracked chassis with an on-board radar. For The SA-6 regiments organic to MRI)s and TI)s
either variant of the SA-6 system, a truck-based consist of 20 TELs in five batteries. Each battery
reload vehicle carries three additional missiles. has four triple launchers, one STRAIGHT FLUSH
vehicle, and two reload vehicles. Normally, three
The associated STRAIGHT FLUSH radar of these batteries are deployed 5 kilometers behind
vehicle uses the same chassis as the SA-6a TEL. the front line; the remaining two are deployed
The LONG TRACK target acquisition radar is also about 10 kilometers farther back, filling the gaps
associated with the SA-6 system. between the three forward batteries.
5-128
FM 100-2-3
SA-6/GAINFUL (continued)
Division-level SA-6s may be used to supplement service around 1970. Either the SA-6 or SA-8 has
the air defense assets of maneuver regiments. This replaced S-60 AA guns in most divisional air
is due to their excellent mobility. defense regiments.
LIMITATIONS:
Besides being vulnerable to suppressive fires Around 1979, the SA-6b began to appear along-
and ECM, the system is slaved to the STRAIGHT side the SA-6a in batteries of divisional SAM regi-
FLUSH target acquisition and tracking radar. ments. In such configurations, a separate
Without it, the SA-6 battery depends heavily on STRAIGHT FLUSH radar can perform target
target acquisition data provided by the LONG acquisition; or, the SA-6b system, with its inte-
TRACK regimental radar. grated transporter-erector-launcher and radar
REMARKS: (TELAR), can operate independently for sur-
veillance, as does the SA-8. This gives a higher
The Soviets first displayed the SA-6a in Moscow degree of autonomy and mobility to the very limited
in November 1967. The Soviet Army placed it in number of SA-6b-equipped units.
5-129
FM 100-2-3
SA-7/GRAIL
SA-7/GRAIL
DESCRIPTION:
The SA-7/GRAIL is a man-portable, shoulder- charge to increase range and speed. This gives the
fired, low-altitude SAM system similar to the US SA-7b a slant range of about 5.5 kilometers, a
Army's Redeye. The missile has an HE warhead ceiling of about 4,500 meters, and a speed of about
and passive infrared homing guidance. The system 580 meters per second (Mach 1.75). However, the
comprises the missile, a reloadable gripstock, and burn time has not increased.
a thermal battery. There are two versions: the
SA-7a and SA-7b. Both the SA-7a and the SA-7b are tail chase
missile systems. An identification, friend or foe
CAPABILITIES: (1FF) system can be fitted to the operator's helmet.
The operator uses a permanent gripstock with
Every MRB and airborne battalion has an
attachable canister-tube stored missiles. Each
organic air defense platoon in which nine SA-7
operator carries a gripstock with one missile; up
operators with gripstocks are transported by the
to four additional missiles are carried in each
platoon's three BTRs, BMPs, or BMDs. A SAM
vehicle.
section consisting of one vehicle and three SA-7
gripstocks normally attaches to each of the bat- The effectiveness of the SA-7 depends on its
talion's three MRCs. Similar air defense platoons ability to lock onto the heat source of targets,
are organic at battalion level in air assault and usually low-flying fixed- and rotary-wing aircraft.
airmobile assault units. Although the SA-7 is limited in range, speed, and
The SA-7a has a slant range of 3.6 kilometers altitude, it forces enemy pilots to fly above Soviet
and a kill zone between 15 and 3,500 meters in minimum radar limitations. This results in detec-
altitude. Its speed is about 470 meters per second tion and vulnerability to regimental and divisional
(Mach 1.4). air defense systems.
The uprated version SA-7b differs from the The operator engages a target by pointing the
SA-7a primarily by using a boosted propellant tube at the target, partially depressing the trigger,
5-130
FM 100-2-3
SA-7/GRAIL (continued)
SA- 16
0*
.I'
rh Le\
~64 : .ly;"1
A
II - r'4~
4va ;3L ~ *
:.~ DC L.1~
m"~r s;Z
;it -
i i~" ~48~
4~s
I
~a-.
3d
I~
4 ~~ 4,
~
" itA
LIMITA TIONS:
The SA-14/GREMLIN man-portable SAM is
The SA-7 is susceptible to suppressive fires and replacing the SA-7. The SA-14 entered service in
battlefield obscurations. Its gunner also must have 1978 and is similar to the SA-7b. Unlike the SA-7a
line-of-sight to his target. This may cause him to and SA-7b, however, it can engage targets head-on
be exposed in relatively open terrain. High-intensity at ranges of up to 4,000 meters. In 1986, the Soviets
flares ejected from aircraft under attack were once introduced yet another hand-held SAM, the highly
successful countermeasures against the SA-7; how- accurate SA-16, which is also replacing the SA-7
ever, the infrared guidance system of later models in tactical units. The Soviet nickname for the SA-16
has a filter to screen out decoy flares. is Igla (needle).
5-131
FM 100-2-3
SA-8/GECKO
SA-8a/GECKO SA-8b/GECKO
ICjTTT
i ..
DESCRIPTION:
The SA-8/GECKO is a two-stage, solid-fuel, a typical target. Its antenna folds down behind
short-range, low-altitude, all-weather SAM system. the launcher, enabling Soviet transport aircraft to
The unique six-wheeled SA-8 TELAR is amphibious airlift the system. The tracking radar is of the
and has a large boatlike bow. On the SA-8a system, pulsed type; it probably operates in the J band
four missiles mount on launch rails on an inte- with a range of 20 to 25 kilometers. The two
grated rotatable turret; the SA-8b system carries I-band guidance radars make it possible to launch
six canister-launched missiles. On either variant, two missiles at the same target, each one respond-
the on-board LANI) ROLL target acquisition and ing to a different frequency to frustrate ECM. A
fire control radar system also is mounted on the low-light-level television camera mounted on top
front of the turret. The LAND ROLL system con- of the fire-control assembly is used for optical
sists of a folding surveillance radar antenna located target tracking.
atop the launcher, between the two pairs of launch
rails, and a large tracking radar dish flanked by The incorporation of the radars and the number
two smaller command radar dishes forward of the of ready missiles on the TELAR give the amphibi-
launch rails. ous SA-8 system some mobility and tactical employ-
ment advantages over the SA-6 system. The SA-6,
CAPABILITIES: on the other hand, provides greater depth of cover-
age, especially against aircraft employing standoff
The SA-8 has a slant range of 12 kilometers weapons. The use of canisters on the SA-8b system
and a kill zone of approximately 10 to 12,000 has three advantages: it further increases the
meters in altitude. Compared to other Soviet air number of ready missiles, it improves missile sur-
defense systems, the SA-8 has several advantages: vivability, and it facilitates resupply and reloading.
it is fully self-contained, highly mobile, amphibious,
and air-transportable. LIMITA TIONS:
The SA-8 system is organic to the SAM regiment Besides being susceptible to suppressive fires
of some MRDs and TI)s. An SA-8 regiment has a and ECM, the SA-8's exposed radars and wheels
total of 20 TELARs organized into five batteries are especially vulnerable to artillery fires.
of 4 TELARs each. The regiment also has 10
resupply vehicles, based on the same chassis as REMARKS:
the TELAR, which carry additional missiles and
a crane for transloading. The Soviets introduced the SA-8a in 1974 and
first publicly displayed it in 1975. The SA-8b vari-
The surveillance radar of the LAND ROLL ant was first seen in 1980. Along with the SA-6,
system probably operates in the H band and has the SA-8 systems have replaced the S-60 AA gun
an effective range of around 30 kilometers against in most division-level air defense regiments.
5-132
FM 100-2-3
SA-9/GASKIN
SA-9/GA SKIN
DESCRIPTION:
The SA-9/GASKIN is a short-range, low-altitude The four SA-9/GASKIN fire units normally
SAM. Four missiles in detachable, box-like launch operate as a group. They would most likely deploy
canisters are mounted on a modified BRDM-2 between the first and second echelons of the regi-
amphibious armored scout car. The launcher is ment. From that location, the SA-9s can protect
360-degree traversable and rests flat on the rear both first- and second-echelon units without be-
of the vehicle when not in the launch-ready posi- coming exposed to enemy direct fire weapons. The
tion. The vehicle carries an additional four missiles SA-9s probably have the task of covering the regi-
inside. mental command post, the regiment's organic artil-
lery battalion, and other organic or attached
The GASKIN missiles has a passive infrared
elements in the regiment's sector.
seeker. It carries an HE warhead.
The SA-9 is amphibious with hydrojet propulsion.
CAPABILITIES: An air filtration and overpressure system provides
The SA-9 has a slant range of approximately Ni(C protection. These capabilities enable the SA-9
6 kilometers and a kill zone of 10 to 5,000 meters to cross rivers and zones of radiation along with
in altitude. A surveillance data link alerts an forward columns of tanks and APCs.
operator seated in the vehicle cabin to an ap-
proaching target. The operator then tracks the LIMITA TIONS:
target optically through a large window at the base
The SA-9 has significantly reduced range against
of the launcher pedestal.
high-speed aircraft approaching the launcher. The
Once targets are sighted visually, the SA-9 prob- system has no on-board radar. Therefore, the crew
ably uses a red/green light indicator system similar must depend on preliminary target data broadcast
to that of the SA-7/GRAIL; that is, when the red over the division early warning radio net until
light turns green, the missile has locked onto the they visually acquire the target. The system is
target and is ready to fire. However, the GASKIN susceptible to suppressive fires and battlefield
missile is not a derivative of the GRAIL. The SA-9 obscuration. Maximum armor protection is only 14
is the least complex of Soviet vehicle-mounted SAM millimeters.
systems.
REMARKS:
A platoon of four SA-9 vehicles is organic to
the air defense battery of MRRs and TRs. The The Soviets introduced the SA-9 in 1968. Its
SA-9s are teamed with a platoon of four ZSU-23-4s. Soviet nickname is Strcla-I (arrow). Around 1977,
The SA-9 also is organic to Soviet naval infantry the SA-13/GOPHER SAM system began to replace
regiments and brigades. the SA-9.
5-133
FM 100-2-3
SA-11/GADFLY
SA-11/GADFL Y
f --------
DESCRIPTION:
The SA-11/GADFLY is a low-to-medium altitude longer-range surveillance and target acquisition
SAM. The SA-11 TELAR is based on a tracked radars, each TELAR, with its on-board guidance
chassis also used for the radar vehicles associated and tracking radar, can operate independently for
with the SA-11. The TELAR features a 360-degree surveillance and target engagement.
traversable platform with a dome-shaped radar
antenna at the front and a four-rail launcher near LIMITA TIONS:
the rear. At the extreme rear of the platform is a
The TELAR apparently does not carry reload
communications antenna.
missiles onboard.
CAPABILITIES:
REMARKS:
The GADFLY missile has a slant range of 30
kilometers. It provides air defense against high- The SA-11 TELAR vehicle first appeared with
performance aircraft operating at low-to-medium the SA-6b/GAINFUL system around 1979. The
altitudes, as well as against cruise missiles. The entire SA-11 system with the GADFLY missile was
tracked TELAR provides excellent mobility. not introduced until 1983. Initially deployed as a
replacement for the SA-4 system in army-level SAM
Although SA-11 batteries (if deployed at division brigades, the SA-11 may eventually replace the
level) or battalions (if deployed at army level) have SA-6 as a division-level SAM.
5-134
FM 100-2-3
-e
" too
VCw,_0_
"**
~. - eif
DESCRIPTION:
The SA-12aGLADIATOR is a long-range, low- long-range surveillance and a capability for hand-
to-high altitude, tactical SAM system. The SA-12a ling multiple targets.
TELAR is based on a modified MT-T heavy tracked
transporter. Cylindrical containers in circular The SA-12a/GLAI)IATOR system is a replace-
launch racks carry four GLADIATOR missiles. The ment for the SA-4/GANEF in nondivisional SAM
canisters are erected to the vertical at the rear of units. Initial deployment has been to front-level
the TELAR in firing position. A tall antenna mast SAM brigades.
with a radar dish is erected at the rear of the
REMARKS:
driver's cab. A separate transloader vehicle on the
same type of chassis carries four reload missiles The Soviets first deployed the SA-12a GLAI)IA-
and a crane. Separate phased-array radars and C' TOR system in 1986. Still under development is
vehicles associated with this SAM system use an even more capable, longer-range, higher-
similar vehicles. altitude missile to complement it. The second
missile, designated SA-12b GIANT, is a tactical
CAPABILITIES:
SAM with a range of 100 kilometers. The GIANT
The GLADIATOR missile has a range of 90 can intercept aircraft at all altitudes, cruise mis-
kilometers and a kill zone at altitudes between 30 siles, tactical ballistic missiles, and possibly some
and 30,000 meters. The SA-12a mobile system pro- types of strategic ballistic missiles. The SA-12b
vides air defense against all types of aerodynamic system uses the same T'EIAR as the SA-12a, except
vehicles, including cruise missiles and some tactical that it carries only two of the larger GIANT
ballistic missiles. The phased-array radars provide missiles.
5-135
FM 100-2-3
SA-13/GOPHER
'
) 41-_/7 z
- .
SA-13/GOPHER
-Jr! w
a*
Ar
*
7r:
-I,
DESCRIPTION:
The SA-13 GOPHER is a short-range, low alti- Located between the two pairs of missile canisters
tude SAM system. The SA-13 TELAR is a modified is the circular parabolic antenna of a ranging
MT-LB amphibious armored tracked vehicle with radar. There is an unidentified plank-shaped struc-
the machine gun turret removed. The launcher ture above the position for the inside right canister.
pedestal mounted to the rear of center of the vehicle On both sides of the pedestal are running boards
is 360-degree traversable. It incorporates the op- for crew members emplacing new missile canisters.
erator's position behind a large, rectangular window In travel position, the canisters and radar are
at its base. Atop the pedestal are mounting brackets lowered to the rear of the pedestal and rest on
for four missile canisters. The SA-13 launcher can the rear deck, facing to the rear; approximately
accommodate the GASKIN missile canisters nor- one-third of the canister length extends behind the
mally associated with the SA-9 system; it can also vehicle. The MT-LB cargo compartment may carry
accommodate the slightly larger canisters for the up to eight reload missiles. It has two large doors
GOPHER missiles associated exclusively with the at the rear.
SA-13 system. Like the GASKIN canisters, the
GOPHER canisters are box-shaped, with hinged The platoon leader of the SA-13-equipped SAM
covers at both front and rear. However, the platoon uses a second version of the SA-13 TEIAR.
GOPHER canisters are slightly longer and re- This version features four box-shaped receiver
inforced by transverse ribs in their rear portion, devices mounted on the front, rear, and both sides
while the GASKIN canisters have smooth sides. of the hull.
5-136
FM 100-2-3
SA-13/GOPHER (continued)
CAPABILITIES:
The GOPHER missile has a slant range of 6 rough terrain, water obstacles, and contaminated
to 7 kilometers and a kill zone between a minimum areas along with the tank and BMP-equipped units
of 9 to 10 meters and a maximum of 5,500 meters it supports.
in altitude. It has a cooled IR seeker and operates
in dual frequency bands to better discriminate LIMITATIONS:
against countermeasures (in comparison to the
GASKIN). As with the SA-9 system, the operator The SA-13 has significantly reduced range
tracks the target optically; but, in this case, the against high-speed aircraft approaching the
onboard ranging radar allows him to determine launcher. Despite a limited surveillance capability
when the target aircraft is within range of the of the range-only radar, the SA-13 still depends
missile. This reduces the needless expenditure of primarily on visual acquisition by the crew. It also
missiles on out-of-range targets. depends on target data passed to the crew by data
link when targets are acquired by the radars of
A platoon of four SA-13 TELARs is organic to the battery's SP AA guns or by division-level
the air defense battery of MRRs and TRs, where radars. Suppressive fires and battlefield obscuration
they are complemented by a platoon of four SP may degrade the operator's ability to track targets
AA guns. The SA-13 is also organic to Soviet naval visually. The MT-LB hull offers a maximum armor
infantry brigades. protection of only 7 millimeters (half that of the
The four box-shaped structures on the hull of BRDM-2 hull of the SA-9).
the platoon leader's TELAR house a passive radar
warning system. The receivers' arrangement REMARKS:
provides 360-degree coverage around the vehicle.
The Soviets introduced the SA-13 system around
The tracked, amphibious TELAR with collective 1977 as a replacement for the SA-9 system. Their
NBC protection allows the SA-13 system to cross nickname for the SA-13 is Strela 10.
5-137
FM 100-2-3
a a- t I
5-138
FM 100-2-3
ENGINEER EQUIPMENT
Bridges and Rafts
PMP RAFT
CHARACTERISTICS 40-TON 60-TON 80-TON 110-TON 170-TON
ASSEMBLY DATA
Spans in raft 2/0' 3/0' 4/0' 5/1' 8/1'
Total length (m) 13.5 20.3 27.0 39.3 59.6
Roadway width (m) 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5
Capacity (mt) 40 60 80 110 170
Assembly time (min) 8 10 12 15 INA
Working party 6 9 12 18 INA
FOOTNOTES. 'Center/ramp section.
2
Closed/extended.
3
Average assembly time 7 meters per minute. (Trained engineers can assemble
200 meters in 11 minutes or 500 meters in 30 minutes.)
4
Launch/retrieval time.
5Per span/total.
5-139
FM 100-2-3
PMP
('k $,
DESCRIPTION: CAPABILITIES:
Although the complete PMP ribbon bridge set Engineers can use the full 36-ponton set to
consists of 32 center pontons and 4 ramp pontons, construct 227 meters of 60-ton bridge. They may
the ponton bridge company of an engineer battalion also configure it as 40- to 170-ton rafts. A half-set
normally has half a set (one complete bridge) made gives each division the capability to construct 119
up of 16 center and 2 ramp pontons. Each 4-section meters of 60-ton bridge, 191 meters of 20-ton bridge,
ponton is launched from a KrAZ-255B truck. It or rafts. Under ideal conditions, assembly speeds
automatically unfolds upon entering the water. The of 7 meters of bridge per minute can result.
sections then lock in place to form a bridge unit
6.75 meters long and 8 meters wide. Normally, all
the units are launched simultaneously. They join
together parallel to the near shore to form a REMARKS:
continuous roadway. The roadway then swings
across the water obstacle; powerboats (6 per half- The I'MP was introduced in 1961. It is extremely
set) hold it in place on the designated centerline. vulnerable to air attack and artillery.
5-140
FM 100-2-3
TMM
y V.
- I
DESCRIPTION:
The TMM is a multiple-span, trestle-supported, raises, unfolds, and emplaces the span with the
scissors-type, treadway bridge. One bridge set folding trestle legs.
comprises four 10.5-m spans carried on, and
Engineers can launch the complete 42-m bridge
launched from, modified KrAZ-214 or KrAZ-255B
in 40 to 60 minutes during the day or 60 to 80
(6 x 6) trucks. Spans fold in half for transport.
minutes at night; however, a well-trained working
Three of the spans have integral-mounted, adjust-
party can cut this time in half. If necessary, it
able (1.7 to 3.2 meters) trestle legs, while the fourth
(far-shore) span has none. I)uring travel, the can lay the TMM underwater; this adds about 50
percent to the launching time. Adding more spans
trestles can fold beneath the scissors span.
can lengthen the bridge.
CAPABILITIES:
REMARKS:
A launching girder mounted on the truck bed
launches the TMM hydraulically over the tailgate. The TMM was introduced in 1964. It is vulner-
Assisted by winch cables and pulleys, the girder able to direct and indirect fire weapons.
5-141
FM 100-2-3
MTU-20
DESCRIPTION:
The MTU-20 is the major Soviet-produced, the far end reaches the far bank. Then the crew
tank-launched, single-span, assault bridge currently lowers the near end onto the near bank. This
employed as standard equipment in the Soviet method of launching gives the bridgelayer a low
Army. It consists of a twin-treadway super- silhouette, and makes it less vulnerable to detection
structure mounted on a modified T-55 tank chassis. or destruction.
Each treadway is made up of a box-type aluminum
Iaunch time is 5 minutes for the MTU-20. The
girder with a folding ramp attached to both ends
launcher vehicle can retrieve the emplaced bridge
to save space in the travel position. Thus, the
vehicle with bridge on board is only 11.6 meters from either end. Retrieval time is 5 to 7 minutes.
long, but the overall span length is 20 meters.
REMARKS:
CA PABILITIES:
In 1957, the Soviets introduced a tank-launched
The MTU-20 is launched by the cantilever bridge mounted on a modified T-34 tank chassis.
method: the ramps are lowered and fully extended They produced this bridge only on a limited basis
before the treadways are cantilevered out with the and soon replaced it with the T-54 MTU, which
full load of the bridge resting on the forward was introduced in 1958. Since 1967, the improved
support plate during launch. The span moves MTU-20 and the Czech M-55 have supplemented
forward over the cantilever launching girder until and largely replaced the T-54 MTU.
5-142
FM 100-2-3
MT-55
DESCRIPION: CAPABILITIS:
The crew can launch this bridge in five minutes
The MT-55, produced in Czechoslovakia, is a to span an 18-m gap. The bridge can carry a no-mt
scissors-type bridge with solid sides. It folds in the load.
middle. It is similar in design and appearance to REMARKS:
the East German BLG-6() tank-launched scissors Some Soviet MLRs and TRs use the MT-5
bridge. The MT-55 mounts on and launches from instead of the MTUJ-20, even though it is made in
a modified T-55 tank chassis. Czechoslovakia.
5-143
FM 100-2-3
WEIGHT (kg)
Empty 9,550 15,000 3,600 INA 17,000/34,0002 INA INA
Loaded, land 12,550 22,500 8,600 INA NA NA NA
Loaded, water 14,500 30,000 8,600 INA 84,000 INA INA
PAYLOAD (kg)
Land 3,000 7,500 5,000 INA NA NA NA
Water 5,000 15,000 5,000 INA 50,000 52,000 INA
CREW 2 2 NA 2 working party 6 INA INA
PERSONNEL LOAD 50 503 NA INA NA NA NA
LENGTH (mm) 9,150 11,500 10,300 11,500 12,000 13,500 8,400
WIDTH (mm) 3,150 3,500 2,820/4,0505 3,300 3,240/12,630/ 3,500/10,500/ INA/7,000/
4
21,5004 INA4 INA
HEIGHT (mm) 2,165 3,400 2,200 INA 3,200 INA INA
GROUND CLEARANCE (mm) 366 500 INA INA 350 INA INA
GROUND PRESSURE
2
(kg/cm ): Empty 0.35 0.32 INA INA 0.52 INA INA
Loaded 0.46 0.41 INA INA NA NA NA
MAXIMUM SPEED (km/hr)
Land 36 40 towed INA 40 INA INA
Water (w/load) 10 15 towed INA 7.7 INA INA
CRUISING RANGE
Land (km) 170 425 towed INA INA INA INA
Water (hrs) 8 10 towed INA INA INA INA
SLOPE (°)
Empty 42 30 INA INA 25 INA INA
Loaded 15/106 10 INA INA NA NA NA
STEP (mm) 640 650 INA INA INA INA INA
TRENCH (mm) 3,000 2,500 INA INA INA INA INA
ENTRY ANGLE (0)
Empty 15 INA INA INA INA INA INA
Loaded 10/56 15 INA INA INA INA INA
EXIT ANGLE (0) 20 25 INA INA INA INA INA
YEAR INTRODUCED 1954 1966 mid 1950s 1981 1955 1983 1981
5-144
FM 100-2-3
GSP
~-:""~
k " "
A4~
-t
t WW,
DESCRIPTION:
The GSP ferry set consists of two self-contained, (including medium and heavy tanks, SPI artillery,
mirror-image half-ferries which resemble each other and other tank-based equipment) at a water speed
but are not interchangeable. In travel position, one of up to 7.7 kilometers per hour. Assembly time
ponton folds atop each amphibian. After launching, is 3 to 5 minutes.
the crew lowers the pontons on hinges to the outer
sides of the amphibians and locks them in place.
LIMITA TIONS:
The two half-ferries join together. Treadways attach
to the top of the decked pontons and transversely The bank can be no higher than 0.5 meters
across the gunwales of the amphibians. For loading and the water depth no less than 1.2 meters at
and unloading, the ferry has a scissors-type ramp the point where the (GSP places its ramps to load
extending from the outer gunwales of both pontons. or unload. Otherwise, the ferry can be damaged.
The pontons are filled with foam plastic to make The GSP is vulnerable to air attack and artillery.
them unsinkable.
CA PABILITIES: REMARKS:
The GSP is organic to the engineer battalion GSP is the Soviet abbreviation for "tracked
of MRDs and TDs (12 half-ferries). Engineer self-propelled ferry." lThe GSP was first sighted in
brigades, ponton bridge regiments, and assault 1955. Since then, the Soviet Army and other
crossing battalions at front and army levels also Warsaw Pact armies have used it in increasing
use it. It primarily supports tank, heavy artillery, numbers. However, its deployment ended in 1969,
and missile units in river crossings. The SP ferry and new Amphibious Bridging System-Tracked
can carry up to 50 metric tons of equipment (IPMM-2) sets are replacing it.
5-145
FM 100-2-3
PM M-2
} ;Y 44
DESCRIPTION:
This amphibious tracked vehicle bears great unfolded and deployed, the l'MM-2 can be 10.5
similarity to the PTS-2 tracked amphibian, with meters wide.
its cab and boat-like bow. The chassis is similar
to that of the MT-I artillery prime mover, with
seven road wheels and four return rollers. This CAA BILI TIES:
same chassis is the basis of the MI)K-3 excavator,
BAT-2 dozer, and PTS-2 tracked amphibian. The The I'MM-2 c an serve as a ferry. Joined to-
pontons of the PMM-2 sit on top of each other gether with other 'MM-2s, it can serve as a ribbon
and open hydraulically to both sides. They bridge. It has one main advantage as a ferry over
resemble those of the Amphibious Bridging the (S': whereas two GSI' half-ferries must be
System-Wheeled. The unfolded pontons have joinedl together to produce one ferry with a ca-
wave deflectors, as well as ramps to expedite the pacity of 50 metri- tons, one I'MM-2 can handle
loading and unloading of vehicles. Analysts esti- the same capacity. Until the Soviet designation
mate that the vehicle is 13.5 meters long and 3.5 'MM-2 became known, this system was called
meters wide with folded pontons. With the pontons ABS-T in the West.
5-146
FM 100-2-3
ABS- W
DESCRIPTION:
This new system appears to be similar to the vehicle. It can serve either as a single ferry or,
PMM-2, but it uses a modified ZIL-135 8 X 8 truck combined with other vehicles, as part of a ribbon
as a chassis. As with the PMM-2, the crew deploys bridge. However, in contrast to the GSP, it can
two pontons hydraulically. Using the dimensions form a ferry with a single vehicle. Unlike the
of the ZIL-135 as a guide, the ABS-W can form a PMP, it is self-contained, and does not require
ferry 8.4 meters long and 7 meters wide. transport vehicles or power boats to place it into
operation. Also, less manpower is required to
CAPABILITIES:
deploy the system.
The ABS-W combines the capabilities of the
GSP ferry and the PMP ponton system in one
5-147
FM 100-2-3
K-61
pr:
A3"
a"
~
*
jr ;
- -
4 ,3 'T
DESCRIPTION:
The K-61 is an unarmored, full-tracked trans- The K-61 can carry 50 troops or cargo loads of
port vehicle with a watertight all-steel hull. The 3,000 kilograms on land, or 5,000 kilograms in
crew compartment at the front accommodates the water. Typical equipment loads include artillery
commander and driver. It has a hinged windshield pieces (120-mm mortar, 122-mm howitzer, or 152-
which can be opened horizontally. The cargo com- mm howitzer) and trucks (GAZ-63, ZIL-130, or
partment at the rear has a large tailgate, which ZIL-157). Twelve K-61s can transport a battery of
also acts as a loading ramp, and a power-driven artillery with prime movers.
winch. Bows and a tarpaulin can cover the crew
LIMITA TIONS:
and cargo compartments.
The K-61 has a limited road cruising range of
The suspension consists of seven small road
170 kilometers. (Some sources optimistically report
wheels with the drive sprocket at the front and
260 kilometers.) Faulty support slides can cause
the idler at the rear. The K-61 is unique among
the tracks to bind when a turn is made in either
Soviet tracked vehicles in that it has no track
direction. The vehicle may shed its tracks when
support rollers but uses seven support slides. The
steering clutch levers are used in landing and in
vehicle is propelled in water by two large. three-
climbing the bank after water operation. The K-61
bladed propellers in the rear of the hull. When
is vulnerable to direct and indirect fire weapons.
the screws are engaged, the tracks remain idle.
CAPABILITIES: REMARKS:
The K-61 (or the newer PTS-M) is organic to The Soviets introduced the K-61 in 1954. It is
the engineer battalion of MRI)s and TI)s (with 12 sometimes referred to as the (T. Since 1966, the
amphibians in the amphibious platoon of the heavy tracked amphibian t'TS-M has largely
assault crossing company). It is also organic to replaced it. The lPTS-M has over twice the carry-
the divisional maintenance battalion (which has ing capacity of the K-61. The K-61 is now obsolete,
one amphibian). It is primarily a tactical support found only in low readiness units in the Soviet
vehicle for transporting cargo, equipment, and Army; however, it is still common in many
Warsaw Pact and Third World armies.
personnel in river crossing operations. Warsaw Pact and 'T'hird World armies.
5-148
FM 100-2-3
PTS-M
4?L
~,~g~U,
~ ----
I--
-ic
"f
~-~ t u'~-3:
ts~~ ,----;--- --
DESCRIPTION:
The PTS-M is an unarmored, full-tracked trans- under the center of the cargo compartment with
port vehicle. It strongly resembles the K-61, which exhaust ports just above each side of the cargo
it has replaced, but it is substantially larger. compartment. The vehicle is propelled in water by
Unlike the K-61, it has a fully enclosed cab which two 3-blade propellers; two rudders at the rear of
is farther forward than the open crew compart- the hull steer it. Standard equipment includes
ment of the K-61. It also has two circular hatches infrared night vision devices, an intercom, radios,
in its roof. The large cargo bed has a removable and a high-capacity bilge pump.
canvas cover and seven supporting bows. A winch
is mounted at the front of the cargo compartment. The PKP wheeled amphibious trailer is often
The large, triangular tailgate has two integral, used with the PTS-M. The I'KP is a boat-shaped,
hinged loading ramps. two-wheeled trailer with two small folding side
pontons for improving trim and increasing buoy-
The torsion-bar suspension consists of six ancy. It has a foam-plastic-filled, watertight hull
larger road wheels, with the drive sprocket at the and treadways on its deck with recesses for the
front and the idler at the rear. It has neither sup- wheels of transported artillery pieces.
port slides nor support rollers. The engine sits
5-149
FM 100-2-3
CAPABILITIES:
The PTS-M is organic to the engineer battalion single lift. The same task would require the use
of MRI)s and TDs (with 12 amphibians in the of two K-61s.
amphibious platoon of the assault crossing
For travel, the PKP can fit in the cargo com-
company). It is also organic to the divisional
partment of the PTS-M. The PTS-M can also serve
maintenance battalion (which has one amphibian).
as an ambulance, transporting 12 litters on special
The amphibious platoon also has three PKP
rack mounts. With a fully sealable cab, the l'TS-M
trailers. Together, tjhey normally transport artil-
can operate under conditions of chemical or
lery, air defense, or logistical elements across
nuclear contamination.
water barriers.
Vii/ ~~~"~" -~
14(
Nw; - ;;- t I
vII
5-150
FM 100-2-3
PTS-2
~- .-r-
~~p~~l Si:
DESCRIPTION:
This amphibious transport vehicle employs the winch, bilge pumps, and an automatic fire extin-
chassis of the MT-T heavy tracked prime mover. guishing system. The blades of the self-entrench-
The MI)K-3 tracked ditching machine, the IiAT-2 ing system can he widened with additional,
dozer, and the lPMM-2 bridging system also use detachable blades. The system can create and
this chassis. The most discernable differences improve the entrance and exit slopes of water
between the chassis of the PTS-2 and that of the crossing sites.
PTS-M are the PTS-2's seven T-64 tank-type road
REMA KS:
wheels and four support rollers. The PTS-2 is
larger than the PTS-M; it is 11.5 meters long and ''he P'FS-2 first appeared in 1981. It is replac-
3.;3 meters wide. The crew cab extends farther ing K-61s and I'PTS-Ms in the assault crossing
forward, and the larger wave deflector is posi- company of the engineer battalion of high-priority
tioned on the bow when in the travel mode. Also MRI)s and 'T'l)s, and in the assault crossing bat-
new is the hydraulically-operated self-entrenching talion and ponton bridge regiment of the engineer
system located on the rear deck of the PTS-2. brigade at army or front.
CAPABILITIES:
5-151
FM 100-2-3
Ditching Machines
Ditching machine characteristics
CREW 2 2 2 2 2
NOTE. Excavation capabilities depend on soil type, depth of cut, and other factors.
5-152
FM 100-2-3
MDK-2M
DESCRIPTION:
The MI)K-2M high-speed ditching machine is may be necessary to dig the trench to the desired
based on the tracked AT-T artillery tractor depth. The MI)K-2M cannot excavate in rocky ter-
chassis. The system mounts a rotary excavator on rain or in frozen soil. It cannot be airlifted by
the rear and a bulldozer blade on the front. helicopter or be airdropped. It is vulnerable to
small arms fire.
CAPABILITIES:
REMARKS:
The MI)K-2M can dig field positions, antitank
ditches, and firing positions. I)epending on soil Introduced in 1965, the MI)K-2M is now stan-
conditions, it can excavate 120 to 300 cubic meters dard equipment in Soviet and Warsaw Pact
of soil per hour. The system can dig a 3.5-m-deep engineer units. It is organic to the technical
and 3.5-m-wide ditch with multiple passes. The company of the engineer battalion in an MRI) or
MI)K-2M has a filtration system for operation in TI), and is also organic to the technical platoon
a contaminated environment. of the engineer company in an MRR or TR. The
MI)K-2M's production ended in 1979. The newer
LIMI TA TIONS: MI)K-3 is replacing it.
The M I)K-2M has relatively slow speed and
limited cross-country mobility. More than one pass
5-153
Ditching Machine MDK-3
MDK-3
I)ESCRIPTION:
Since 1982, the MI)K-3 has hegun to replace positions, and fighting positions. Its hourly exca-
the MDK-2M. The MDK- 3 has the chassis of the vation rate is 40() to 5() eubic meters per hour.
MT-T tracked artillery tractor, with a rotary exca- The system can dig ditches 3.5 meters wide by
vator on the rear and a bulldozer blade on the 1.7 meters deep in a single pass.
front.
REMARKS:
CAPABILITIES:
The MDIJK-3 cannot be airlifted by helicopter or
The MI)K-3 can dig antitank ditches, vehicle airdropped.
5-154
Ditching Machine BTM-3
BTM-3
/ ~--~---- --
The BTM-3 is the latest in a series of BTM The system cannot be airlifted by helicopter or
vehicles based on the chassis of the AT-T tracked airdropped. It has neither armor nor NBC protec-
artillery tractor. The system mounts a circular tion for the crew. The lack of a bulldozer blade
excavator on the rear. limits the system's utility.
REMARKS:
CAPABILITIES:
The BTM-3's earlier versions are now obsolete.
The BTM-3 can dig personnel trenches, anti- Along with the MI)K-2M or MI)K-3 ditching
tank ditches, and vehicle positions. Its hourly machines, any versions may be present in the
excavation rate is 220 to 600 cubic meters per technical company of the engineer battalion in a
hour. The system can dig ditches 0.6 meters wide MRI) or TI). They may also serve in the technical
by 1.5 meters deep. platoon of the engineer company in a MRR or TR.
5-155
FM 100-2-3
PZM-2
° •
:t1
DESCRIPTION:
The PZM-2 ditching machine is based on the passes, it can create ditches up to 3.5 meters wide.
wheeled T-150K tractor chassis. It has a bulldozer The PZM-2 can be carried by either helicopter or
blade mounted on the front and a ladder-type ex- transport aircraft, and it can be airdropped. It
cavator mounted on the rear. has an onboard filtration system. It can operate
in a contaminated environment for short periods
CAPABILITIES:
of time.
The PZM-2 can dig antitank ditches, personnel
LIMITATIONS:
and communications trenches, and vehicle posi-
tions. It can dig 80 to 250 cubic meters per hour. The PZM is without significant armor, being
The system can dig ditches 0.8 meters wide by essentially a modification of an agricultural trac-
1.5 meters deep on a single pass. With multiple tor. It is vulnerable to small arms fire.
5-156
FM 100-2-3
TMK-2
"-~
DESCRIPTION:
The TMK-2 trenching machine is a wheeled river hank preparation, and NIC(' decontamination.
system based on the KZKT-5381) tractor. The The hourly capacity of the TMK-2 is 200 to 600
system mounts a circular excavator on the rear cubic meters per hour, depending on the type of
and a light bulldozer blade on the front. soil. The trench created by the TMK-2 is 1.5
meters deep and 1.1 meters wide. The TMK-2 has
CAPABILITIES:
NBC detection devices and protection systems.
The TMK-2 can dig in personnel, communi-
L IMI TA TIONS:
cations means, and vehicles. Its secondary
missions include road maintenance, snow plowing, The TMK-2 is vulnerable to small arms fire.
5-157
FM 100-2-3
Antipersonnel Mines
Antipersonnel mine characteristics
5-158
FM 100-2-3
PMN
DESCRIPTION:
The PMN is a small, round, flat, box-shaped When the PMN is emplaced, a 20-minute delay-
antipersonnel mine. Its duroplastic casing has a action spring mechanism arms the pressure-plate
side hole for the firing mechanism and primer fuzing system. The method of arming makes the
charge. The top half of the mine case is covered mine extremely sensitive when emplaced. The
by a rubber sheet secured by a metal clasp. The mine cannot be disarmed.
mine contains 237 grams of cast TNT.
REMARKS:
CAPABILITIES:
The Soviets introduced the PMN around 1960.
Pressure on the top of the case activates the It has been employed on the East German border
PMN. This pressure releases a spring-loaded as well as in Vietnam. The PMN can be used
striker which hits the percussion cap capsule, singly or in groups, used in mixed or homogeneous
setting off the main charge. Though rather small, minefields, and surface-laid or buried. It can be
the PMN can cause serious injury to foot or leg manually emplaced or surface-laid with the aid of
when stepped on. chutes from trucks, APCs, or helicopters.
5-159
FM 100-2-3
PMD-6M
DESCRIPTION:
plodes. The I'MI)-6M is a direct-contact mine. It
The PMI)-6M is a wooden box with a hinged produces casualties by blast overpressure.
lid, a block of TNT, and a pull fuze. The hinged
lid serves as a pressure plate. The box is large REMARKS:
enough to contain a 200-gram charge of TNT. The PMI) mines were first introduced around
CAPABILITIES: 1939. P'MN mines have replaced them for normal
usage. However, they frequently appear in Third
When pressure forces the lid down, the safety World countries, since they are easily fabricated
pin is withdrawn from the fuze, and the TNT ex- by unskilled personnel.
5-160
FM 100-2-3
POMZ-2M
tE
Y _ 4
DESCRIPTION:
The POMZ-2M antipersonnel stake mine con- mine sits not more than 830 millimeters above the
sists of a cylindrical, segmented cast iron body ground. The mines normally are laid in (clusters of
(similar to that of a hand grenade) filled with at least four mines. A trip wire runs from the fir-
TNT and mounted on a stake. The original ing--pin retaining pin. When this wire is pulled and
POMZ-2 had six rows of fragments; the modified the remaining pin withdrawn, the mine explodes.
POMZ-2M, introduced after World War II, has
only five rows. !?EMA RKS:
5-161
FM 100-2-3
OZM-3
ELECTRIC LEADS
Improved OZM
MAIN CHARGE
DELAY DETONATOR
PROPELLING CHARGE
"2
DESCRIPTION:
The OZM series of mines rely on their bound- height of the main charge explosion. The OZM-3
ing fragmentation effect. Earlier versions include and OZM-4 have lethal radii of 9 and 13 meters,
the OZM, OZM-3, OZM-4, and the OZM-160. Each respectively.
mine consists of a main charge and a propelling
charge. Each has an electrical fuze as well as pro-
vision for a mechanical fuze. REMARKS:
5-162
FM 100-2-3
KhF-1
15.0 cm
KhF-2
18.5 cm
SHEET-METAL
MINE UNIT
LEAD SHEATH
EXPLOSIVE
SHEET-METAL CONTAINER
DELAY ELEMENT
METAL DISK -- CORK STOPPER
CARDBOARD DISK , PROPELLANT CHARGE
DESCRIPTION:
The KhF-1 and KhF-2 chemcial bounding anti- The mines are normally employed in groups of
personnel mines differ only in dimensions. Both 10 to 12, connected by cable to a single power
mines are cylindrical with a handle on one end. source located a minimum of 300 meters from the
The outer shell acts as a miniature mortar tube. grouping of mines. If the mine explodes between
The inner shell holds 4.5 liters of liquid contami- 4 to 8 meters off the ground, the contaminant
nant (mustard). filling will cover approximately 250 to 300 square
meters.
CAPABILITIES:
Both mines fire electronically from a remote
position. The firing of the electronic detonator
REMARKS:
ignites the propellant charge. This hurls the mine
upward out of the container, simultaneously During World War II, the Soviet Union produced,
igniting the delay fuze. After a delay of 1 to 1.5 but did not employ, the KhF-1 and the KhF-2. The
seconds, the delay fuze sets off the explosive Soviets designed the shorter KhF-2 because of
charge, shattering the mine and spreading the difficulty in burying the taller KhF-1 in hard and
liquid contaminant. frozen ground.
5-163
FM 100-2-3
PFM-1
Is~r
DESCRIPTION:
The PFM-1 is an aerially delivered, hydraulic- lically transmits the pressure to the fuze has a
ally activated, pressure-fired antipersonnel land- density of 1.57 grams per milliliter and contains
mine. It functions principally as an area-denial 2, 2, 2-trinitroethyl acetate, methyl, 4, 4, 4-trinitro-
munition. The mine appears to be a copy of the butylate, 2 chloro-2, 2-dinitroethyl formal and 2,
US BLU-43B mine, commonly referred to as 2, 2-trinitroethyl formal. This explosive represents
"Dlragon Teeth." Cased in plastic, this mine is a new formulation and application previously
characterized by a viscous explosive charge, a unknown to the West.
metal fuze, and a stabilizing fin. The high-density
polyethylene mine casing weighs approximately 12
grams. The fin acts to stabilize and disperse the mine
CAPABILITIES: and extends outward from the lower portion of the
fuze well. The PI"M-1 comes in green and tan
The four-component liquid explosive that hydrau- versions. A white version may also exist.
5-164
FM 100-2-3
~< I
y::~:
h
Soldiers emplacing MON-50 (background) v.
~IB ~i "1.
--p"
4 1
5-165
FM 100-2-3
~
"-;5~"ta~
-. ~C;s
_ J
DESCRIPTION:
self-erecting legs; and it extends its own trip wires.
Little is known about this newest scatterable The metal-cased mine has a fragmentation kill
antipersonnel mine: it is aerially delivered; it has mechanism.
5-166
FM 100-2-3
Antitank Mines
Antitank mine characteristics
5-167
FM 100-2-3
TMN-46
rIY\
:
DESCRIPTION:
The TMN-46 blast-type antitank mine has a cal laying. A more recently developed angled tilt-
cylindrical metal case with a slightly domed, rod fuze is used only when the mine is laid by hand.
ridged top. The main TNT charge weighs 5.:3
kilograms. R EMA
l KS:
5-168
FM 100-2-3
TM-57
4 '
---- J
DESCRIPTION:
5-169
FM 100-2-3
IESCRIPTION:
The TM-62 series of conventional antitank blast stemmed from a need for improved countermeasures
mines are the current mainstay of the Soviet anti- and variety. The TI'M-62 mines represent the first
tank mine inventory. They exist in four distinct physically similar series of mines that allows
versions: the TM-62M, metallic case; TM-62P, plastic mechanical emplacement; varying degrees of
case; TM-62, caseless; and TM-621), wooden case. detectability; and the use of a manufactured anti-
All are circular except for the TM-621), which is disturbance fuze, the VM-62Z. The TM-62 mines
rectangular. The TM-62M has a bracket on the base can be emplaced manually or mechanically, in
plate to accommodate a springy metal handle. mixed or homogeneous minefields. The TM-62M
and TM-62P probably have limited duration
CAPABILITIES: capabilities when used underwater.
It is logical to assume that the TM-62 series
5-1 70
FM 100-2-3
TMK-2
~----------~-A
---am wool
DESCRIPTION: CAPABILITIES:
5-171
FM 100-2-3
Minelaying Equipment
PMR-3
DESCRIPTION:
The PMR-3 (and the similar PMZ-4) consists of mines are emplaced at a depth of 6 to 12 centi-
a single chute and a plow attachment. The attach- meters at a speed of 5 kilometers per hour. The
ment provides the option of burying the mines or trailer weighs 1.K metric tons. The towing vehicle
depositing them on the surface of the ground. The may carry 20() to 300 mines, depending on the type
mines can be spaced 4 to 5.5 meters apart, of vehicle; these may be TM-i44-, TM-46-, TM-57-,
depending on the control setting. If buried, the or TM-62-series antitank mines.
5-172
FM 100-2-3
4In
#' i
w.Yuft
" Y? y '_lF
DESCRIPTION:
This vehicle derives from the chassis of the The minelaying device operates in a manner similar
SA-4i GANEF SAM. Mine storage is in the rear. to that of the PMR-3.
Minelaying Chutes
DESCRIPTION:
The Soviets have attached minelaying on the surface. Minelaying chutes are still avail-
chutes to trucks, APCs (especially the BTR-152), able, but they are seldom used.
and helicopters. They can quickly lay a minefield
5-173
FM 100-2-3
Mineclearing Equipment
KMT-5M
litt,il rr
d
1~L
~
lg
x
_x71
tttt
L' 1^^^^
r -Ir
S 1
DESCRIPTION/CAPA BILITIES:
The KMT-5M also includes a luminous lane-
The KMT-5M mine roller-plow combination marking device for night operations. Because plows
consists of two plows and two sets of three rollers and rollers do not clear the area between them, a
attached to the front of the tank hull. It is very "dogbone" or light chain with rollers is stretched
flexible, since it allows for either the plows or the between the roller sections to defeat tilt-rod mines.
rollers to be used, depending upon terrain features, The crew can install the system in 30 to 45
type of soil, and fuzing encountered. The rollers minutes. Quick disconnects allow the operator to
function satisfactorily against mines equipped with drop either plows or rollers or both; otherwise, the
simple pressure fuzes, but other mines will defeat crew can remove the system in 8 to 13 minutes.
this equipment. However, the roller-plow combina- All current medium tanks have fittings for
tion also allows the tank to counter more sophisti- attaching mineclearing equipment. One roller-plow
cated fuzes with plows designed to uncover or push combination is issued per tank company. However,
mines aside. The plows and rollers cannot work the engineer company of a TR or MRR normally
simultaneously. The speed of clearing varies from holds these assets. One KrAZ-255B truck or two
6 to 12 kilometers per hour. ZIL-131 trucks can carry one KMT-5M.
5-174
FM 100-2-3
KMT-6M
DESCRIPTION/CAPABILITIES:
The Soviets introduced KMT-6 and KMT-6M already mounted on tanks when they deploy onto
track width mineclearing plows along with the T-64 the battlefield.
and T-72 tanks in the early 1970s. When its plow The KMT-6M is a modernized version of the
is lowered, the KMT-6's teeth dig into the ground KMT-6. The only noticeable difference between the
and remove mines from the path of the tank rather two plows is that the KMT-6M has three tines on
than simply detonating the mines (as rollers do). its hinged extendable moldboard rather than the
The plow system is also lighter than rollers. It two on the KMT-6.
permits the tanks to retain their cross-country
mobility. Its estimated clearing speed is 6 to 12
REMARKS:
kilometers per hour; its depth of clearance is 10
centimeters. Installation requires 15 to 20 minutes. The Soviets developed the KMT-4 mineclearing
Removal requires 5 to 10. Three plows are issued plow in the 1960s. It is the predecessor of the
per tank company (one per platoon of three tanks). KMT-6, and is used on the 'T-54, T-55, and T-62
These assets are organic to the engineer company tanks. Plows without moldboards have been
of a TR or MRR. One ZIL,-131 truck can carry observed on HMPs, and fixtures for mounting
three plows. However, the plows are normally mineclearing equipment have been seen on BMP-2s.
5-175
FM 100-2-3
~~f* rY "
-V - -.
i?
'0_'} F ~ _pd~
e;
,~-. /-ja
i_}
# k
# A ..
DESC'RIPTION:
A modified T-55, with the M 986 mineclearing has a beam-like frame. Two extra min(' roller sets
roller, serves as the basis for this mineclearing ride on the rear of the vehicle.
vehicle. Its turret is absent. In its p~lace, on the
?EJMA4 KS:
right side of the chassis, is an angular attachment
housing a 12.7-mm AA machine gun; on the left 'Phis vehicle was observed in 1986 in Afghani-
side is an elevated driver's position. In front of stan. Also pictured in the column is an I MR
these additions are four smoke grenade Irojectors armored engine'e'r tractor whose crane may facilitate
on each side. Steel-reinforced rubher protective the replacement of' rollers. While the ordinary
skirts fit on the track covers to protect the fuel employment of the KM'-5M in conventional combat
tanks. Two mine roller sets with three rollers each, is only for short periods of time to create passages
similar to those of the KMT-5M plowroller system, in minefields, the new system appears to have been
are mounted in front. However, in place of the created for the spec'ial c'om bat situation in
tube-like frame of' the KMT-5M, the new system Af'ghanistan.
5-176
FM 100-2-3
Mineclearer MTK-2
MTK-2
r }, t .'. r
l 14 .
''.t
w
Ait
.
k"
lo
,a
R
.y
w"
.
-yiy
14 ~b4~:'"'~~ip;:.i'-~osr
[iiI jlj1M'
DESCRIPTION: CA PABILITIE.S:
The MTK-2 mineclearer's chassis and roadwhecls The M'l'K-2 can clear a 1 O-m-long path, :3
are similar to those of the 122-mm S1' howitzer meters wide, through a mini efi eld which h as
2S1. The MTK-2 is amphibious. It has a small, pressure fuzes; it (can clear a path S meters widle
flat, box-like turret mounted on a chassis. This through a field with tilt-rod fuzes. It carries a crew
holds the rocket-firing mechanism: when closed, it of thre(: the comnmander. the gunner. and the
covers the storage area for the explosive line driver, It has a maximum speed of '60 kilometers
charges. Before firing, a hydraulic mechanism per hour on hard surface roads, and -1.5 kilometers
raises the rocket-firing portion. per hour in the water.
5-177
FM 100-2-3
DIM
z*
Ay5
The I)IM is mounted on a UAZ-469/69 truck. This system can detect metallic mines in road-
The detection element fastens on a frame on the ways, airfields, and other terrain. It can detect
front of the vehicle. When the vehicle approaches mines buried 25 centimeters deep. It can travel at
a metallic mine, a signal light appears on the dash a speed of up to 10 kilometers per hour while
and, simultaneously, the system applies compressed scanning. Placing the system in or out of operation
air into the brake cylinders, halting the detector. takes up to seven minutes. The I)IM has a two-
man crew.
5-178
FM 100-2-3
Other Equipment
IMR
FraY y $#
DESCRIPTION: REMARKS:
This vehicle is based on a T-54"55 tank chassis. The primary mission of the IMR is obstacle
The turret is absent, replaced by a hydraulic crane clraring. Secondary uses include road clearing,
which can be fitted with a number of attachments. firefighting, and reducing the effects of NBC
An articulating, hydraulically-operated dozer blade attacks. The combat engineer (sapper) company of
mounts on the front. The crane operator sits in the engineer battalion of M RI )s and TIl)s uses the
an armored cupola. The IMR has filtration and IMRI. It cannot keep up with current models of
overpressure systems and an antiradiation liner, main battle tanks and other combat vehicles.
which would allow it to operate in a contaminated
area.
CHARACTERISTICS IMR
Crew 2-3
Weight (mt) 34.0
Length, travel position (i) 10.60
Width
vehicle (m) 3.27
dozer blade (i) 3.80 (straight)
3.40 (angled)
Height, travel position (mn) 3.37
Crane capacity (kg) 4,000.7,000
Bucket capacity (m) 0.15
DOI 1975
Status Standard
5-179
FM 100-2-3
IMR M1986
#4
,rif
k
"I~~' X~t.
-i ~;c---*u~:;
ik Y ;PIIJC
C
DESCRIPTION: REMARKS:
The IMR M1986 is based on a T-72 tank chassis. Although the IMR M1986 is presently in service
It mounts an articulating bulldozer blade on the with the Soviet armed forces, its fielding scheme
front and a telescoping crane arm which can is unknown at this time. Low ground pressure
employ a number of attachments. It has NBC reduces the tractive force of the system.
protection for the crew.
CAPABILITIES:
5-180
FM 100-2-3
BA T-M
DESCRIPTION:
The BAT has a cable-operated, two-section kilometers. The BAT-M weighs 27.5 metric tons.
adjustable dozer blade mounted on an AT-T heavy Its two-man crew can place it into an operation
artillery tractor. The BAT-M adds a hydraulic in five to seven minutes. It has a filtration system
operating mechanism for the blade, and a rotary and can operate in contaminated areas for short
crane mounted on the bed of the vehicle. The periods of time. Although it is an aging piece of
BAT-M can move material with its blade at a rate equipment, the BAT-M is still found in engineer
of 200 to 250 cubic meters per hour. Its crane units at all echelons. However, the BAT-2 is cur-
capacity is 2 metric tons. Its maximum road speed rently replacing it.
is 35 kilometers per hour, and its range is 500
5-181
FM 100-2-3
BA T-2
DESCRIPTION:
The BAT-2, previously known as the BAT crew and passenger compartment. The BAT-2 is
M1983, is based on the tracked chassis of the MT-T found at regiment and division level. Its primary
artillery tractor. It is the latest in the BAT series mission is route clearing; secondary missions
of vehicles. It mounts an articulating bulldozer include obstacle clearing and transportation of
blade, a telescoping boom crane, and a ripper. The sapper personnel.
vehicle provides NBC and armor protection for the
PKT
TI
DESCRIPTION:
The PKT and the improved PKT-2 are based can fill ditches at a rate of 100 to 120 cubic meters
on the MAZ-538 four-wheeled, all-wheel-drive tractor. per hour. The PKT-2 weighs 19.4 metric tons; it
The PKT has a hinged blade on the rear. The has a range of 500 kilometers. It has a crew of
blade has a float shoe to control the depth of the two, who can put it into operation in one minute.
cut. The PKT-2 has increased power over the PKT. It also has a hermetically sealed cab with a col-
lective protection filtration system.
CAPABILITIES:
REMARKS:
The Soviets specifically developed the PKT to
be used as a route clearer; it can operate in tem- The Soviets first produced the I'KT in 1970. Its
peratures as low as -40 degrees centigrade. Both primary mission is route clearing; its secondary
the PKT and PKT-2 have a maximum road speed missions include snow plowing and the reduction
of 45 kilometers per hour. The PKT-2 can clear of the effects of NB(C munitions. It is vulnerable
debris at a rate of 3 to 6 kilometers per hour, and to small arms fire.
5-182
FM 100-2-3
~~~
DESCRIPTION/ CAPABILITIES:
cross-country mobility and are time-consuming to
BTU dozer blades may be mounted on mount or take off.
T-54/55-series and T-62-series tanks. The blades are
effective in excavating vehicle positions and in Newer tracked armored comlbat vehicles often
light dozing work. A BTU blade can move approxi- have self-entrenching blades or spades on the rear
mately 250 cubic meters of earth per hour when of the vehicle or stowed on the lower front glacis.
clearing or filling and approximately 150 cubic The systems can create a tank hull-down position
meters of earth per hour when digging in. 'l'he in 20 to 60 minutes depending on soil conditions.
maximum speed of the tank when operating the The blades require crew members to dismount to
blade is 6 kilometers per hour. BTU blades restrict place the system into or out of operation.
k1
5-183
FM 100-2-3
Crane-Shovel E-305V
E-305 V
0 y-
E OV-4421
I'
IESCRIPTION: CAPABILITIES:
The E-305V mounts on the KrAZ-214 6 x 6 truck ''he E -:3(0BV can move 65 cubic meters of mate-
chassis. A separate diesel engine, instead of the rial per hour as a shovel, and :30 cubic meters per
truck engine, powers the crane-shovel. A newer hour as a backhoe. In comparison, the EO(V-4121
model, the E-30)BV. is mounted on the KrAZ-27513 can dig 110 cubic meters per hour as a backhoe.
chassis, as is the similar EOV-4421, a replacement The crane capacity for the E-305BV is 4 metric
for the E-305V in the Soviet and East German tons, while that of the EOV-121 is 3.5 metric tons.
armies. The E-80513V weighs 17.:3 metric tons, and the
EOV-A421 weighs 20 metric tons. The range of
both is 650 kilometers, and their maximum road
speed is 70 kilometers per hour. Both have a crew
of two.
5-184
FM 100-2-3
IRM
li
k
a~,
,: *^;
' y4 x -,eU
I~ k
DESCRIPTION:
meters per hour. Onboard reconnaissance and
This engineer reconnaissance vehicle's chassis navigation equipment includes the mine detector;
employs components of the BMI infantry combat a mechanical penetrometer, to analyze soil for
vehicle. It has two propellers in housings mounted trafficability; sonar, for water bottom profiles and
on the rear of the armored hull for propulsion in mine and obstacle detection; a gyrocompass and
the water. A wave deflector covers the front of gyro-stailizedl artificial horizon; land navigation
the hull. Also mounted on the front of the hull and night observation equipment; and the periscope.
are two arms for a metallic mine detector. A peri- The mine detector arms are hydraulically articu-
scope is mounted on the right front of the vehicle, lated to their operating position (as depicted) in
at the commander's station. The IRM weighs 17 three minutes. The detector will bring the vehicle
metric tons and is powered by a 300-hp engine. to a halt upon encountering an obstacle or detecting
With the detector arms in the travel mode, the a metallic object. The periscope can extend to 1.5
vehicle is 8.22 meters long, :3.15 meters wide, and meters and can move vertically up to 75) milli-
2.4( meters high. It is armed with a single 7.62-mm meters. The IRM has an engine exhaust smoke
machine gun. system, water pumping equipment, and a collective
CAPABILITIES: protection system. It also carries portable sapper
equipment such as portable mine detectors, a
The IRM can travel at a road speed of 52 kilo- I)SI'-30 rangefinder, a 'lR periscope, an ice drill,
meters pei hour, with a range of 500 kilometers. and a hand penetrometer. These allow dismounted
It is amphibious and can swim at up to 10 kilo- sappers to conduct further reconnaissance.
5-185
FM 100-2-3
NBC EQUIPMENT
Collective Protection Systems
The Soviets have continuously upgraded NBC citation.) The following section discusses only se-
equipment and capabilities. They have introduced lected items of NBC equipment listed under prin-
many new items and have upgraded older items. cipal items of equipment in Chapter 4, as well as
The DIA publication DST-1640S-048-86 provides a flame and smoke equipment used by Soviet units.,
complete description of individual and collective The NBC collective protection systems provide
protection equipment; protection and treatment kits; an NBC-free environment in the crew and pas-
chemical, biological, and radiation detection instru- senger compartments of vehicles. They eliminate the
ments; flame, smoke and chemical munitions and hindrances and discomfort of wearing protective
equipment; and reconnaissance vehicles, area masks and clothing. They also prevent the con-
marking devices, and warning devices. (See the tamination of vital equipment inside the vehicles.
Reference section of this manual for a complete
DESCRIPTION:
The Soviets employ two types of collective pro- passenger compartments. The resultant increase in
tection on combat vehicles: the PAZ (protivo- air pressure (overpressure) within the vehicle pre-
atomnaya zashchita) nuclear protection system and vents NBC agents from entering through nonair-
the comprehensive NBC collective protection system tight areas, such as gun ports.
(air filtration and overpressure). Some vehicles have
both types. The PAZ system consists of a radiation LIMITA TIONS:
detector, explosive squibs, and a blower/dust sepa-
rator (sometimes referred to as a centrifugal particu- All collective protection systems found on Soviet
late air filter). The comprehensive NBC collective combat vehicles are reliable only as long as the
protection system consists of a blower/dust sepa- crew and passengers remain buttoned up inside.
rator and NBC filter. When personnel open vehicle hatches or dismount,
they must assume that the inside compartments
CAPABILITIES: are contaminated. During subsequent use of the
vehicle, crew and passengers must wear masks and
When the PAZ system senses the initial pulse protective suits until the vehicle is decontaminated.
of radiation which precedes a blast wave during
a nuclear attack, the radiation detector activates REMARKS:
firing mechanisms for explosive squibs; these squibs
automatically close the louvers and apertures of The T-55 and T-62 tanks were the first Soviet
engine ports and gun sights. If the vehicle is not vehicles with PAZ systems installed as original
already buttoned up, the sound of the exploding equipment. The Soviets may have also retrofitted
squibs warns the crew to shut all hatches. The some T-55s and T-62s with NBC collective protec-
blower/dust separator filters out radioactive par- tion systems. All T-64 and T-72 tanks, as well as
ticles, but not toxic gases, from the air supply. the T-80, have both PAZ and NBC collective pro-
tection systems. The BMP, BMD, and ZSU-23-4
The comprehensive NBC collective protection also have both types of protection. Other vehicles
system protects vehicles against chemical, bio- with NBC collective protection (air filtration and
logical, and radiological contaminants. The system overpressure) systems include the following: later
includes the PRKhR radiation and chemical models of the BTR-60PB, while earlier BTR-60PBs
detector-alarm, which can automatically alert the had only a blower/dust separator; the BTR-70 and
crew to a nuclear or chemical attack and activate BTR-80; the BRDM-2; the MT-LB; the ACRV 1V12
the automatic closing system. The blower/dust series; the SP howitzers 2S1 and 2S3; the SP guns
separator forces contaminated air through the fil- 2S5 and 2S7; the SS-21; the SA-4; the SA-6; the
ter and directs purified air into the crew and SA-8; the SA-9; and the SA-13.
5-186
FM 100-2-3
-j
1".
4 ~ ca Ir
k 6
I~ s -d
DESCRIPTION/CAPABILITIES:
A wide variety of Soviet military box-body of trailers. Air enters the particulate filter (2)
trucks, trailers, and vans have a collective protec- through a weather shield (1) where the majority
tion system with gasketed doors and openings to of dust particles are filtered. From there, the air
aid in maintaining a positive overpressure of fil- is drawn through the blower (4); then it passes
tered air. The filtration system consists of a par- through the NBC filter (8) before entering the
ticulate filter, a blower, and an NBC charcoal filter. vehicle. The NBC canister uses activated charcoal
The blower and filter can be installed inside the to absorb chemical and biological agents in the
vehicle or, as is common, on the upper front walls incoming air. An independent direct current elec-
of truck-mounted box-body vans or upper rear walls trical space heater (9) is visible in the picture.
5-187
FM 100-2-3
DDA-66 on GAZ-66
TOM
4
1?ji
)
DESCRIPTION/C'APABILITIES:
The ))A series comprises truck-mounted as- forms during the summer and 48 during the winter.
semblies that consist principally of steam boilers Showering capability is 96 men per hour in the
and pressure-tight chambers into which steam is summer and 64 men per hour in winter. The
injected to decontaminate clothing and other ar- GAZ-51, GAZ-6:3, and GAZ-66 trucks mount the
ticles. Included in the equipment are knockdown I)A-53, with minor modifications. The GAZ-66
pipe shower frames, hoses, brushes, duckboards, system contains a single steam chamber. Another
soap or detergents, and probably a shower tent. modern version, Model )I)A-2, contains two
In one hour, this system can process up to 80 uni- chambers and is mounted on the ZIL-130.
5-188
FM 100-2-3
WATER TANK (RESERVE SUPPLY) STEAM AND HOT AIR GENERATING UNIT
HOSE
CARGO TRUCK
DESCRIPTION/CAPABILITIES:
The AGV-3M decontamination station is similar it supplies hot air to the drying tent for drying
in function to the DDA-53. The AGV-3M comprises decontaminated articles; and it supplies hot water
four vehicle-mounted decontamination units which to the shower tent. Ammonia normally is added
process chemically or biologically contaminated to the steam flow when chemically contaminated
clothing and light equipment and provide showers materials are processed in the steam chambers;
for personal decontamination. The four units in- formaldehyde is used for biological decontamina-
clude the following: a cargo truck, used for carrying tion. The station can decontaminate 50 to 150 sets
a drying tent; a shower tent and a collapsible water of uniforms per hour depending on the type of
tank; a truck-mounted steam and hot air generator; contamination. The AGV-3M is a three-chambered
and two truck-mounted steam chambers. The gen- system. There is also a four-chambered system, the
erator supplies steam to the steam chamber stations AGV-3U.
for decontaminating uniforms and light equipment;
5-189
FM 100-2-3
ARS-14
The Soviets use ARS-12 series and ARS-14 ZIL-157 while the ARS-14 is mounted on a ZIL-131
decontamination vehicles to decontaminate vehicles, chassis. Other improvements on the ARS-14 are a
large weapon systems, heavy equipment, and ter- slightly larger cargo tank and enhanced arrange-
rain; to refill portable decontamination equipment; ment of equipment for better accessibility. One
to transport water to other decontamination equip- tank of solution (2,500 liters) with either model can
ment; to fight fires; and to provide cold showers. decontaminate 25 tanks, 50 to 80 artillery pieces,
Either vehicle carries six chests of accessories or 500 meters of road with a 5-m width.
alongside the cargo tanks. The ARS-12U is on a
5-190
FM 100-2-3
DDP
A
A aI
~~::::~- i~~
DESCRIPTION/CAPABILITIES:
The DP-series trailer-mounted decontamination apparatus has one steam chamber. Its boiler and
units are similar to, and serve the same purposes equipment are housed in a thermally insulated
as, the D)A vehicles. The new Model DI)P-2 body.
mounts on a single-axle IAPZ-738 trailer. The
5-191
FM 100-2-3
i,, f;SP
TMS-65 decontaminating
a BR)M-2rkh
s
;;
TMS-65
as
The TMS-65 consists of a VK-1 aircraft turbojet The Soviet concept of maintaining the mo-
engine mounted on the rear of a tIral-375E truck mentum of attack presupposes a capability to
chassis. Mounted on the front of' the truck bed is decontaminate armored fighting vehicles rapidly
a 3,000-liter tank partitioned into two equal sec- and return them to conhat. However, forward1
tions: one contains fuel for the jet engine, and the employment of the thin-skinned TMS-6i5, which has
other stores water or decontaminant solution. From no crew protection, makes this system very vul-
a sealed control cab fixed to the left side of the nerable to all types of fire. The VK-I jet engine
engine, the operator can move the jet engine verti- also presents a very good signature for heat-
cally or horizontally to direct hot exhaust gases seeking missiles.
at contaminated vehicles. Ie may mix water or a
decontaminant solution intermittently into the REMARKS:
exhaust. The TMS-65s normally operate in pairs, The 'I'MS-65 has been in the Soviet inventory
positioned on both sides of a road. A contaminated since 1974.
vehicle passing between them can be decontam-
inated in approximately 2 minutes for radiological
and biological contamination, and in about 4
minutes for chemical contamination.
5-192
FM 100-2-3
Flame Equipment
LPO-50
.;~
ITION WIP.IIIJC
IGNITION
CARTRIDG
$
egCI
eg. ,125Cf U' IflFD:~
5-193
FM 100-2-3
TPO-50M
;i
DESCRIPTION:
The TPO-50M heavy infantry flamethrower 21 centimeters in diameter and 110 centimeters
consists of three identical cylindrical flamethrower long. The flamethrower weighs approximately 170
assemblies mounted on a two-wheeled cart; it has kilograms when filled and 130 kilograms empty.
a two-man crew. Each assembly contains 21 liters
of flame fuel. The fuel is propelled by gas pressure CAPA BILI TIES:
produced by an electrically ignited pyrotechnic car- The maximum range of the TPO-50M is 180
tridge. The three tank assemblies can fire together meters with thickened fuel and 65 meters with
or individually. Each assembly is approximately unthickened fuel.
5-194
FM 100-2-3
RPO
RPO-A
t ; 11 "
a
0
J
w
DESCRIPTION:
The RPO flamethrower is a shoulder-fired 180 to 200 meters. The range and accuracy of the
weapon. It fires a rocket-propelled napalm round. RPO-A are two to three times higher than that of
The RPO is reusable and can be fired at a rate the RPO. Both flamethrowers are effective as anti-
of one shot per minute. It weighs 3.5 kilograms tank weapons. Both models may be present in
and is 1,440 millimeters long. some Soviet airborne units and first-line ground
forces units.
The RPO-A is 920 millimeters long and contains
only one-half as much incendiary mixture as the
REMARKS:
RPO. This improved version is a disposable weapon.
It can be fired by one operator at an estimated These weapons require little training to use.
two shots per minute. They are much easier to transport than the jet
varieties. Also, their resupply is easier and prepa-
CAPABILITIES:
ration time is much less. Soviet forces used flame-
The RPO is capable of firing 4 liters of incen- throwers as antitank weapons during World War II
diary mixture to a maximum effective range of in special flamethrower units.
5-195
FM 100-2-3
( 2 3 4
7 6
DESCRIPTION:
The TO-55 flamethrower tank is a variant of which can be fired either continuously or in
the T-55 with a flamethrowing unit coaxially in- 35-liter increments per cartridge.
stalled in the standard turret to the right of the
CAPABILITIES:
100-mm main gun. The main compartment of the
TO-55 houses the special ATO-200 flamethrower. The TO-55 can propel the flame out to 200
The liquid burning mixture is propelled by a nitro- meters in the direction the turret is oriented. It
glycerine powder charge and ignited by an ignitor has a radiation detection system and can produce
placed within the charge. The 460 liters of flame a smoke screen by injecting vaporized diesel smoke
fuel are propelled by 12 slow-burning cartridges fuel into the exhaust system.
5-196
FM 100-2-3
SMOKE GENERATORS
Smoke Generator Vehicle TDA-M
TDA-M
;~ehkgMY~'' a
. T
tlt
hr
- I dL
t ~allca- ~x*r~
1~Li~
DESCRIPTION/CAPABILITIES:
This thermomechanical smoke generator is meters long and 100 meters wide under favorable
mounted on a specially adapted GAZ-66 truck. It meteorological conditions. It carries sufficient fog
emits a smokescreen approximately 800 to 1,000 oil for four hours of continuous operation.
TMS-65
DESCRIPTION/CAPABILITIES:
The primary mission of this vehicle is to perform sites; concealing assembly areas and deployment
rapid decontamination of combat vehicles contami- lines; screening movement of attacking troops 2
nated by NBC agents. However, the secondary kilometers from the FLOT; screening river cross-
mission is to generate large-scale obscuring clouds. ings; and providing a smoke cloud for protection
Uses in this secondary mission include: screening from the thermal effects of a nuclear blast. The
rear area installations; generating smoke screens TMS-65 is mounted on a modified Ural-375E truck
for decoy operations; concealing decontamination chassis.
5-197
FM 100-2-3
VER
4s, -w 0
v t.r~: ;i
E
Ih~ii "~\,~
u
.:i'~c~ I y::
ea,
*rr) b I
aa
' I~
IL
L r~lllllllllllC
I--- - I
-- - ~~_,.. -'-
4 31111*C
DLESCUIPTION/(CAPAB BLITJJ S:
Most Soviet comhat vehicles have an engine of the evaporation chamher is the most important
exhaust smoke system. In this system, diesel fuel degrading factor for the VEEfSS. When smoke is
is injected into the exhaust manifold, evaporated, generated for more than one hour, the thickness
and ejected with the exhaust gases. Then it con- of the coke formed reaches it) to 2(0 millimeters.
denses in a thick, heavy cloud of white or gray If the coke is not removed, the VEESS will heat
smoke. up during a subsequent smoke generation and
possily cause the smoke agent in the evaporation
chamber to ignite. This will eject a flame and
LIMI TA TIONS:
bllack smoke (instead of the normal white or gray
Intensive coke formation on the internal surface smoke) through the nozzle.
5-198
FM 100-2-3
The Soviets use smoke pots, barrels, and drums can ignite these smoke devices, which have a solid
to create small and large-scale obscuring clouds obscuring agent as a filler. Units which require
behind their own positions. They also use them the use of quick smoke on the battlefield use smoke
to screen semifixed and fixed installations. Electric grenades. These grenades can fill in gaps in smoke
shock systems, percussion ignitors, or friction fuzes screens established by smoke pots.
DM-11
J
DESCRIPTION: (APA BILITIE'S:
The Model DM-11 smoke pot has a cylindrical The I)M-11 filling produces a yellowish white
sheet metal body with the cover taped to its body smoke covering 418 square meters under favorable
to provide a waterproof seal during storage. The meteorological conditions. The smoke lasts 5 to 6
top of the body has 10 peripheral smoke emission minutes after a delay of 2 seconds during ignition.
holes. The DM-11 has a height of 10.67 centimeters,
a diameter of 15.2 centimeters, and a weight of
2.22 kilograms.
5-199
FM 100-2-3
ilia,
as
'k f
> o~
f y
I
K
DESCRIPTION/CAPABILI TIES:
The Model Yal)-11 toxic smoke pot is a squat, emission holes. A cover with a handle is taped
cylindrical munition filled with a solid smoke mix- over the top to prevent moisture until the time of
ture and an irritant, chloroacetophene ((IN). Sili- usage. The pot has a height of 7.29() centimeters,
ceous earth that prevents flaming of the active a diameter of 7.92 centimeters, and a weight of
agent covers this fill. Matchhead igniters are :368 grams.
located under the perforated top that has seven
YaD)-21
I)ESCRIPTION/CAPABILl TIES:
The Model YaI)-21 toxic smoke pot is a cylin- ventional matchhead and a scratcher block, the
drical sheet metal can filled with adamsite ()M) pot has seven smoke emission holes. The YaI)-21
and smoke mixture. It has a perforated top and a is 10.4 centimeters high and 15.5 centimeters in
removable cover. Activated by the use of a con- diameter, and it weighs 2.18 kilograms.
5-200
FM 100-2-3
DB-11
DESCRIPTION/CAPABILITIES:
The Soviets use the 1)B-11 smoke barrel in large- smoke produced by the 1)B-11 will cover approxi-
scale smoke operations. It weighs 44 kilograms mately 4,180 square meters under favorable meteoro-
and has a 10 to 13 minute burning time. The white logical conditions.
DESCRIPTION/CAPABILI TIES:
The I)Sh-100 smoke drum is a metal cylinder scale smokescreening operations. After the electrical
approximately 1.2 meters high and .4 meters in igniter is inserted into the cartridge receptacle, the
diameter. It contains a 100-kg mixture that burns drum is electrically ignited by battery.
10 minutes to produce a white smoke for large-
5-201
FM 100-2-3
6
L
I J
DESCRIPTION/ CA PABILI TIES:
The BDSh-5 large smoke barrel is a cylinder screen water crossing operations by large-scale
filled with a smoke mixture; it has carrying handles forces. The 13)Sh-5 will burn for 5 minutes. It has
on each end. A tube at one end contains an igni- a delay time fuze of up to 39 seconds. The barrel
tion device with starter charge. The barrel, which is .49 meters long with a diameter of .4 meters. It
will float in water, is balanced so that the smoke weighs 40.1 kilograms when filled.
emission opening is always up. This is useful to
The BDSh-15 large smoke barrel produces white in a steel container 48 centimeters long, with a
smoke for 14 to 16 minutes over an area of approxi- diameter of :39.4 centimeters, and a weight of 38.6
mately 4180 square meters under favorable meteoro- kilograms with filling.
logical conditions. This smoke barrel is enclosed
5-202
FM 100-2-3
No photograph available
DESCRIPTION/ CAPABILITIES:
This grenade has been standardized to permit second filling, "mixture No. 1,"' is a yellowish
launching from a cup-like launcher. The grenades liquid which is ignited hy a WI' ampule inserted
are packed in earth or sand in wooden boxes. The into the bottle just prior to firing. The fuel adheres
Soviets use two known standard fillings. The first, to the surface of' the target and burns for approxi-
"KS liquid" (white phosphorous in carbon disulfide), mately one minute, producing a black smoke and
ignites immediately upon exposure to air. A small temperatures of 70 to 850 degrees Centigrade.
amount of water or oil and a wooden stopper
prevent the liquid from making contact with the REMARKS:
air until the grenade ruptures against a target. This incendiary grenade should not be confused
This fill burns for approximately 2 minutes at a with field expedients such as the "Molotov ('ock-
temperature of 850 to 1000 degrees Centigrade. The tail" used by Soviet forces during World War 11.
RDG-1
i:
)ESCRIPTION: CAPABILITIES:
The RI)G-l grenade is a burning-type smoke The average hand-thrown range is :15 meters.
grenade made of cardboard with a wooden handle. Area coverage is approximately 46t) square meters
It contains a black smoke mixture. A friction fuze under favorable meteorological conditions. Tlhe 1.2
with a 3.5-second delay ignites it. The grenade to 1.5 seconds burning time provides a quick
floats and can generate smoke over a large body screening device for attacking forces.
of water. The RI)G-1 weighs .5) to .59 kilograms
and is 22 centimeters long.
5-203
FM 100-2-3
RDG-2
FUZE
/
SCRATCHER
C PAPER SAFETY CAP
BODY
SMOKE MIXTURE
TDIAPHRAGM
1
!_
:IJ
DESCRIPTION:
The RDG-2 smoke grenade is a waxed cardboard a string. A RDG-2 weighs .50 to .58 kilograms.
cylinder filled with a smoke mixture that produces
a screen of white smoke. This white smoke will CAPABILITIES:
cover an area of approximately 334 square meters The average hand-thrown range is 35 meters
under favorable meteorological conditions. Each with a burning time of 1.0 to 1.5 minutes. The
end of the cylinder has a diaphragm that serves RDG-2 is used to conceal the maneuvers of small
as an inner cover to hold the smoke mixture in combat elements. To activate the grenade, the cover
place and an outer cardboard cover with an at- strings must be pulled and the cover discarded.
tached string. A cardboard tube, containing a fric- After the scratcher is rubbed over the friction fuze,
tion fuze at one end, extends through the center the user holds the grenade for 2 or 3 seconds
of the grenade. At the fuze end, between the dia- before throwing. A match can ignite the RDG-2 if
phragm and the cover, a scratcher is attached to the scratcher does not ignite the fuze.
5-204
FM 100-2-3
ZDP
K 6 1
--2 1.
2.
launch tube
generator
4.
5.
cap with red marking
cap with green marking
3. motor 6.&7. cords with rings
4_._.4
DESCRIPTION/ CAPABILITIES:
The ZDP incendiary smoke cartridge comes in motor up to 560 meters. In this case, the user
a metal tube which weighs .75 kilograms, is 290 unscrews the red cap on the other end of the
millimeters long, and has a diameter of about 50 charge, pulls the ring on the cord, and rests the
millimeters. To activate the charge, the user must launch tube against one of the following: the swivel
unscrew the green cap on one of the ends, pull of a firmly seated automatic rifle, the safety catch
the ring on the cord of the pressure-friction fuze, of a rocket launcher, or the support of a machine
and handthrow the ZI)P to a minimum of 25 gun.
meters. The ZD1)P can also be propelled by a rocket
0111PFA
~Nil" si;
DESCRIPTION/CAPABILITIES:
Until the 1970s, the Soviets did not mount smoke vehicles. The grenade projector consists of two
grenade projectors on their combat vehicles. They components: a tube assembly mounted on the
did, however, put two smoke barrels on the rear exterior of the vehicle, and a firing mechanism or
of the T-54 and T-55 tanks. These obscured the control unit mounted inside, where it is operated
tanks from the enemy while they maneuvered. This by the gunner or commander. The smoke grenade
system was only effective when the tanks were consists of a fuze, body, and fin asembly.
retreating, because of the positioning of the smoke
IEMA RKS:
barrels. The new vehicle-launched smoke grenades
provide a rapid means of shielding the vehicle and The Soviets now mount this type of vehicle-
personnel during evasive maneuvers from antitank launched smoke grenade on some BMP-l1s; on the
weapons. The grenades give some protection to BMP-2; on the HT'R-80; and on the Tl'-62, T-64, T-72
crews when they are dismounting from disabled and T-80 tanks.
5-205
FM 100-2-3
LOGISTIC EQUIPMENT
Advancements in the logistic equipment and tion of transport and other logistic equipment, see
capabilities of the Warsaw Pact countries have been TB 381-5-22A and D)ST- 115S-280-87. (Complete cita-
continuous. Some new items have been introduced tions are given in the Reference section of this
and older items upgraded. For a complete descrip- manual.)
Pipelaying Machines
TUM-1 00
CRANE
I4
Ak
'Vt
TlM-1.50
5-206
FM 100-2-3
9' .: .. y
'Ai
.;
:i:\ :.
.JI: :e
Ir
f
T~ ~j
L
:
.it ;t
b~
p : '
:
-i
DESCRIPTION/CAPABILITIES:
The TUM-100 automatic pipelaying machine Using the traversing crane, the machine loads
consists of a wheeled prime mover and a semitrailer pipes from a pipe-carrying tractor-trailer transport
with a pipe hopper, an assembly device, and a vehicle onto its integral hopper. It then feeds the
crane. It uses pipes which are 100 millimeters pipe from the hopper into the assembly line, couples
(approximately 4 inches) in diameter. Except for the pipe sections, and lays the pipe in place. It
the size of pipes, the TUM-100 functions much the lays pipe at a rate estimated at one to three kilo-
same as the TUM-150. meters per hour.
5-207
FM 100-2-3
MTP
-'4,L
+4 r s j k
DESCRIPTION:
The MTP is a BTR-50P variant developed to the hull sides are like a BMI''s; they allow the
provide servicing, maintenance, and recovery crew to fire their personal weapons without dis-
support of the IMP infantry comhat vehicle. The rupting th( protective seal.
power train compartment in the rear and the
CHARACTERISTICS MTP
driver's compartment at the front have retained
the general characteristics of the IR'r-50P. The Crew ...................................... 3-4
centrally located working compartment has an Weight (kg) ............................... 16,000
armored roof raised high enough to allow the Length (mm) ............................... 6,910
maintenance crew to work while standing. The
working and driver's compartments probably have Width (mm) ............................... 3,140
a collective NBC filtration system. Firing ports in Height (mm) ............................. 2,500
5-208
FM 100-2-3
T-54-7'
a~jsl~JaB~k3CF~I .
$-
aaqr*-
~~-r
-ulp~a~ :~iab
DESCRIPTION/REMARKS:
The T-54-T and T-55-T armored recovery vehicles rear of the vehicle. They can mount a snorkel for
are based on modified chassis of the T-54 and T-55 deep fording. Performance figures are the same as
medium tanks, respectively. The recovery vehicle for the 'T-54 and T-55 tanks. They have been in
variants have a crane able to lift up to 3,000 service since around 1965, replacing older tank
kilograms, a loading platform, and a spade on the recovery vehicles based on the T-34 tank chassis.
5-209
FM 100-2-3
i-
h.a
DESCRIPTION/REMARKS:
The T-62-T armored recovery vehicle is based first observed in the November 1977 Moscow Red
on a modified T-62 medium tank chassis. It was Square parade.
BREM-1
~1
~y
d'1006h
.. p_
DESCRIPTION/CAPABILITIES:
The BREM-1 is based on the T-72 tank chassis. snorkel. It probably has collective NBC protection
Instead of a turret, it has a rectangular platform for its crew of two to three. It mounts one or two
on top of the hull for work and loading. It has a machine guns of unknown type and caliber.
19-mt capacity hydraulic crane, a 25-mt capacity
winch with 200 meters of cable, a hydraulically REMARKS:
operated dozer blade, as well as a telescoping The BREM-1 was introduced in 1984.
5-210
Mi-2/ Mi-6A/ Mi-8T/ Mi-17/ Mi-24/ Mi-26/ Mi-28/ Ka-?/
CHARACTERISTICS HOPLITE HOOK HIP HIP H HIND HALO A HAVOC A HOKUM A
FOOTNOTES. *Internal/'sling,
-Depending on role.
"'Without'with auxiliary fuel tanks.
TT
0
0
01
FM 100-2-3
Mi-2/HOPLITE
V~;
K"
DESCRIPTION:
The HOPLITE is a general-purpose, light HOPITEs sometime carry a variety of addi-
helicopter. It has an all-metal, semimonocoque, tional armaments, but not simultaneously. These
pod-and-boom fuselage with fixed tricycle landing may include, on each side of the fuselage: a
gear and a tail skid. Twin 400-shaft-horsepower 16-shot 57-mm rocket pod; two AT-3c/SAGGER C
(shp) engines are mounted side-by-side above the ATGMs; one 50- or 100-kg bomb; or up to two
cabin. There is a three-blade main rotor and a SA-7/GRAIL missiles, which are for antiair pro-
two-blade tail rotor. There have been as many as tection. Some versions carry auxiliary fuel tanks
20 different civilian and military versions of the rather than add-on armaments; the external tanks
basic HOPLITE design. Military versions may cannot be installed when a weapons rack is in
carry a variety of armaments, with or without place.
external weapon support racks.
CAPABILITIES:
No standard configuration exists for the armed
military versions of the HOPLITE. The weapon The HOPITE can perform a variety of combat
mix is generally adjusted to meet the particular support and administrative roles that require either
needs of the mission. There is normally a provision an unarmed or lightly armed helicopter. Its primary
for a single fixed 23-mm gun to be mounted on applications are liaison and reconnaissance; it may
the left side of the fuselage just below the cockpit; also serve in passenger, cargo, or air ambulance
however, some HOPLITEs may be built with a roles. As a passenger transport, it can carry six
fixed 23-mm gun on each side of the fuselage. to eight passengers. The cargo version can carry
Another common armament is a flexibly mounted 700 kilograms internal cargo or 800 kilograms as
7.62- or 12.7-mm machine gun in the window of a slung external load. In an ambulance role, it
the cabin door on the left side. Twin or single can accommodate four litters and a medical atten-
fixed forward-firing 7.62- or 12.7-mm machine guns dant in the cabin. The HOPLITE has also been
can be mounted on both external weapon support observed with a smoke-generating device, possibly
racks. to augment the smoke-laying capabilities of the
5-212
FM 100-2-3
5-213
FM 100-2-3
Mi-6A /HOOK
Z 1~,7~b
~C1
Vas:d)1~P 1
RO7
DESCRIPTION:
The HOOK is a heavy-lift helicopter, twice the O()1Ltruck, or it can carry up to 12,000 liters of
size of any Free World helicopter. It has a semi- fuel in soft bladders. Thus, it can serve as a
monocoque, pod-and-boom fuselage, with fixed forward area refueling point for tanks, infantry
tricycle landing gear and clamshell rear doors. It combat vehicles, other vehicles, or helicopters. The
has twin 5,500-shp turboshaft engines mounted HOOK also has a secondary mission to transport
above the cabin and large detachable wings troops. It can carry up to 65 troops.
mounted on the upper fuselage just to the rear of
the engines. There is a five-blade main rotor and The large, hydraulically-operated clamshell
a four-blade tail rotor. Most HOOKs used for tac- doors permit rear ramp loading and unloading of
tical roles have a 12.7-mm machine gun in the personnel, vehicles, and a wide range of bulky
fuselage nose. cargo. The wings offload the main rotor in cruis-
ing flight; however, they are normally removed
CAPABILITIES: when the HOOK operates in a flying crane role,
carrying external cargo.
The primary mission of the HOOK is to trans-
port heavy equipment and cargo (12,000 kilograms
internally or 8,000 kilograms slung). The cargo
REMARKS:
hold has a floor length of 12 meters, a cabin
width of 2.65 meters, and a cabin height varying When first observed in 1957, the HOOK was
from 2.01 meters at the front to 2.50 meters at the world's largest helicopter. It entered service
the rear. Thus, the HOOK can carry one BRDM-2 in 1961 and served as the basis from which the
scout car, one BMI)-1 combat vehicle, one GAZ-66 Mi-10/HARKE A and Mi-10K/HARKE 13 flying
truck, or variants of these vehicles in its cargo crane helicopters were developed. Since 1982, the
compartment. It can carry towed 120-mm mortars, even larger Mi-26/HALO A has been replacing the
122-mm howitzers, or ZU-23 AA guns. Alterna- Mi-6/HOOK in the heavy-lift squadrons of front-
tively, it can accommodate a loaded 7,500-liter level transport helicopter regiments.
5-214
FM 100-2-3
Mi-8T/HIP C
Mi-8T/HlIP E
1--IS~~q
J015h AL
AMORLi
DESCRIPTION:
The Mi-8T/HIP medium helicopter has an all- 500-kg bombs. Aside from the external weapon
metal, semimonocoque, pod-and-boom fuselage, stores, the HIP C may mount a 12.7-mm machine
with fixed tricycle landing gear and external fuel gun in the right clamshell door in the rear. Each
tanks. Twin 1,500-shp turboshaft engines are window in the transport section has a support
mounted above the cabin. On later models, the bracket to allow infantrymen to fire their assault
engines may have air-intake covers, particle sepa- rifles or light machine guns at ground targets.
rators, and IR suppressors. There is a five-blade The Mi-8THlIP C may also be configured for
main rotor; a three-blade tail rotor is mounted on minelaying and ELINT collection roles.
the right side of a small vertical stabilizer. The
HIP has a sliding, jettisonable main passenger The Mi-ST HIP D airborne command post
door at the front left side of the cabin and large variant is similar in appearance to the HIP C.
clamshell cargo-loading doors at the rear. It However, it has a rectangular canister, rather
carries a winch and hook for external loads. than weapons, on each outboard rack, and it car-
Several versions of the Mi-8T, both armed and ries added antennas.
unarmed, are in military use.
The Mi-ST, IIlP E is the standard gunship
The Mi-8T HIP C is the basic medium version, with triple stores racks on each side of
transport/assault helicopter. It may have optional the fuselage for external weapon systems. Its
twin racks outboard of the fuel tanks on each side armament may include six 32-shot 57-mm rocket
of the fuselage for a variety of external weapon pods, four 250-kg bombs, or two 500-kg bombs
systems. Its armament may include four 16-shot suspended below the racks. It normally has four
57-mm rocket pods, four 250-kg bombs, or two radio-guided AT-2c/SWATTER C ATG'Ms
5-215
FM 100-2-3
mounted on rails above the racks. The HIP E has medium-lift squadrons of front-level transport
a swivel-mounted 12.7-mm machine gun in the helicopter regiments. Along with the HIP C, the
nose and possibly a 12.7-mm machine gun in the HIP E is used in army-level attack helicopter regi-
right rear clamshell door. ments. The HIP J and K are organic to the front-
level helicopter ECM squadron.
The Mi-8TB/HIP F is an export version of the
HIP E on which the ATGM armament is changed LIMITATIONS:
to six wire-guided AT-3/SAGGERs.
The HIP C lacks the ATGM capability of the
The Mi-8T/HIP G airborne command post HIP E or F versions. In the general cargo role,
variant has rearward-inclined antennas projecting the HIP C is most often limited to 3,000 kilograms
from the rear of the cabin and from the underside internal cargo, due to power limitations. The HIP
of the tail boom. It also has a box under the tail K ECM variant also has power limitations.
boom for a Doppler radar.
REMARKS:
The Mi-8T/HIP J is an ECM version with
additional small antenna screens and small, The first Mi-8 prototypes, HIP A and HIP B,
square boxes on the sides of the fuselage fore and appeared in 1961 and 1962, respectively. The HIP
aft of the rear legs of the tricycle landing gear. C, first observed in late 1962, became the standard
series production model in 1963. It has been pro-
The Mi-8T/HIP K is a radio-jamming version
duced in both civil and military forms. Civil ver-
with a large crossed-dipole antenna array on each
sions have larger, square windows in place of the
side of the cabin, aft of the rear landing gear legs.
round windows on military versions. The standard
It has no Doppler radar under the tail boom.
civil passenger version, Mi-8P, has seating for 28
CAPABILITIES: to 32 passengers in the main cabin. The deluxe
passenger version, Mi-8P Salon (sometimes called
The HIP C serves primarily as an assault Mi-8S), has larger fuel tanks and cabin furnish-
transport and general cargo transport helicopter. ings for nine or eleven passengers. Although the
However, it may also perform armed support roles. Mi-8S may be used by the military as a unarmed
It can carry 24 troops or 4,000 kilograms of cargo liaison helicopter, most military versions are
internally, or 3,000 kilograms as a slung load. variants of the 24-passenger general utility
version, Mi-8T. Armed versions of the Mi-8T/HIP
The HIP E and F gunship versions are also
C have been in service since 1966. The more
capable of carrying troops. They have assault rifle
heavily armed HIP E was introduced in 1977.
support brackets for firing at ground targets from
the side windows. All Mi-8T versions can be con- The Mi-14/HAZE A is a derivative of the Mi-8T.
verted for an air ambulance role, accommodating It is a shore-based ASW helicopter, introduced in
12 litters and a medical attendant. 1975 as a replacement for the Mi-4/HOUND B.
The HIP C is organic to division-level heli- The HIP H, introduced in 1981, is an improved
copter squadrons, in the HIP squadron of some version of the Mi-8T which the Soviets have desig-
army-level attack helicopter regiments, and in the nated as Mi-17.
5-216
FM 100-2-3
Mi-17/HIP H
pop
The Mi-17/HIP H is an improved version of recovered with the aid of the external winch above
the Mi-8T. It has the same airframe and main the side door.
rotor as the Mi-8T, but has its tail rotor
Although its lift capabilities are essentially the
mounted on the left side of the vertical stabilizer
same as the Mi-8T's, the Mi-17 has greater perfor-
rather than on the right. The HIP H also has an
mance in terms of speed and range. With a 4,000-kg
uprated powerplant: two 1,900-shp turboshaft
payload, it can attain a speed of 240 kilometers
engines. The engines can be fitted with air-intake
per hour and a range of up to 460 kilometers. Its
covers, particle separators, and IR suppressors.
maximum speed is 250 kilometers per hour; with
The HIP H may also carry a strap-on IR decoy
normal takeoff weight, the flight range is 495 kilo-
flare dispenser. The winch above the side door of
meters without auxiliary fuel tanks and 950 kilo-
the cargo compartment is slightly modified. As
meters with auxiliary tanks. If one engine fails,
with the Mi-8, the Soviets produce the Mi-17 in
the output of the other increases automatically to
various civil and military versions. On armed
a contingency rating of 2,200 shp. The HIP H is
versions, the 12.7-mm nose machine gun is moved
organic to division-level helicopter squadrons,
somewhat higher than on the HIP E and F, to
army-level attack helicopter regiments, and the
the center of the fuselage, and the outriggers sup-
medium-lift squadron of front-level transport
port three weapon stations on each side of the
helicopter regiments.
fuselage, normally mounting 32-shot 57-mm rocket
pods. Unlike the HIP E and F, the HIP H has LIMITA TIONS:
not appeared with ATGMs.
Although the HIP H should be capable of car-
CAPABILITIES: rying ATGMs, none have been observed mounted
to date. There are no indications that the HIP H
THE HIP H can perform a variety of military will serve as an antitank platform.
roles: assault transport, cargo transport, and air
ambulance. As an assault helicopter, it can carry REMARKS:
up to 24 troops and 1,000 kilograms of ordnance The Mi-17/HIP H was first seen at the Paris
simultaneously. It can be rapidly converted into a Air Show in June 1981. Civil as well as military
cargo transport and can carry 4,000 kilograms of versions have small, round windows. Exported
cargo internally or 3,000 kilograms as a slung armed assault versions seen outside the Soviet
load. As an air ambulance, it can carry 12 litters Union mount 23-mm machine gun pods on the
and the necessary medical equipment. Men and center pylon mount and 32-shot 57-mm rocket pods
material weighing up to 150 kilograms can be at the inner pylon position.
5-217
FM 100-2-3
Mi-24D/HIND D
: 9~ ' -,
i i
DESCRIPTION:
The Soviets currently deploy three attack heli- decoy flare dispensing system may be mounted
copter versions of the Mi-24/HIND. All three share under the rear part of the tail boom. Also common
the same basic airframe, powerplant, and rotor to all three versions are the retractable tricycle
system. The all-metal fuselage features structural landing gear and stub wings for carrying arma-
hardening, with the substitution of steel and ments. Each stub wing has two universal pylons
titanium for aluminum in critical components, and a wingtip pylon specifically designed for
including the underside of the crew compartment. mounting ATGMs. The three versions differ by the
The crew compartment consists of stepped, tandem types of armament carried.
cockpits under two individual bubble canopies.
The gunner's cockpit is in the nose, and the pilot's
cockpit behind it is raised to provide an unob- The Mi-24D/HIND D has a chin turret under
structed forward view. A probe fitted on the upper the nose, mounting a four barrel 12.7-mm Gatling-
right corner of the gunner's bulletproof windshield type machine gun which has a wide range of
may be part of a low-airspeed sensing device used movement in both azimuth and elevation. A
to indicate optimum conditions for minimum dis- sensor pack protruding below the chin turret
persion of unguided rockets. To the rear of the houses direct-view optics. The four universal
cockpits is the main cabin for carrying light cargo pylons on the stub wings normally mount four
or possibly troops. Twin 2,200-shp turboshaft 32-shot 57-mm rocket pods. In place on the four
engines are mounted above the main cabin. The 57-mm rocket pods, the universal pylons can also
engines can be fitted with air-intake covers, accommodate two 20-shot 80-mm rocket pods with
particle separators, and IR suppressors. Above the folding-fin, air-to-surface rockets. Four 250-kg
engines is a five-blade main rotor; a three-blade bombs or two 500-kg bombs, chemical or conven-
tail rotor is on the left side of the vertical tional, may replace the rocket pods. The two
stabilizer. An IR jammer may be mounted atop wingtip pylons have launch rails for a total of
the fuselage just behind the cabin, and an IR four AT-2c/SWATTER C ATGMs.
5-218
FM 100-2-3
Mi-24E/HIND)E
kI
a~P~iBai-
The M-24E/HIND E has the same armament launched AT-6/SPIRAL ATGM. Instead of rails,
as the HINDI)I on its nose and universal pylons. the wingtip pylons feature distinctive, I-shaped
However, it replaces the rail-launched AT-2c/ launch platforms for a total of four SPIRAL mis-
SWATTER C with the higher-performance, tube- siles (two on each wingtip).
(ND F
Oj~PP~i
\i~~~,~C~,
"95
llr
PI
5-219
FM 100-2-3
The HIND F has the same stub wing arma- attack helicopter) in the main cabin area, even
ment as the HIND E. However, it replaces the though the gunship variants have narrowed the
chin turret-mounted 12.7-mm Gatling gun with a target presented by the cockpit area. When firing
fixed 30-mm twin gun pod mounted on the right ATGMs, the HIND must remain in the zone of
side of the fuselage. AA fire long enough to guide the missile to its
target; that is, up to 27 seconds for the SWATTER
The HIND E and F models may carry a second or 11 seconds for the SPIRAL.
AT-6 launch platform on the outboard universal
pylon (in place of the normal rocket pod or There are indications that the HIND, with its
bombs); this allows them to mount a total of 8 conventional, fully articulated rotor head, may not
SPIRAL missiles. They have also been observed be as agile as the Soviets would like. It is very
with "stacked" AT-6 launch platforms on the difficult to maneuver at low speed or in the hover.
wingtip pylon and the outboard universal pylon, It has poor low-altitude flight characteristics.
for a possible total of 16 SPIRALs. Furthermore, Because of its wide turning radius at high speed,
it is possible for auxiliary fuel tanks or sprayer it is ill-suited for fighting enemy helicopters.
tanks for chemical agents to replace the rocket REMARKS:
pods or other ordnance on all four universal
pylons. The first flight tests with the Mi-24B/HIND B
prototype occurred in 1970 and 1971. A second pro-
CAPABILITIES: totype, designated Mi-24A/HIND A, upgraded its
The HIND D, E, and F are designed for a twin powerplant from the original 1,500-shp
primary close air support role. When providing engines (the same as on Mi-8T/HIP) to the 2,200-shp
fire support for Soviet ground forces, they are engines used on all subsequent HIND models.
especially effective against enemy tanks. They It relocated the tail rotor from the right to the
may escort troop-carrying Mi-8T or Mi-17 assault left side of the vertical stabilizer. In 1972, the
helicopters. In lieu of passengers, the HIND HIND A entered service as an armed assault heli-
gunship has the room and payload to carry a full copter, the flying equivalent to an infantry combat
reload for its weapons. HINDs generally operate vehicle. These early HINDs were designed to
in pairs (or multiple pairs), closely coordinating deliver a fully-equipped motorized rifle squad onto
their attacks, which frequently come from different the battlefield and to support the inserted troops
directions and can be either simultaneous or stag- with fire from onboard weapons. Aside from the
gered. HIND tactics emphasize contour and low- stub wing armaments later used on the HIND D,
level flying. The HIND D, E, or F attack heli- the HIND A had only a single-barrel 12.7-mm
copters are organic to division-level helicopter machine gun in the nose of its "greenhouse"-type
squadrons and to army-level attack helicopter cockpit. The pilot and copilot sat side-by-side in
regiments. the cockpit. The Mi-24U/HIND C is a trainer ver-
sion generally similar to the late model HIND A,
Powerful engines, a relatively narrow fuselage, but it mounts no machine gun or ATGMs.
and downward-angled stub wings give the HIND Although the HIND A has been replaced by later
gunships good maneuverability, compared to models, the HIND C is still used for training.
earlier Soviet helicopters. All three gunships have Based on exercise experience with the HIND A,
high speed (up to 320 kilometers per hour) and the Soviets decided to redesign the front of the
good climbing capability (12.5 meters per second). fuselage to give priority to the gunship role. Their
Retrofitting with IR suppressors, IR jammers, and first true attack helicopter, the Mi-24D/HIND D,
IR decoy flare dispensers has increased surviv- was introduced in 1976. It had tandem cockpits,
ability against enemy SAMs and air-to-air thick titanium armor under the cockpits, and
missiles (AAMs). Some HINDs now have a tail upgraded nose armament. While the gunship
gun blister for added protection and firepower. retained the ability to carry 8 to 10 troops in the
LIMITATIONS: main cabin, this was no longer its primary role.
The Mi-24E/HIND E with the higher-performance
Due to its size, the HIND presents a significant AT-6/SPIRAL ATGM system followed in 1978.
profile. This makes it vulnerable to visual detec- The HIND F with twin 30-mm guns appeared in
tion. Originally designed for a troop-carrying role, 1981. Export models of the HIND D are desig-
the HIND fuselage is somewhat broad (for an nated Mi-25 by the Soviets.
5-220
FM 100-2-3
Mi-26/HALO A
~j~$~ .L
~PBL ~~1~ :::~^*
i'~B i . Ali
t4$Y 2
_K
UI ~h q
DESCRIPTION:
The Mi-26/HALO A heavy-lift helicopter has an with the loading ramp trailed. The HALO A has
all-metal, semimonocoque, pod-and-boom fuselage a five-man crew: pilot, co-pilot, navigator, flight
with clamshell rear loading doors and a loading engineer, and loadmaster.
ramp. It has fixed, dual-wheeled, tricycle landing
gear and a retractable tail skid at the end of the
tail boom. It has an eight-blade main rotor and a CAPABILITIES:
five-blade tail rotor mounted on the right side of
the swept-back vertical stabilizer. Twin 11,400-shp The engines of the HALO A more than double
turboshaft engines with air-intake covers are the power of its predecessor, the Mi-6A/HO)K.
mounted side-by-side above the cabin. However, they each weigh 181 kilograms less than
the HOOK's engines, and the overall empty
The cargo hold has a flat floor length of 12 weight is only slightly greater than the tHOOK
meters, a cabin width of 3.25 meters, and a cabin (28,200 versus 27,240 kilograms). T'hus, the HALO
height varying from 2.95 to 3.17 meters. The A is able to fly twice the payload of the HOOK
length of the cargo area can increase to 15 meters at comparable speeds and to greater ranges.
5-221
FM 100-2-3
d
'i
~
d
~p~
sa
i~f
;g
t) ~stiaa~E~B~L
r
k -
a.i
8~%-
; " 6' I~ 1
"~lt:;.
The internal cargo payload of the HALO A is loading through the rear doors and to permit land-
20,000 kilograms, the same as its reported ex- ing on varying surfaces. The retractable tail skid
ternal payload. It can carry its full payload of permits unrestricted approach to the rear cargo
20,000 kilograms a distance of 800 kilometers. doors. Two electric winches (each with 2,500-kg
The cargo area, which is larger than that of the lifting capacity) on overhead rails can move loads
Soviet An-12 CUB medium-range fixed-wing trans- along the length of the cabin.
port, is large enough to carry any of the following:
The HALO A has an avionics package that in-
over 100 troops, two BRDM-2 scout cars, two
cludes weather radar, radio navigation, l)oppler
BMDs, one BMP, one BRT-60/70/80, one MT-LB,
radar, and moving map display. These features
or variants of these vehicles. In addition to the
give it an all-weather flight capability. It also has
weapon systems which can be carried in the
a fully automatic pilot.
HOOK, the HALO A can accommodate the follow-
ing: a BM-21 MRL, a 2S1 SP howitzer, a ZSU-23-4
SP AA gun, an SS-21SCARAB TEL, a Ural-375 REMARKS:
cargo truck, or a loaded 8,000- to 10,000-liter POL
The West first identified the HALO A in 1978.
truck. The load and lift capabilities of the HALO
Its first public appearance was at the Paris Air
A are comparable to the US C-130 Hercules
Show in June 1981. It has been operational since
transport aircraft.
1982. It is replacing the Mi-6AHOO()K in the
The length of the main landing gear legs can heavy-lift squadrons of the front-level transport
be hydraulically adjusted individually to facilitate helicopter regiment.
5-222
FM 100-2-3
Mi-28/HA VOC A
gggc~
-. ir,ih
_ '
40 . F I
4 YI1 r
Iml
7:1
;;
P, -..
DESCRIPTION:
Preliminary information indicates that the SAMs (possibly the SA-14GREMLIN.) As with
Mi-28/HAVOC A is a ground-attack helicopter other current Soviet helicopters, the HAVOC A
similar in appearance to the US AH-64 Apache. may also be fitted with IR suppressors and IR
It has an all-metal, semimonocoque fuselage. This decoy flare dispensers.
is probably much narrower than that of the
HIND, since the HAVOC A has no passenger/ CA PA BIL ITIE S:
cargo compartment. The fuselage is also slightly
shorter than that of the HIND, with stepped cock- The HAVOC A is designed as a ground-attack
pits to the rear of the nose for the gunner in front helicopter, primarily for an antitank role. It has
and the pilot above and behind him. Due to the improved acceleration, low-altitude maneuver-
narrow profile, the twin turboshaft engines, fitted ability, and low-speed flight characteristics
with air-intake covers, are not mounted atop the compared to the HINI). Its slim profile, maneuver-
fuselage but rather on the upper sides, just behind ability, and alternative air-to-air armaments also
the cockpits. Above the engines is a five-blade give it favorable characteristics for a secondary
main rotor; the tail rotor is mounted on the right role of engaging enemy antitank helicopters. It is
side of the vertical stabilizer. The fixed, tailwheel- expected to have night/adverse weather capability
type landing gear has single main wheels on similar to the Apache's.
V-struts below the cockpit area. Stub wings below
the engines have pylons for weapon stores. REMARKS:
Armament may include a 30-mm cannon in a When fielded in the early 1990(s, the Mi-28/
chin turret and up to 16 AT(Ms on the stub IIAVOC A will supplement the Mi-24 HINI) in the
wing pylons. In place of the ATGMs, the pylons ground-attack helicopter role. The Mi-28 probably
may also mount rocket pods, AAMs, or modified exists in several variants.
5-223
FM 100-2-3
..' , r~ cr;
"
-. ~ - ."
~- rri
DESCRIPTION: CAPABILITIES:
Preliminary information indicates that the The Soviets apparently have designed HOKUM
HOKUM A is a unique fighter helicopter with a A as a special-purpose fighter helicopter with a
streamlined fuselage and a tapered nose resem- primary air-to-air role. It could have a maximum
bling a jet aircraft. It probably has retractable speed of approximately 350 kilometers per hour.
tricycle landing gear and a distinctive coaxial, The HOKUM A is likely to employ its AAMs and
contra-rotating, main rotor system. There is no rapid-fire cannons as a low-level tactical counter-
tail rotor on the vertical stabilizer. Two large air system. Its primary targets would be enemy
horizontal stabilizers project from the sides of the close air support aircraft, including antitank
tail boom. Twin turboshaft engines with air-intake helicopters.
covers are mounted high on the sides of the
narrow fuselage, just behind the cockpit. Large
auxiliary wings below the engines have pylons for
weapon stores.
REMARKS:
Armament may include 23- or 30-mm cannons
mounted under the nose and a combination of The Kamov I)esign Bureau probably designed
AAMs and modified SAMs (possibly the SA-14/ the HOKUM A. It has produced other coaxial-rotor
GREMLIN) on the wing pylons. The HOKUM A helicopters for Soviet naval aviation. When fielded
is not believed to carry ATGM armament. As with in the early 1990s, the HOKUM A will give the
other current Soviet helicopters, the HOKUM A Soviets a significant rotary-wing, air-to-air capabil-
may also be fitted with IR suppressors, an IR ity for which no Western counterpart exists. This
jammer, and IR decoy flare dispensers. helicopter probably exists in several variants.
5-224
FM 100-2-3
FIXED-WING AIRCRAFT
Fighter/Interceptor/Ground Attack Aircraft
-ITI; #,
At altitude (kmihr) 1,145 1.450 2,250 2,500
riri s
MiG- 1 7/FRESCO
MiG-21 / FLOGGER R
r,
A-I~t - -. ,'ca,,- p
5/ - ~\
5-225
FM 100-2-3
Characteristics (continued)
MiG-25/FOXBA T BID
MiG-25/FOXBAT E
,.-.'.1
1;/
MiG-29/FULCRUM A
,07 ; -;
ii ~ ~~~M
5-226
FM 100-2-3
since 1981. Has look-down,, ground attack weapons, ground attack weapons, system. May carry a variety of
shoot-down capability. inciudingg ASM> .including two 30-mm guns, ground attack weapons, includ- r4.
bombs, rocket pods, and ing one 23-mm Gatling-type
ASMs. The Su-17 was gun, bombs, rocket pods, and 7.>
..
introduced in 1970. It is ASMs. The FENCER is the first , c Wa
Su-24 /F ENCER
. -iz
.. ; i~
i-
r i . ,'t,.
4 f y ')
5-227
FM 100-2-3
Characteristics (continued)
Su-25/FROGFOOT A
04 .
V""
Su-2 7/FLANKER B
5-228
FM 100-2-3
MAXIMUM SPEED
At altitude (km/hr)
_' .. :..
FOOTNOTE 'Possible nuclear weapon deiivery capability. possibie eiectronic warfare configuration, possible reconnais-
sanc- configuration
Yak-28/BREWER
J-
" 7
-"
f*SII~a ~l ~k :: ---
:~s~
5-229
FM 100-2-3
fi:
.., ,:
, _
..
w
'° ; ;..
h
r.
. .
a''' Y
' ' :
a
:,:
~ -i;.,,.
_ + ..
5-230
FM 100-2-3
Transport Aircraft
Transport aircraft characteristics A n-22/COCK
Paratroops 60 175 40 30 ..
... , .,..,.--
uo...
and D are
ESM/ECM
variants.
An-i12/CUB
An 26/CURL
fa
ITN
0. 0 r..-
:; _
~
, ,; ., __
5-23 1
FM 100-2-3
Characteristics (continued)
I1-76/CANI)1I)
.. .
IVA
+ .~ll
dC
i: i
irT "- *-.
~~tx
.-i~k.
5-232
FM 100-2-3
Air-To-Surface Missiles
ASM characteristics
AS-2/ AS-3/ 1 AS-4/ J AS-5/ AS-6/ f AS-7/ AS-9/ AS-1O/
CHARACTERISTICS KIPPER KANGAROO j KITCHEN KELT KINGFISH KERRY KYLE KAREN
RANGE (km)
High altitude 185-210 650 750-800 320 700-800 NA NA NA
Low altitude INA 185 300 160 200-220 10 80 8-10
SPEED (Mach) 1.2 1.8 2+ 0.9-1.2 2.5-3.0 0.6 subsonic 0.5-0.8
PROPULSION turbojet turbojet liquid rocket liquid racket liquid rocket solid rocket solid rocket solid rocket
GUIDANCE
Launch/cruise autopilot autopilot inertial autopilot inertial electro-optical
Mid-course radio radio inertial inertial radio
command cormand command
Terminal active radar passive active radar, active radar, passive possible
radiation passive passive radiation laser homing
radiation radiation
LAUNCH WEIGHT (kg) 4,200 11,000 6,000+ 4,800 4,800 1,200
WARHEAD HE, nuclear nuclear HE, nuclear HE, nuclear HE, nuclear HE HE HE
LENGTH (m) 10.0 14.9 11.3 8.59 10.5
DIAMETER (m) .90 1.85 .50 1.00 .90
WINGSPAN (m) 4.6 9.15 2.45 4.57 2.5
LAUNCH AIRCRAFT Tu-16/ Tu-95/ Tu-22/ Tu-16/ Tu-16/ Su-24/ Su-24/ Frontal
BADGER C BEAR B and C BLINDER B, BADGER G BADGER, FENCER, FENCER and aviation
Tu-22M Tu-22M Su-7B/ other frontal aircraft
BACKFIRE B, BACKFIRE B FITTER A, aviation (see AS-7/
Tu-95 Su-17/ aircraft KERRY)
BEAR G FITTER C,
MiG-27/
FLOGGER D
NO. MISSILES A 1 (BLINDER B) 2 2 (BADGER) 4?
CARRIED 1-2 (BACKFIRE B) 1-2 (BACKFIRE B)
ROLE Antiship Medium/ Medium/ Antiship. Tactical Tactical Tactical
long-range long-range Standoff missile on missile. missile on
standoff standoff strike against CAS aircraft. Possibly CAS aircraft.
nuclear missile. land targets antiship. Short-range
against area Antiship. from high and ground attack.
targets. Anteradar. low level. Antiarmor.
Strategic.
REMARKS 2/3 size Largest ASM. Interim Supersedes Exceptional Normal Large con-
AS-3 Still operational weapon on AS-I/KENNEL accuracy. launch ventional
in large BACKFIRE B. Most widely Normal altitude warhead.
numbers deployed ASM. launch alti- 300-3,000 m.
Normal tude 11,000 m
launch (climbs to
altitude 18,000 m for
9,000 m. mid-course
cruise).
FIRST SEEN 1961 1961 1967 1968 1977 INA INA 1977?
m A -oll
NOTE. In addition to the above, the Soviets have fielded at least four other tactical ASMs, designated AS-i1/KILTER. AS-12/KEGLER, AS-13/KINGBOLT,
and AS-14/KEDGE, as well as the long-range, land-attack, air-launched cruise missile AS-15, which is launched by the BEAR H and BLACKJACK.
5-233
FM 100-2-3
RADIOS
Radio performance characteristics
NOMENCLATURE/TYPE FREQUENCY MODES AND RANGE (km) OUTPUT TUNING ANTENNA REMARKS NOMENCLATURE/TYPE FREQUENCY MODES AND RANGE (km) OUTPUT TUNING ANTENNA REMARKS
(MHz) MODULATION _ (watts) (MHz) MODULATION _ _ _ (watts)
R-102M RADIO STATION R-123M TRANSCEIVER 20-51.5 voice, FM 16-55 20-30 continuous, 4-r whip or Mounted in armored and
Low HF INA INA 900 INA whip or Mounted on two ZIL-151 (HF/VHF) (40-70 at four preset 10-r tele- tactical vehicles and in
long-wire or ZIL-157 trucks.
halt) frequencies scopic fixed installations at
R-103M RADIO STATION Low HF INA INA INA INA INA Vehicle-mounted, including company through regt
GAZ-63. level, can net with all
R-104M TRANSCEIVER 1.5-4.25 AM INA 20 INA slant beam, Manpack or vehicle- other FM voice command
(MF/HF) dipole, or mounted, including GAZ-69; and control radios in
long-wire employed for MRR and Soviet inventory.
arty regt command nets; R-126 TRANSCEIVER 48.5-51.0 voice, FM 2-4 0.5 continuous, or whip Manpack; MR pit to
being replaced by R-130M (VHF) three preset company.
R-105M TRANSCEIVER 36-46.1 voice; FM 6-8, 25 with 1-1.3 continuous whip or Manpack or vehicle- frequencies
(VHF) amplifier long-wire mounted; MRC level; being (crystals)
replaced by R-107. R-129 TRANSCEIVER 1.5-11 voice, Morse 30 8 continuous INA Manpack
R-107 TRANSCEIVER 20-52 voice; FM 6-8 1 continuous, whip or Manpack or vehicle- (MF/HF)
(HF/VHF) probably long-wire mounted; company level, R-130M TRANSCEIVER 1.5-11 voice (SSB), 50 12-40 continuous, whip, dipole, Mounted in armored and
four preset also employed with (MF/HF) Morse, teletype; unknown preset inclined tactical vehicles; employed
frequencies amplifier for TR and arty AM frequencies beam for TB and TRcommand
bn command nets; nets; replaces R-112 and
replacing R-105, R-108, is replacing R-104M in
R-109, R-114. some units.
R-108M TRANSCEIVER 1.5-19.999 voice, (SSB) Morse 6-8, 25 with 1-1.3 continuous whip or Manpack or vehicle- R-143 TRANSCEIVER HF voice, Morse 20-50 10 INA whip, long-
(HF) amplifier long-wire mounted; employed by wire
arty battery; being R-147 TRANSCEIVER INA INA INA very low INA INA Portable; employed in air
replaced by R-107;
installations using UM-3 power defense pIt of MRB.
amplifier being replaced R-148 TRANSCEIVER 37-51.95 voice 4-5 low power INA whip Manpack; employed in MR
by R-111. (VHF) pit and company;
R-109M TRANSCEIVER 21.5-28.5 voice; FM 6-8, 25 with 1-1.3 continuous whip or replacing R-126.
Manpack or vehicle-
(HF) amplifier long-wire mounted; employed by R-154-2M RECEIVER 1.5-12 voice, Morse, NA NA continuous INA Employed with R-118 BM3,
(MF/HF) teletype; AM R-102M2, and R-103M
SAM battery; being
replaced by R-107; radio stations.
installations using UM-3 R-155P RECEIVER INA INA INA INA INA INA Developed as improvement
amplifier being replaced to R-154-2M.
by R-111. R-159 TRANSCEIVER VHF INA INA INA INA INA Replacing some R-107.
R-11 TRANSCEIVER INA voice, FM INA INA INA INA Replacing R-109M; uses R-254M RECEIVER Low VHF voice, tone NA NA detent INA Airdrop assembly aid
modular construction and system; employed by
automatic tuning circyits. SPETSNAZ, recon units,
R-112 TRANSCEIVER 2.8-4.99 voice, Morse; 25-60 (voice) 50 (voice) continuous whip Mounted in armored and and paratroopers to locate
(HF) AM 40-100 90 (Morse) tactical vehicles; replaced airdropped BMDs and
(Morse) by R-130M cargo pallets bearing
R-114M TRANSCEIVER 20-26 voice; FM 6-8 INA continuous whip or Manpack or vehicle- marker beacon radios.
(HF) long-wire mounted; being replaced R-255PP RECEIVER INA INA INA INA INA INA Used for airdrop assembly
by R-107. aid.
R-118 8M3 RADIO STATION 1.5-12 voice, Morse 350 400 continuous zenith Mounted on GA-66; R-311 RECEIVER 1-15 voice, Morse; NA NA continuous whip, long- Manpack or vehicle-
(MF/HF) teletype; AM employed by regt and (MF/HF) AM wire, or mounted; employed to
higher. directional monitor air warning and
NBC communications nets.
5-234
Characteristics (continued)
NOMENCLATURE/TYPE FREQUENCY MODES AND RANGE (km) OUTPUT TUNING ANTENNA REMARKS
(MHz) MODULATION (watts)
R-313-M2 RECEIVER 100-400 voice, Morse NA NA continuous whip, long- Probably used with
(VHF/UHF) wire electronic warfare units.
R-350M BURST- INA INA INA INA INA INA Employed by SPETSNAZ.
TRANSMISSION RADIO
R-352 TRANSCEIVER Low VHF voice 3 1.2 three fixed INA
frequencies
R-392A TRANSCEIVER approx. 44-46 voice 2-3 1-2 continuous, whip Manpack; probably
(VHF) (estimate) (estimate) probably six employed in MR pIt and
preset company.
R401M/R-403 RADIO- 60-70 four-channel 40-50 2.5 continuous, twin yagi Vehicle-mounted; employed
RELAY STATION (VHF) (two voice, two choice of 54 at regt level and higher.
telegraph), FM frequencies
R-404 RADIO-RELAY STATION 1,500-2,000 multichannel LOS 10 INA 0.5-i or Mounted in three
(UHF) voice, data, 1.5-i twin box-body
facsimile; FM pababolic vehicles.
dish
R-405 RADIO-RELAY STATION 390-420 (UHF), multichannel LOS 2.5 detent crossed yagi, Mounted on ZIL-131;
60-69.975 voice, data, planar employed in division-level
(VHF) facsimile; FM reflector and higher command and
admin nets R-405 is an
R-401 with extra amp and
frequency doubler and
tripler.
R-409 RADIO-RELAY STATION INA multichannel LOS INA INA rectangular Mounted on ZIL-131 or
FM grid ZIL-157 van; employed at
division level and higher.
Glossary
Acronyms, Abbreviations, and Definitions
Glossary-1
FM 100-2-3
Glossary-2
FM 100-2-3
Glossary-3
FM 100-2-3
zampolit - deputy commander for political affairs ZRTB - Soviet abbreviation for air defense rocket
ZIL-(no.) -- medium truck from Likhachev Motor Vehicle technical base
Plant
Glossary-4
References
REQUIRED PUBLICATIONS
These required publications are sources that
users must read in order to understand this
publication fully.
RELATED PUBLICATIONS
These related publications are sources of addi-
tional information. They are not required in order
to understand this publication.
References-1
General Index
Note. For specific pieces of equipment, see the "Equipment Index" which follows.
General Index-1
FM 100-2-3
Automatic grenade launcher platoon (MRB, MRR, MRD and numbers of, 3-4-3-5
TD), 4-29 specialities offered by, 3-4-3-5
consolidation of company-level squads, 1-6 Combat arms branches (troops), 1-2
Combat engineer (sapper) company (engineer battalion, MRD
and TD), 4-81
-B-
Combat training directorate, 1-1
Combined arms: concept of, 1-4
Bakery. See Mobile field bakery (materiel support battalion,
MRD and TD) Combined Arms Army (CAA)
Benefits (of military service) description of, 4-116
annual leave, 2-5 organization of, 1-5, 4-116-4-117
for families of noncareer personnel, 2-5 Commissioning schools (officer): applications for, 3-4
living quarters, 2-5
Communications platoon (engineer battalion, MRD and TD),
medical and health care, 2-5
4-84
passes, 2-5
per diem on TDY, 2-5 Communist Party of the Soviet Union (CPSU). See also
permanent change of station, 2-5 Indoctrination
postal privileges for families of first-time service, 2-5 control over armed forces, 2-5
resorts and sanitoria, 2-5 influence over military discipline, 2-6
subsistence subsidy for career personnel, 2-5 membership in, 2-6
BMD platoon (airborne regiment), 4-144 military officers on Central Committee, 2-2
BMD squad (airborne regiment), 4-144 relationship with zampolit, 2-6
role of PPO in, 2-6
Bolshevik Revolution, 3-8
Composite artillery battalion (air assault brigade, front),
4-143
-C- Conscripts
and crop harvesting, 3-7
CAA. See Combined arms army determents for, 2-1
diversion to civilian projects, 3-7
Cargo transport company (materiel support battalion, MRD
education of, 2-1
and TD), 4-90
evaluation of, 2-1
Central Group of Forces (CFG) in Czechoslovakia, 1-5 family benefits for, 2-5
Central Military Topographic Directorate, 1-3 marriage restrictions for, 2-5
Central Military Transportation Directorate (VOSO), 1-3 morale of, 2-0
percentage in Soviet ground forces personnel, 2-0
CGF. See Central Group of Forces in Czechoslovakia
physical examination for, 2-1
Chemical protection battalion (army), 4-123
Conscription
Chemical protection brigade (front), 4-137
age requirements for, 2-0--2-1
Chemical protection company (MRD and TD), 4-95
completion of conscript duty, 2-0
Chemical protection platoon (MRR and TR, MRD and TO), deferment for family reasons, 2-1
4-23 deferment for illness, 2-1
Chemical troops, 1-3 description of, 2-0--2-2
Chief of the rear, 1-3 draft boards for, 2-1
legislation for, 2-0, 2-1
CINC, ground forces. 1-1
military oath for, 2-2
Civil defense: training programs, 3-2 quotas for, 2-1
Collection and evacuation platoon (medical battalion, MRD registration of, 2-1
and TD), 4-97 reserves, 2-0, 2-1
student deferments from, 2-1-2-2
Colleges, military. See also Universities, civilian; Education;
Academies. military; and Training of women, 2-1
General Index-2
FM 100-2-3
Education. See also Academies; Universities, civilian; Colleges, description of, 4-130
military as largest wartime field formation, 1-5
as operational-level organization, 4-2
advanced courses, 3-4
organization of, 4-131-4-143
extension and correspondence courses, 3-4-3-5
potential number of armies in, 4-2
military academies, 3-4-3-5 in Soviet reorganization and modernization, 1-6-1-7
of NCOs, 3-6
negative aspects of, 3-7
of officers, 3-4-3-5
of warrant officers, 3-5-3-6
-G-
Electronic intelligence (ELINT), 1-3
ELINT. See Electronic intelligence General-purpose helicopter squadron (army), 4-116, 4-118
General Index-3
FM 100-2-3
General-purpose helicopter squadron (air forces of the front), Howitzer battery (122-mm) (howitzer battalion, MRR (BTR),
4-133 MRD and TD), 4-17
Germany: Western Group of Forces (WGF) in, 1-5 Howitzer brigade (122-/152-mm) (artillery division, front),
Ground forces 4-135
CINC of, 1-1 Hungary: SGF in, 1-5
headquarters of, 1-1
as largest component of armed forces, 1-1 -I-
at operational level, 4-2
organization by geographical boundaries, 1-4 Independent air assault battalion (army), 4-128
organization into large field formations, 1-4
Independent army corps. See New army corps (NAC)
at tactical level, 4-2
Group of Soviet Forces, Germany (GSFG). See Western Group Independent motorized rifle regiment, 4-116n
of Forces Independent reconnaissance regiment (air forces of the front),
Groups of forces, See Military districts and groups of forces 4-133
Independent tank battalion (MRD), 4-105
GSFG. See Western Group of Forces
Independent tank regiment (CAA), 4-116
GTO. See All-Union Sports-Technical Complex Ready for Labor
and Defense of the USSR (GTO) Indoctrination
Gun battalion (152-mm) (artillery brigade, army), 4-120 mental conditioning in, 3-6
as part of Soviet life, 2-6
Gun brigade (152-/203-mm) (artillery division, front), 4-135
role of Communist Party in, 2-5, 2-6
Gun-howitzer battalion (152-mm) (artillery brigade, army),
role of Komsomol in, 2-6
4-120
role of main political directorate in, 2-5
Gun-howitzer brigade (152-mm) (artillery division, front), in training, 3-1, 3-8
4-135
Induction. See Conscription
Initiative: stifling of, 3-7
-- I- Intendance service, 1-4
ITB. See Independent tank battalion
HCF. See High command of forces
Health care
-K-
medical benefits for servicemen, 2-5
physical exams for conscripts and inductees, 2-1, 3-6 Komsomol, 2-3
resorts and sanitoria, 2-5
number of members in, 2-6
Heavy artillery battalion (203-mm) (high-powered artillery as part of Soviet life, 2-6
brigade, front), 4-136 and political control of military, 2-6
Heavy mortar battalion (240-mm) (high-powered artillery relationship with zampolit, 2-6
brigade, front), 4-136 Kray, definition of, 2-1
Helicopter. See also Attack helicopter regiment (army);
Helicopter squadron (MRD and TD); Transport helicopter -L-
regiment (air forces of the front)
and combined arms operations, 1-7
in support of live-fire exercises, 3-6 Law on Universal Military Service (1967)
Helicopter ECM squadron (air forces of the front), 4-133, and length of service, 2-1, 2-8
5-216 1985 amendment to, 2-3
Helicopter squadron (MRD and TDO),4-100 and premilitary training, 3-1, 3-2
provisions for women in, 2-3
High command of forces (HCF), 1-4-1-5
and the semiannual conscription of 18 year olds, 2-0
High-powered artillery brigade (front), 4-136 and warrant officers, 2-2
Housing, 2-5 Leave
Howitzer battalion (122-mm) (MRR (BTR), MRD and TD), for career personnel, 2-5
4-16 for conscripts, 2-5
General Index-4
FM 100-2-3
Long-range reconnaissance company (reconnaissance battalion, Military districts. See Military districts and groups of forces
MRD and TD), 4-73n, 4-76n Military districts and groups of forces
in Eastern Europe, 1-5
_M_
geographical organization of ground forces, 1-4
number of, 1-5
in peacetime, 1-5
Main political directorate, 1-1, 2-5 responsibility for training, 3-1
role at different levels, 2-5-2-6 in wartime, 1-5
role of zampolit in, 2-6 Military educational institutions directorate, 1-1
Main staff, 1-1 Military oath, 2-1
Maintenance battalion (MRD and TD), 4-91 English translation of, 2-2
Maintenance company (artillery regiment, MRD and TD), Military topographic service, 1-3
4-60
Military tribunal, 1-4
Maintenance company (MRR and TR, MRD and TD), 4-24
Minister of defense
Maintenance company (SAM regiment (SA-6), MRD and TD),
authority over reserve officers, 2-9
4-69
military rank of, 2-6
Maintenance platoon (engineer battalion, MRD and TD), role in promotions, 2-4
4-84
Ministry of defense (MOD), 1-1-1-5
Major geographical and force groupings, 1-4
definition of, 1-1
Maps. See Military topographic service military rank of officials in, 2-6
Materiel support battalion (MRD and TD), 4-88 and mobilization, 2-9
Materiel support brigade priorities for deployment of new equipment, 1-5
relationship to DOSAAF, 2-1
army, 4-127
front, 4-138 role in premilitary training, 3-1-3-2
Ministry of education: role in premilitary training, 3-2
Materiel support company (MRR and TR, MRD and TD),
4-23 Missile firing battery, (SAM regiment (SA-6), MRD and TD),
4-68
Materiel support units, 1-6-1-7
Missile technical battery, (SAM regiment (SA-6), MRD and
May Day: and summer training, 3-8
TD), 4-67
Medical aid station (MRB, MRR, MRD and TD), 4-8
Missile troops and artillery, 1-2
Medical battalion (MRD and TD), 4-96
Mobile field bakery (materiel support battalion, MRD and
Medical company (medical battalion, MRD and TD), 4-97 TD), 4-99
Medical point. See Regimental medical point Mobilization
Medical service, 1-3 directorate responsible for, 2-9
Michman, 2-6, 2-7 effect on civilian economy, 2-10
ordered by Presidium of the USSR Supreme Soviet, 2-9
Military academies. See Academies, military
in peacetime, 2-9
Military band, 1-4 personnel plan phases in, 2-10
Military commissariat personnel needed for (in wartime), 2-9
and deferment of students, 2-2 supply stockpiles for, 2-9
functions of at different levels, 2-1 unit expansion in, 2-10
inductee processing by, 3-6 in wartime, 2-9
inductees report to, 2-1 Mobilization division, 1-5
management of reserve system at lower levels, 2-8 MOD. See Ministry of defense
and mobilization, 2-9
Modernization
numbers of, 2-1
responsibility for training within districts, 3-1 effect on types of operations, 1-6
role in assignment of inductees, 2-1 of organization and equipment, 1-4
role in evaluation of potential conscripts, 2-1 of Soviet force since mid-1960s, 1-5-1-6
US equivalents for (at different levels), 2-1 Motorized rifle squad (BTR), 4-3
General Index-5
FM 100-2-3
General Index-6
FM 100-2-3
role in promotions, 2-4 Recovery platoon (maintenance battalion, MRD and TD),
role in the ordering of mobilization, 2-9 4-94
Private: rank of, 2-6, 2-7 Regimental headquarters (MRR and TR, MRD and TD), 4-14
Procurator (prosecutor), 1-4 Regimental medical point (MRR and TR, artillery regiment,
MRD and TD), 4-25
Procurator General of the USSR, 1-4
Reorganization
Professionalism: in training, 3-6-3-7
in fire support, 1-5
Promotions (officer) formation of new corps-type structure, 1-6
assignments leading to, 2-4 of Soviet forces since mid-1960s, 1-5-1-6
and the Council of Ministers, 2-4 and types of operations, 1-6
efficiency reports for, 2-4 Repair workshop (MRB, MRR, MRD and TD), 4-8
Minister of Defense's role in, 2-4
Republic: definition of, 2-1
and the Presidium of USSR Supreme Soviet, 2-4
up through rank of colonel, 2-4 Reserve of Supreme High Command (RVGK)
and retirement, 2-4 airborne troops of, 1-2
time-in-grade requirements, 2-4 assets allocated to fronts, 4-130, 4-132n, 4-136
, PVO Strany, 1-2 Reserves
PVO Sukhoputnykh Voysk, 1-2 administration of system at lower levels, 2-8
General Index-7
FM 100-2-3
Ruble: US equivalent for, 2-5 Soldiers and sailors (Soviet term), 2-6, 2-7
RVGK. See Reserve of the Supreme High Command Southern Group of Forces (SGF) in Hungary, 1-5
Soviet Naval Infantry (SNI). See also Naval infantry
as branch of Soviet navy, 4-154
-S- SP howitzer battalion (122-mm) (MRR (BMP) and TR, MRD
and TD), 4-36
SP howitzer battalion (152-mm) (artillery regiment, MRD and
SAM brigade (SA-4), (army or front), 4-123
TD), 4-54
SAM regiment (SA-6), (MRD and TD)
SP howitzer battery (122-mm) (SP howitzer battalion (122-mm),
equipment in, 4-63--4-64 MRR (BMP) and TR, MRD and TD), 4-37
organization of, 4-62
SP howitzer battery (152-mm) (SP howitzer battalion (152-mm),
SAM regiment (SA-8), (MRD and TD) artillery regiment, MRD and TD), 4-55
equipment in, 4-102-4-103 Special maintenance platoon (maintenance battalion, MRD and
organization of, 4-101 TO), 4-94
Sappers, 1-3 Special purpose forces. See SPETSNAZ
Schools. See also Academies, military; Education; Universities, Special troops, 1-2-1-3
civilian SPETSNAZ brigade (front), 4-143
extension and correspondence courses, 3-4-3-5 SPETSNAZ company or battalion (army), 4-129
evening university, 3-6
SPETSNAZ team, SPETSNAZ company (army or front), 4-129
high schools, 3-4
Nakhimov (navy) schools, 3-4 Sports. See also Premilitary training
Suvorov (army) schools, 3-4 programs for Soviet youth, 2-0
Seaman: rank of, 2-7 role of GTO in, 3-3-3-4
in training concept, 3-6
Service, conditions of
SSM battalion (MRD and TD), 4-70
benefits, 2-5
indoctrination, 2-5-2-6 SSM brigade
pay, 2-5 SCUD (army or front), 4-122
pensions, 2-5 SS-21 (army), 4-38n. 4-70, 4-116n, 4-118n
promotion, 2-4
General Index-8
FM 100-2-3
State Committee for Vocational and Technical Education Tank/tracked vehicle maintenance company (maintenance
role in premnilitary training, 3-2 battalion, MRD and TD), 4-92
Stavka VGK: in connection with airborne troops, 1-2, 4-144 Tanks. See also "Equipment Index" for specific tanks
Strategic rocket forces, 1-1, 4-130 older models in army, 1-5
Students deferments, 2-1, 2-2 new models in army, 1-5, 1-7
upgrades in divisions, 1-7
Supply and maintenance platoon (signal battalion, MRD and
in Western TVD, 1-5
TD), 4-87
TB. See Tank battalion
Supply platoon (MRB, MRR, MRD and TD), 4-8
TD. See Tank division
Supply and service platoon
TDY. See Temporary duty
artillery regiment, MRD and TD, 4-61
maintenance battalion, MRD and TD, 4-94 Technical company (engineer battalion, MRD and TD), 4-82
medical battalion, MRD and TD, 4-98 Technical service (title), 2-8
Supreme Court of the USSR: relationship to justice service, Temporary duty (TDY): per diem for, 2-5
1-4 Theater of military operations (TVD)
Supreme high command (VGK) composition of, 1-5
airborne troops committed by, 1-2, 4-144 concept of, 1-4
and HCF, 1-4 fronts in, 1-5
headquarters of (Stavka VGK), 1-2, 4-144 in geographical organization of ground forces, 1-4
Suvorov (army), schools, 3-4 types and numbers of, 1-4
in wartime, 1-4
Western TVD, 4-1
S-T-- Theater of war (TV)
definition of, 1-4
TA. See Tank army description of continental TV, 1-4
Tactical-level organizations, 4-2 in geographical organization of ground troops, 1-4
political and economic significance of, 1-4
Tank army (TA)
types of, 1-4
number of TDs in, 4-2
Topographic services. See Military topographic service
organization of, 1-5, 4-118-4-119
TR. See Tank regiment.
Tank battalion (MRR, MRD and TD), 1-7, 4-15
Training
Tank battalion (naval infantry regiment), 4-156
battle drills, 3-6
Tank battalion (TR, MRD and TD), 4-108
course of the young soldier, 3-6
Tank company daily schedule of, 3-8
independent tank battalion (MRD), 4-106 in DOSAAF specialist schools, 3-2
TB (MRR, MRD and TD), 4-15 example of DOSAAF specialist training, 3-2
TB (TR, MRD and TD), 4-107 of large units, 3-6
Tank division (TD) live chemical agents used in, 3-6
live-fire exercises, 3-6
number of active divisions in 1987, 1-5
negative aspects of, 3-7
organization of, 1-6, 4-112-4-115
at night, 3-6
Tank regiment (TR) premilitary, 2-1, 3-1-3-4
description of (in MRD), 4-46 problems with ethnicity in, 3-7
description of (in TD), 4-109 programs for enlisted and NCO personnel, 3-1, 3-6
development into a combined arms team, 1-7 realistic conditions in, 3-6
equipment, in MRD, 4-47-4-49 refresher courses for inductees, 2-1
equipment, in TD, 4-110-4-111 repetitive nature of, 3-6
flexibility compared to MRR, 1-7 reserve periods, 2-8, 2-9
organization of, in MRD, 4-46 forreservists, 3-1
organization of, in TD, 4-106 results of programs since 1968, 3-2
General Index-9
FM 100-2-3
_ __ __ ~
General Index-lO0
Equipment index
-2- -7-
Note. Entry headings appear in ascending numerical order within individual equipment series;
for example, T-55, T-64, T-72, and so forth. This facilitates entry location in this type of
index. Subheadings are listed in alphabetical order.
Equipment Index-i
FM 100-2-3
Equipment Index-2
FM 100-2-3
Equipment Index-3
FM 100-2-3
Equipment Index-4
FM 100-2-3
Equipment Index-5
FM 100-2-3
-H-
Equipment Index-7
FM 100-2-3
.Mi-24A/HIIND
Mi-24/HIND F, 5-219, 5-220
AT-6/SPIRAL on, 5-102, 5-111 MON-100, 5-158, 5-165
A, 5-220 MON-200, 5-158, 5-165
AT-2/SWATTER on, 5-102, 5-104 Mortars, 5-74-5-81
AT-6/SPIRAL on, 5-102, 5-111 Mountain guns, 5-59, 5-61
Mi-24B/HlND B, 5-220 MP-42, 5-74
Mi-24D/HIND D, 5-218-5-220 MP-46M, 5-74
AT-2/SWATTER on, 5-102, 5-104 MT-12, 5-99, 5-101
Mi-24E/HIND E, 5-219-5220 MT-55, 5-139, 5-141
AT-6/SPIRAL on, 5-102, 5-111 as replacement for T-54 MTU, 5-142
Mi-24P/HIND F, 5-102, 5-219, 5-220 MTK, 5-31
Mi-24U/HIND C, 5-220 MTK-2, 5-41, 5-177
Mi-25/HIND D, 5-220 MT-I, 5-40
Mi-26/HALO A, 5-211 5-221-5-222 MT-LB, 5-30, 5-40-541. See also variants listed below
ASU-85 transported by, 5-56 chassis modified for 2S12, 5-78
Mi-6A/HOOK replaced by, 5-214 NBC collective protection on, 5-186
ZSU-23-4 airlifted by, 5-118 SA-13/GOPHER carried on, 5-136-5-137
Mi-28/HAVOC A, 5-211, 5-223 1-12 and MT-12 towed by, 5-101
transported by Mi-26/HALO A, 5-221-5222
MiG-17/FRESCO, 5-225
2839 mounted on, 5-75
MiG-19/FARMER, 5-225 2S1 compared to, 5-64
MiG-21/FISHBED, 5-225 MT-LB M1975, 5-41
MiG-23/FLOGGER B, 5-225 BIG FRED (SNAR-10) on, 5-93
MiG-23/FLOGGER G, 5-225 MT-LBu, 5-41
.
MiG-25/FOXBAT A, 5-226 chassis used on ACRV 1V12 series, 5-41, 5-42
MiG-31/FOXHOUND A variant of, 5-227 2S1 chassis derived from, 5-64
MiG-25/FOXBAT B, 5-226 MT-LBV, 5-40
MiG-25/FOXBAT D, 5-226 MT-T, 5-73, 5-135, 5-146, 5-151, 5-154, 5-182
Equipment Index-9
FM 100-2-3
Equipment Index-lO
FM 100-2-3
Equipment Index-i11
FM 100-2-3
Equipment Index-13
FM 100-2-3
Equipment Index-14
FM 100-2-3
Equipment Index-i15
FM 100-2-3
Equipment Index-16
COMBINED ARMS RESEARCH LIBRARY
FORTLEAVENWORTH.
KS
FM 100-2-3
6 JUNE 1991
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
CARL E. VUONO
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
PATRICIA P. HICKERSON
Colonel, United States Army
The Adjutant General
DISTRIBUTION:
Active Army, USAR, and ARNG: To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-11E, requirements
for FM 100-2-3 The Soviet Army Troops Organization and Equipment (Qty rqr block no. 1240).